CN107036371A - Refrigerator - Google Patents
Refrigerator Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN107036371A CN107036371A CN201710367605.8A CN201710367605A CN107036371A CN 107036371 A CN107036371 A CN 107036371A CN 201710367605 A CN201710367605 A CN 201710367605A CN 107036371 A CN107036371 A CN 107036371A
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- door
- opening operation
- door opening
- proximity sensor
- refrigerator
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D11/00—Self-contained movable devices, e.g. domestic refrigerators
- F25D11/02—Self-contained movable devices, e.g. domestic refrigerators with cooling compartments at different temperatures
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D11/00—Self-contained movable devices, e.g. domestic refrigerators
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D23/00—General constructional features
- F25D23/02—Doors; Covers
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D23/00—General constructional features
- F25D23/02—Doors; Covers
- F25D23/028—Details
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D23/00—General constructional features
- F25D23/06—Walls
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D27/00—Lighting arrangements
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D27/00—Lighting arrangements
- F25D27/005—Lighting arrangements combined with control means
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D29/00—Arrangement or mounting of control or safety devices
- F25D29/003—Arrangement or mounting of control or safety devices for movable devices
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D29/00—Arrangement or mounting of control or safety devices
- F25D29/005—Mounting of control devices
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D29/00—Arrangement or mounting of control or safety devices
- F25D29/008—Alarm devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01H—ELECTRIC SWITCHES; RELAYS; SELECTORS; EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
- H01H36/00—Switches actuated by change of magnetic field or of electric field, e.g. by change of relative position of magnet and switch, by shielding
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01H—ELECTRIC SWITCHES; RELAYS; SELECTORS; EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
- H01H36/00—Switches actuated by change of magnetic field or of electric field, e.g. by change of relative position of magnet and switch, by shielding
- H01H36/0006—Permanent magnet actuating reed switches
- H01H36/0013—Permanent magnet actuating reed switches characterised by the co-operation between reed switch and permanent magnet; Magnetic circuits
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H03—ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
- H03K—PULSE TECHNIQUE
- H03K17/00—Electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making and –breaking
- H03K17/94—Electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making and –breaking characterised by the way in which the control signals are generated
- H03K17/96—Touch switches
- H03K17/962—Capacitive touch switches
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D2201/00—Insulation
- F25D2201/10—Insulation with respect to heat
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D2323/00—General constructional features not provided for in other groups of this subclass
- F25D2323/02—Details of doors or covers not otherwise covered
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D2323/00—General constructional features not provided for in other groups of this subclass
- F25D2323/02—Details of doors or covers not otherwise covered
- F25D2323/021—French doors
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D2400/00—General features of, or devices for refrigerators, cold rooms, ice-boxes, or for cooling or freezing apparatus not covered by any other subclass
- F25D2400/36—Visual displays
- F25D2400/361—Interactive visual displays
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D2600/00—Control issues
- F25D2600/06—Controlling according to a predetermined profile
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D2700/00—Means for sensing or measuring; Sensors therefor
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D2700/00—Means for sensing or measuring; Sensors therefor
- F25D2700/02—Sensors detecting door opening
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F25—REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
- F25D—REFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F25D2700/00—Means for sensing or measuring; Sensors therefor
- F25D2700/04—Sensors detecting the presence of a person
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H03—ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
- H03K—PULSE TECHNIQUE
- H03K2217/00—Indexing scheme related to electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making or -breaking covered by H03K17/00
- H03K2217/94—Indexing scheme related to electronic switching or gating, i.e. not by contact-making or -breaking covered by H03K17/00 characterised by the way in which the control signal is generated
- H03K2217/96—Touch switches
- H03K2217/9607—Capacitive touch switches
- H03K2217/960755—Constructional details of capacitive touch and proximity switches
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Thermal Sciences (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Refrigerator Housings (AREA)
- Cold Air Circulating Systems And Constructional Details In Refrigerators (AREA)
- Devices That Are Associated With Refrigeration Equipment (AREA)
Abstract
本发明实施方式的冰箱(1)具有:前表面开口的冰箱主体(11);安装于冰箱主体(11)的前表面开口部的隔热性的门(21、22);安装于冰箱主体(11),并使门(21、22)强制性地进行开门动作的开门装置(54、55);设置于门(22)的用于进行变更冰箱的冷却控制内容的操作的控制操作部(50);设置于门(21、22)的用于操作开门装置(54、55)的开门动作的开门操作部(51、52);被输入来自控制操作部和开门操作部(51、52)的操作信号,进行相应的冷却控制和开门控制的控制部(56)。对开门操作部(51、52)提供开门操作输入的部分是门的前面板(21A、22A)的一部分,与前面板(21A、22A)连续成一体。针对控制操作部(50)的操作和针对开门操作部(51、52)的操作采用不同的操作方法。
A refrigerator (1) according to an embodiment of the present invention has: a refrigerator main body (11) with an open front surface; heat-insulating doors (21, 22) attached to the front opening of the refrigerator main body (11); 11), and a door opening device (54, 55) that makes the door (21, 22) forcibly open the door; a control operation part (50) that is arranged on the door (22) to change the cooling control content of the refrigerator ); the door-opening operation part (51, 52) that is used to operate the door-opening action of the door-opening device (54, 55) that is arranged on the door (21, 22); is input from the control operation part and the door-opening operation part (51, 52) The control unit (56) performs the corresponding cooling control and door opening control by operating the signal. The part that provides the door opening operation input to the door opening operation part (51, 52) is a part of the front panel (21A, 22A) of the door, and is continuously integrated with the front panel (21A, 22A). Different operation methods are adopted for the operation of the control operation part (50) and the operation of the door opening operation parts (51, 52).
Description
本申请是申请号为201480030279.6、申请日为2014年6月25日、发明名称为冰箱的发明专利申请的分案申请。This application is a divisional application of the invention patent application with the application number 201480030279.6, the application date is June 25, 2014, and the invention name is refrigerator.
技术领域technical field
本发明涉及门前表面的前面板上具有触摸传感器的冰箱。The present invention relates to a refrigerator having a touch sensor on the front panel of the door front surface.
背景技术Background technique
近年来,出现了门上具有玻璃制或塑料制的作为化妆板的前面板的冰箱。对于这样的冰箱而言,操作输入部采用静电电容式触控按键并配置于前面板,使用者触摸前面板前表面的与操作按键对应的部位时,因静电电容的变化而感知操作输入,并将对应的操作信号传送给冰箱控制部。还希望这样的冰箱具有感知用户对前面板特定部位的触摸操作而使门自动开门的开门装置。In recent years, refrigerators having a front panel made of glass or plastic as a cosmetic panel have appeared on the door. For such a refrigerator, the operation input unit adopts electrostatic capacitive touch keys and is arranged on the front panel. The corresponding operation signal is transmitted to the refrigerator control unit. It is also desirable that such a refrigerator has a door opening device that detects a user's touch operation on a specific part of the front panel to automatically open the door.
但是,在想要在触摸前面板的某个特定部位时自动开门的情况下,有可能会产生以下误动作:即使用户没有开门的意思而是不慎触摸了该部位一下或者用户身体的一部分无意识地接触了该部位也会导致开门。However, in the case of wanting to automatically open the door when touching a specific part of the front panel, the following malfunctions may occur: even if the user accidentally touches the part without intending to open the door or the user is not aware of a part of the body Ground contact with this part will also cause the door to open.
为了避免这样的误动作,可以考虑利用通过触摸检测机构来使开门装置工作的技术,但是无法避免误动作。In order to avoid such erroneous operation, it is conceivable to utilize a technique of operating the door opener by a touch detection mechanism, but erroneous operation cannot be avoided.
在先技术文献prior art literature
专利文献patent documents
专利文献1:特日本开2009-257627号公报(JP2009-257627A)Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-257627 (JP2009-257627A)
专利文献2:日本专利第4347234号公报(JP4347234B)Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent No. 4347234 (JP4347234B)
专利文献3:日本特开2012-17865号公报(JP2012-017865A)Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-17865 (JP2012-017865A)
专利文献4:日本特开2012-17866号公报(JP2012-017866A)Patent Document 4: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-17866 (JP2012-017866A)
发明内容Contents of the invention
本发明就是鉴于上述现有技术的问题而做出的,目的在于提供以下冰箱:即使在用户没有开门的意图而长时间接触该部位的情况下或物体长时间接触该部位的情况下,也不会产生开门的误动作。The present invention has been made in view of the problems of the prior art described above, and an object thereof is to provide a refrigerator that does not freeze even when the user touches the part for a long time without opening the door or an object touches the part for a long time. Malfunction of opening the door will occur.
本发明的冰箱具有:前表面开口的冰箱主体;安装于冰箱主体的前表面开口部的隔热性的门;以及安装于冰箱主体,强制性地使门进行开门动作的开门装置。The refrigerator of the present invention includes: a refrigerator main body with an open front surface; an insulating door attached to the front opening of the refrigerator main body; and a door opening device attached to the refrigerator main body to forcibly open the door.
本发明的另一冰箱具有:前表面开口的冰箱主体;安装于冰箱主体的前表面开口部的隔热性的门;安装于冰箱主体,强制性地使门进行开门动作的开门装置;设置于门上的用于进行变更冰箱的冷却控制内容的操作的控制操作部;设置于门上,用于对开门装置的开门动作进行操作的开门操作部;以及被输入来自控制操作部和开门操作部的操作信号,进行相应的冷却控制和开门控制的控制部。对开门操作部提供开门操作输入的部分是门的前面板的一部分,与该前面板连续成一体。对控制操作部的操作和对开门操作部的操作采用不同的操作方法。Another refrigerator of the present invention has: a refrigerator main body with an open front surface; a heat-insulating door installed on the front opening of the refrigerator main body; a door opening device installed on the refrigerator main body to forcibly open the door; The control operation part on the door is used to change the cooling control content of the refrigerator; the door opening operation part is arranged on the door and is used to operate the door opening action of the door opening device; and the control operation part and the door opening operation part are input The control unit that performs the corresponding cooling control and door opening control through the operation signal. The part that provides the door opening operation input to the door opening operation part is a part of the front panel of the door, and is continuously integrated with the front panel. Different operation methods are adopted for the operation of the control operation part and the operation of the door opening operation part.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是第1实施方式涉及的冰箱的主视图。Fig. 1 is a front view of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment.
图2是第1实施方式涉及的冰箱的开门状态的立体图。Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment in a door-open state.
图3是第1实施方式涉及的冰箱的冷藏室部分的放大立体图。3 is an enlarged perspective view of a refrigerator compartment portion of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment.
图4是第1实施方式涉及的冰箱的开门控制的框图。Fig. 4 is a block diagram of door opening control of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment.
图5是第1实施方式的冰箱的开门控制的流程图。Fig. 5 is a flowchart of door opening control of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment.
图6是第1实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部的安装操作的说明图。Fig. 6 is an explanatory diagram of installation operation of the door-opening operation unit of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment.
图7是表示第1实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部的安装状态的截面图。Fig. 7 is a cross-sectional view showing an attached state of the door-opening operation unit of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment.
图8是表示第7实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部及开门操作显示部的主视图。8 is a front view showing a door-opening operation unit and a door-opening operation display unit of a refrigerator according to a seventh embodiment.
图9是表示第8实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部及开门操作显示部的主视图。9 is a front view showing a door-opening operation unit and a door-opening operation display unit of a refrigerator according to an eighth embodiment.
图10(a)~10(e)是表示第9实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部的设置例的说明图。10( a ) to 10( e ) are explanatory diagrams showing installation examples of the door-opening operation unit of the refrigerator according to the ninth embodiment.
图11是表示第10实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部的触摸检测电极的配置例的说明图。11 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement example of touch detection electrodes in a door-opening operation unit of a refrigerator according to a tenth embodiment.
图12是表示第11实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部的触摸检测电极的配置例的说明图。12 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement example of touch detection electrodes in a door opening operation unit of a refrigerator according to an eleventh embodiment.
图13是表示第11实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部的触摸检测电极的另一配置例的说明图。13 is an explanatory view showing another arrangement example of the touch detection electrodes of the door-opening operation unit of the refrigerator according to the eleventh embodiment.
图14是表示第12实施方式的冰箱的开门操作部及开门操作显示部的主视图。14 is a front view showing a door-opening operation unit and a door-opening operation display unit of a refrigerator according to a twelfth embodiment.
图15是表示第15实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 15 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a fifteenth embodiment.
图16是表示第17实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 16 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a seventeenth embodiment.
图17是表示第18实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 17 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to an eighteenth embodiment.
图18是表示第16实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 18 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a sixteenth embodiment.
图19是表示第15实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 19 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a fifteenth embodiment.
图20是表示第20实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 20 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a twentieth embodiment.
图21是表示第19实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 21 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a nineteenth embodiment.
图22是表示第22实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 22 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a twenty-second embodiment.
图23是表示第24实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 23 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a twenty-fourth embodiment.
图24是表示第16实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 24 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a sixteenth embodiment.
图25(a)、25(b)是表示第25实施方式的冰箱的图。25(a) and 25(b) are diagrams showing a refrigerator according to a twenty-fifth embodiment.
图26是表示第26实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 26 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a twenty-sixth embodiment.
图27是表示其他实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 27 is a diagram showing a refrigerator in another embodiment.
图28是表示其他实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 28 is a diagram showing a refrigerator in another embodiment.
图29是表示第27实施方式的冰箱的图。Fig. 29 is a diagram showing a refrigerator according to a twenty-seventh embodiment.
图30是第27实施方式的冰箱的开门状态的立体图。Fig. 30 is a perspective view of a door-open state of the refrigerator according to the twenty-seventh embodiment.
图31是第27实施方式的冰箱的冷藏室部分的放大立体图。Fig. 31 is an enlarged perspective view of a refrigerator compartment portion of a refrigerator according to a twenty-seventh embodiment.
图32是第27实施方式的冰箱的开门控制的框图。Fig. 32 is a block diagram of door opening control of a refrigerator according to a twenty-seventh embodiment.
图33是表示自动打开而不是由使用者手动打开第27实施方式的冷藏室的左门和右门的情形的流程图。Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing how the left door and the right door of the refrigerator compartment according to the twenty-seventh embodiment are opened automatically instead of manually by the user.
图34是第27实施方式的冰箱的例如右门的横截面的示意图。Fig. 34 is a schematic diagram of a cross-section of, for example, a right door of a refrigerator according to a twenty-seventh embodiment.
图35是第27实施方式的冰箱的开门控制的框图。Fig. 35 is a block diagram of door opening control of a refrigerator according to a twenty-seventh embodiment.
图36是表示第27实施方式的具有接近传感器的功能的开门操作部的动作例的流程图。36 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the door opening operation unit having the function of the proximity sensor according to the twenty-seventh embodiment.
图37是第28实施方式的冰箱的主视图。Fig. 37 is a front view of a refrigerator according to a twenty-eighth embodiment.
图38是第28实施方式的冰箱的开门状态的立体图。Fig. 38 is a perspective view of a door-open state of the refrigerator according to the twenty-eighth embodiment.
图39是第28实施方式的冰箱的冷藏室部分的放大立体图。Fig. 39 is an enlarged perspective view of a refrigerator compartment portion of a refrigerator according to a twenty-eighth embodiment.
图40是第28实施方式的冰箱的开门控制的框图。Fig. 40 is a block diagram of door opening control of a refrigerator according to a twenty-eighth embodiment.
图41(a)~41(d)是表示图37到图39所示的门的开门操作部作为用于检测冰箱用户的人体的人体检测机构而起作用的例子的图。41( a ) to 41 ( d ) are diagrams showing an example in which the door opening operation unit shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 functions as a human body detection mechanism for detecting a refrigerator user's human body.
图42是表示第29实施方式的冰箱的主视图。Fig. 42 is a front view showing a refrigerator according to a twenty-ninth embodiment.
图43是图42所示的冰箱的包含人体检测机构的开门控制的框图。Fig. 43 is a block diagram of door opening control including a human body detection mechanism of the refrigerator shown in Fig. 42 .
图44是表示第29实施方式的冰箱的上部的沿前后方向的截面图。Fig. 44 is a cross-sectional view along the front-rear direction showing the upper part of the refrigerator according to the twenty-ninth embodiment.
图45是表示第29实施方式的第1变形例的冰箱的上部的沿前后方向的截面图。Fig. 45 is a cross-sectional view along the front-rear direction showing the upper portion of the refrigerator according to the first modified example of the twenty-ninth embodiment.
图46是表示第29实施方式的第2变形例的冰箱的上部的沿前后方向的截面图。Fig. 46 is a cross-sectional view along the front-rear direction showing the upper portion of a refrigerator according to a second modified example of the twenty-ninth embodiment.
图47是表示第29实施方式的第3变形例的冰箱的上部的沿前后方向に的截面图。Fig. 47 is a cross-sectional view along the front-rear direction ni showing an upper portion of a refrigerator according to a third modified example of the twenty-ninth embodiment.
图48是表示第30实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。Fig. 48 is a front view showing refrigerator 1 according to the thirtieth embodiment.
图49是图48所示的冰箱的俯视图。Fig. 49 is a plan view of the refrigerator shown in Fig. 48 .
图50是图48所示的冰箱的侧视图。Fig. 50 is a side view of the refrigerator shown in Fig. 48 .
图51(a)、51(b)表示开门操作部的基板的构造例。51( a ), 51( b ) show structural examples of the substrate of the door opening operation unit.
图52是表示配置于图51所示的开门操作部的基板的接近传感器和保护电极的图。FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a proximity sensor and a guard electrode disposed on a substrate of the door-opening operation unit shown in FIG. 51 .
图53是表示开门操作部的构造例的分解立体图。Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view showing a structural example of a door opening operation unit.
图54是表示控制部、开门操作部、作为开门装置的开门驱动部等的电连接的框图。Fig. 54 is a block diagram showing electrical connection of a control unit, a door opening operation unit, a door opening driving unit as a door opening device, and the like.
图55(a)~55(c)是表示左门和右门的基板的收纳构造例的图。55( a ) to 55 ( c ) are diagrams showing examples of storage structures of the substrates of the left door and the right door.
图56是表示第31实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。Fig. 56 is a front view showing refrigerator 1 according to the thirty-first embodiment.
图57是表示图56所示的左门21的包含接近传感器607的开门操作部651附近(或者右门22的包含接近传感器608的开门操作部652附近)的构造例的Vl-Vl线处的截面图。FIG. 57 is a diagram at line V1-V1 showing a configuration example near the opening operation portion 651 including the proximity sensor 607 of the left door 21 shown in FIG. 56 (or near the opening operation portion 652 including the proximity sensor 608 of the right door 22). Sectional view.
图58是图56所示的控制操作部650的V2-V2线处的截面图。FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view along line V2-V2 of the control operation unit 650 shown in FIG. 56 .
图59是表示控制部、控制操作部、开门操作部、作为开门装置的开门驱动部的电连接的框图。Fig. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical connection of a control unit, a control operation unit, a door opening operation unit, and a door opening driving unit as a door opening device.
图60(a)~60(d)是表示图56所示的左门的接近传感器检测出用户手指的接近后,在手指接触了开门操作部的触控按键的电极的情况下左门的控制操作部和开门操作部亮灯的情形的例子的图。60(a) to 60(d) show the control of the left door when the proximity sensor of the left door shown in FIG. A diagram showing an example of how the operation unit and the door opening operation unit are lit.
图61是表示第32实施方式的冰箱的主视图。Fig. 61 is a front view showing a refrigerator according to a thirty-second embodiment.
图62是图61所示的冰箱的俯视图。Fig. 62 is a top view of the refrigerator shown in Fig. 61 .
图63是图61所示的冰箱的侧视图。Fig. 63 is a side view of the refrigerator shown in Fig. 61 .
图64(a)、64(b)表示图61所示的开门操作部的基板的构造例。64( a ), 64( b ) show structural examples of the substrate of the door opening operation part shown in FIG. 61 .
图65是表示配置于图64所示的开门操作部的基板的接近传感器和保护电极的图。FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a proximity sensor and a guard electrode arranged on a substrate of the door opening operation unit shown in FIG. 64 .
图66是表示开门操作部的构造例的分解立体图。Fig. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing a structural example of a door opening operation unit.
图67是表示控制部、开门操作部、作为开门装置的开门驱动部等的电连接的框图。Fig. 67 is a block diagram showing electrical connection of a control unit, a door opening operation unit, a door opening driving unit as a door opening device, and the like.
图68(a)~68(c)是表示左门和右门的基板的收纳构造例的图。68( a ) to 68( c ) are diagrams showing examples of storage structures of the substrates of the left door and the right door.
图69是表示第33实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。Fig. 69 is a front view showing refrigerator 1 according to the thirty-third embodiment.
图70是表示图69所示的ZR-ZR线处的操作检测部的构造例的截面图。FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of an operation detection unit on the line ZR-ZR shown in FIG. 69 .
图71是表示控制部、操作检测部、作为开门装置的开门驱动部等的电连接的框图。Fig. 71 is a block diagram showing electrical connection of a control unit, an operation detection unit, a door opening drive unit as a door opening device, and the like.
图72(a)、72(b)是表示用户利用手掌、手的侧部或者肘部等的动作(姿势)以预定的特定顺序来对接近传感器进行接近操作的例子的图。72( a ) and 72 ( b ) are diagrams showing examples in which the user performs proximity operations on the proximity sensor in a predetermined specific order using motions (postures) of the palm, the side of the hand, or the elbow.
图73(a)~73(d)是表示以其他预定的特定顺序对接近传感器进行接近操作的例子的图。73( a ) to 73( d ) are diagrams showing examples in which proximity operations are performed on the proximity sensor in other predetermined specific procedures.
图74(a)~74(d)是表示其他实施方式的图。74(a) to 74(d) are diagrams showing other embodiments.
图75是表示接近传感器检测手指的触摸的原理的电路图。FIG. 75 is a circuit diagram showing the principle of the proximity sensor detecting the touch of a finger.
图76是表示接近传感器的基本构造的图。Fig. 76 is a diagram showing a basic structure of a proximity sensor.
图77是说明接近传感器的接近模式和静电触摸模式的切换的图。FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating switching between the proximity mode and the electrostatic touch mode of the proximity sensor.
图78(a)、78(b)是说明接近传感器的接近范围的变更的图。78(a) and 78(b) are diagrams illustrating changes in the proximity range of the proximity sensor.
具体实施方式detailed description
以下,基于附图来详细说明实施方式。而且,对同一或者类似的构成部件使用同一或者类似的符号来进行说明。Embodiments will be described in detail below based on the drawings. In addition, the same or similar symbols are used for the same or similar components.
第1实施方式first embodiment
如图1、图2所示,第1实施方式的冰箱1具有作为冰箱主体的箱体11。箱体11从上层起具有:冷藏室12、蔬菜室13、能够切换冰箱内设定温度的切换室14、冷冻室1 5。此外,在切换室14的左侧设置有制冰室16。As shown in FIG.1, FIG.2, the refrigerator 1 of 1st Embodiment has the cabinet 11 which is a refrigerator main body. The housing 11 has, from the upper stage, a refrigerator compartment 12, a vegetable compartment 13, a switch compartment 14 capable of switching the set temperature in the refrigerator, and a freezer compartment 15. In addition, an ice making compartment 16 is provided on the left side of the switch compartment 14 .
如图1~图3所示,为了覆盖冷藏室12的前表面开口部,左右构成ー对的左门21、右门22分别在左端部、右端部的上下利用铰链部安装成:以对开式进行开闭。而且,蔬菜室13、切换室14、冷冻室15、制冰室16分别设置有推拉式的门23、24、25、26。在蔬菜室13的背面配置有用于冷却冷藏室12和蔬菜室13的冷藏用蒸发器(未图示)。在切换室14及冷冻室15的背面配置有用于冷却切换室14、冷冻室15、制冰室16的冷冻用蒸发器(未图示)。在蔬菜室13的背面还配置有用于控制冰箱1的由微机构成的控制部56。As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 , in order to cover the front opening of the refrigerator compartment 12, a pair of left and right doors 21 and 22 are installed on the left and right ends by hinges: open and close. Moreover, the vegetable compartment 13, the switching compartment 14, the freezer compartment 15, and the ice making compartment 16 are provided with push-pull type doors 23, 24, 25, 26, respectively. A refrigerating evaporator (not shown) for cooling refrigerating room 12 and vegetable room 13 is arranged on the rear surface of vegetable room 13 . A freezing evaporator (not shown) for cooling switchable chamber 14 , freezing chamber 15 , and ice making chamber 16 is disposed on the rear surface of switchable chamber 14 and freezing chamber 15 . A control unit 56 composed of a microcomputer for controlling the refrigerator 1 is also disposed on the back of the vegetable compartment 13 .
左门21、右门22都是以下构造:在前表面开口的扁平内板的开口部安装有着色透明的玻璃制前面板21A、22A,且在内部空洞部配置有真空隔热材料,在未被真空隔热材料填埋的空洞部配置有泡沫聚氨酯隔热材料(以下也简称为聚氨酯隔热材料)或者预成型的固体隔热材料(例如EPC)。前面板21A、22A的着色度为在受到外光照射的状态下从外看不到前面板21A、22A背面的隔热材料等填充物的浓度。而且,在该浓度下,在对后述的操作按键名、冷却功能名、冷却强度等进行透过显示的LED显示灯、对温度值等变化的数值进行透过显示的7段LED显示装置的亮灯状态下,光会透过而从表面侧能够看到。此外,并不限于7段LED,也可以是LCD、EL。Both the left door 21 and the right door 22 have the following structures: colored and transparent glass front panels 21A, 22A are attached to the openings of the flat inner panels that are open on the front surface, and a vacuum heat insulating material is arranged in the internal cavity. A foamed polyurethane heat insulating material (hereinafter also simply referred to as a polyurethane heat insulating material) or a preformed solid heat insulating material (such as EPC) is disposed in the hollow portion filled with the vacuum heat insulating material. The degree of coloring of the front panels 21A and 22A is the concentration at which fillers such as heat insulating materials on the backs of the front panels 21A and 22A cannot be seen from the outside in a state of being irradiated with external light. And under this concentration, the LED display lamp that transparently displays the name of the operation button, the name of the cooling function, and the cooling intensity described later, and the 7-segment LED display device that transparently displays the changing numerical value such as the temperature value In the lit state, light passes through and can be seen from the front side. In addition, it is not limited to 7-segment LEDs, and LCDs and ELs may be used.
在左门21的右端部、即在关闭状态下接近右门22的左端部并与之相对的开放侧的部分,设置有旋转隔离体31,旋转隔离体31用于在门关闭状态下,保持与右门22的左端部、即开放侧的部分的密封状态。在该旋转隔离体31的内部内置有用于防止结露的结露防止加热器。At the right end of the left door 21, that is, the part on the open side that is close to the left end of the right door 22 in the closed state and opposite to it, a rotating isolator 31 is provided, and the rotating isolator 31 is used to hold the door in the closed state. The sealing state with the left end part of the right door 22, that is, the part on the open side. A dew condensation prevention heater for preventing dew condensation is built in the rotating isolator 31 .
在右门22的前面板22A的背面侧设置有用于通过针对前面板22A的表面的触摸操作来操作冰箱的静电电容式控制操作部50。在该控制操作部50上设置有用于检测冰箱周围的环境状态的红外线受光部、HOME按键、检测出对该HOME按键的触摸而对操作按键名、冷却功能名、冷却强度等进行透过显示的LED显示灯、对温度值等变化的数值进行透过显示的7段LED显示装置等。On the back side of the front panel 22A of the right door 22 is provided a capacitive control operation unit 50 for operating the refrigerator by touching the surface of the front panel 22A. The control operation part 50 is provided with an infrared light receiving part for detecting the environmental state around the refrigerator, a HOME button, and a device for transparently displaying the name of the operation button, the name of the cooling function, the cooling intensity, etc. upon detecting the touch of the HOME button. LED display lamps, 7-segment LED display devices that transparently display changing values such as temperature values, etc.
在左门21的前面板21A、右门22的前面板22A的下边附近的背面侧分别设置有左右横向细长的开门操作部51、52。而且,在前面板21A、22A的表面设置有表示是开门操作部且表示开门操作方向的开门操作显示部51A、52A。在此,在左门21的开门操作显示部51A上设置有朝左的箭头标记,该朝左的箭头标记用于认知在手指触摸的状态下使手指向左方滑动来进行开门操作。在右门22的开门操作显示部52A上设置有朝右的箭头标记,该朝右的箭头标记用于认知在手指触摸的状态下使手指向右方滑动来进行开门操作。On the rear side of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 and the lower side of the front panel 22A of the right door 22, respectively, horizontally elongated door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are provided. Moreover, the door opening operation display part 51A, 52A which shows that it is a door opening operation part and shows a door opening operation direction is provided in the surface of front panel 21A, 22A. Here, a leftward arrow mark is provided on the door-opening operation display portion 51A of the left door 21 for recognizing that the door-opening operation is performed by sliding the finger to the left while the finger is in the touch state. On the door opening operation display portion 52A of the right door 22 is provided a rightward arrow mark for recognizing that the door opening operation is performed by sliding the finger to the right while the finger is in the touch state.
在箱体11的顶板上表面的前端附近的左右2个部位亦即在与左门21、右门22各自的上边开放侧端部附近对应的位置分别设置有开门驱动部54、55。这些开门驱动部54、55通过利用电磁铁将动铁芯54A、55A向前方推出,将左门21、右门22各自的开放侧端部附近的上边向前方推出而使各门能够自动开放。此外,为了对左门21进行开门,如果在手指触摸左门开门操作显示部51A的右端或者右端附近的箭头标记的状态下使手指向左方滑动,则开门操作部51感知其连续的触摸而将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56,控制部56判断为是开门操作指令时,使左门21的开门驱动部54动作,使左门21自动开门,详细情况后面叙述。另一方面,为了对右门22进行开门,如果在手指触摸右门开门操作显示部52A的左端或者左端附近的箭头标记的状态下使手指向右方滑动,则开门操作部52感知其连续的触摸而将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56,控制部56判断为是开门操作指令时,使右门22的开门驱动部55动作,使右门22自动开门。Door opening driving parts 54 and 55 are respectively provided at two positions on the left and right near the front end of the upper surface of the top plate of the box body 11, that is, at positions corresponding to the vicinity of the upper open side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22, respectively. These door-opening driving parts 54, 55 push forward the moving iron cores 54A, 55A by using electromagnets, and push the upper edges near the opening side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22 forward, so that each door can be opened automatically. In addition, in order to open the left door 21, if the finger touches the right end of the left door opening operation display part 51A or the arrow mark near the right end and slides the finger to the left, the door opening operation part 51 senses the continuous touch. The touch detection signal is sent to the control unit 56, and when the control unit 56 judges that it is a door opening operation command, it activates the door opening drive unit 54 of the left door 21 to automatically open the left door 21. The details will be described later. On the other hand, in order to open the right door 22, if the finger is slid to the right while touching the left end of the right door opening operation display part 52A or the arrow mark near the left end, the opening operation part 52 senses its continuous movement. Touch to send a touch detection signal to the control unit 56. When the control unit 56 judges that it is a door opening operation command, it activates the door opening drive unit 55 of the right door 22 to automatically open the right door 22.
另外,第1实施方式的冰箱的控制部56所进行的冷却控制是一般的控制,没有特别限定,但是,例如、压缩机、操作面板、结露防止加热器、制冰室内部的制冰装置、冷藏室风扇、冷冻室风扇、除霜加热器与该控制部56相连接而被控制。In addition, the cooling control performed by the control unit 56 of the refrigerator of the first embodiment is general control and is not particularly limited. , the refrigerating room fan, the freezing room fan, and the defrosting heater are connected to the control unit 56 to be controlled.
开门操作显示部51A、52A的箭头标记并不限于该显示,只要是能够容易认知如果触摸此处并向右方或者向左方滑动则将进行开门操作的显示的话,那么标记的形状、形态是没有限定的。The arrow marks on the door opening operation display parts 51A, 52A are not limited to this display, as long as it is easy to recognize that if the door opening operation will be performed if the door is touched and slid to the right or left, then the shape and form of the marks There is no limit.
在左门21、右门22上,在比开门操作显示部51A、52A靠下侧的下端面部分分别设置有把手61、62,使得通过使手掌朝上而将手指插入其中,并向面前侧拉动的操作而能够使左门21、右门22分别个别地进行手动开门。On the left door 21 and the right door 22, handles 61, 62 are respectively provided on the lower end surface parts of the lower side than the door opening operation display parts 51A, 52A, so that fingers can be inserted therein by making the palm face upward, and facing the front side. The operation of pulling enables the left door 21 and the right door 22 to be manually opened individually.
接下来,对第1实施方式的冰箱的自动开门动作进行说明。如图4所示,在开门操作部51、52各自的开门操作显示部51A、52A的左右横向排列的5个箭头标记处分别以夹着前面板21A、22A而相对的方式并列设置有静电电容式触摸传感器51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5。这些静电电容式触摸传感器51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5分别设定成检测因用户的触摸而导致的静电电容变化,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56。Next, the automatic door opening operation|movement of the refrigerator of 1st Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 4 , at the five arrow marks arranged in the left and right horizontal directions of the door-opening operation display parts 51A and 52A of the door-opening operation parts 51 and 52, respectively, electrostatic capacitors are arranged in parallel so as to face each other across the front panels 21A and 22A. Type touch sensors 51-1 to 51-5, 52-1 to 52-5. These capacitive touch sensors 51 - 1 to 51 - 5 , 52 - 1 to 52 - 5 are set to detect changes in capacitance caused by a user's touch, respectively, and to send touch detection signals to the control unit 56 .
因此,用户要打开右门22而在开门操作显示部52A的部分用手指触摸左端的箭头标记,并在触摸的状态下使该手指向右方滑动时,静电电容式触摸传感器52-1~52-5中检测出静电电容的变化的传感器分别将触摸检测信号按照触摸的顺序发送给控制部56。因此,控制部56根据图5的流程图的逻辑来判断是否是开门操作,如果判断为是正规的开门操作,则对右门的开门驱动部55输出开门驱动信号而使右门22自动开门。另外,在左门21的开门操作的情况下,针对左门21的开门操作显示部51A,对在触摸右端或者靠近右端的箭头标记的状态下使手指向左方滑动的操作来判断同样的左门21的开门操作。Therefore, when the user opens the right door 22 and touches the arrow mark on the left end with a finger on the part of the door opening operation display part 52A, and slides the finger to the right while touching, the capacitive touch sensors 52-1 to 52 Each of the sensors detecting a change in electrostatic capacitance in - 5 sends touch detection signals to the control unit 56 in the order of touch. Therefore, the control unit 56 judges whether it is a door opening operation according to the logic of the flow chart of FIG. In addition, in the case of the door opening operation of the left door 21, for the door opening operation display part 51A of the left door 21, the operation of sliding the finger to the left while touching the arrow mark on the right end or close to the right end is judged to be the same left. The door opening operation of the door 21.
此处的开门判断逻辑如下。在左右的各5个传感器中至少3个传感器在规定时间(例如0.5秒或者1秒)内,且按照排列顺序进行了触摸检测的情况下判断为是开门操作,并使相应的门自动开门。在此,对右门22的开门操作进行说明。The door opening judgment logic here is as follows. When at least 3 of the 5 sensors on the left and right have detected touch within a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1 second) and according to the order of arrangement, it is determined that it is a door opening operation, and the corresponding door is automatically opened. Here, the door opening operation of the right door 22 will be described.
当触摸右门22的开门操作显示部52A的箭头标记的任意一个时,开门操作部52侧的所对应的静电电容式触摸传感器(通常是触摸左端或者靠近左端的箭头标记,因此,在此假设为左端的传感器52-1)进行触摸检测,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56。控制部56接收该信号而开始开门操作的判断处理(步骤S0)。然后,首先开始计时(步骤S1)。When any one of the arrow marks on the door-opening operation display portion 52A of the right door 22 is touched, the corresponding electrostatic capacitive touch sensor on the door-opening operation portion 52 side (usually touches the left end or the arrow mark near the left end, so it is assumed here that The sensor 52 - 1 ) at the left end performs touch detection and sends a touch detection signal to the control unit 56 . The control part 56 receives this signal, and starts the judgment process of a door opening operation (step S0). Then, timing is first started (step S1).
右侧、再右侧的静电电容式触摸传感器52-2、52-3接着进行触摸检测,并发送检测信号,直到计时器计时结束,控制部56接收这些信号,被触摸的传感器向右方为连续的3个,作为从左方向右方的右门22的开门操作方向,判断为是正向滑动操作。即、进行步骤S2中NO、步骤S3中YES、步骤S4中YES、步骤S5中YES的判断。其结果,控制部56判断为是对右门22的正规的开门操作,从而对右门的开门驱动部55输出开门驱动指令,使开门驱动部55动作而使右门22自动开门(步骤S6)。The electrostatic capacitive touch sensors 52-2, 52-3 on the right side and the right side then perform touch detection and send detection signals until the timer counts down. The control unit 56 receives these signals, and the touched sensor moves to the right. The three consecutive ones are determined as the forward sliding operation as the door opening operation direction of the right door 22 from the left to the right. That is, judgments of NO in step S2, YES in step S3, YES in step S4, and YES in step S5 are performed. As a result, the control section 56 judges that it is a regular door opening operation to the right door 22, and outputs a door opening drive command to the door opening drive section 55 of the right door, so that the door opening drive section 55 is actuated to automatically open the right door 22 (step S6) .
此外,如果在途中停止了滑动,或者滑动的速度慢,又或者滑动的长度短,则无法判断出在一定时间(例如0.5秒或者1秒)内对3个以上的箭头标记被正向触摸,因此该开门操作的判断处理暂时停止,等待下一触摸检测(步骤S2中分支到YES,跳到步骤S7而停止判断处理)。另外,在开门操作显示部52A上,即使从右端侧向左方进行滑动操作,右门也不开门(步骤S5中分支到NO,跳到步骤S7而停止判断处理)。In addition, if the sliding is stopped on the way, or the sliding speed is slow, or the length of the sliding is short, it cannot be judged that more than 3 arrow marks are positively touched within a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1 second). Therefore, the judging process of the door opening operation is temporarily suspended, waiting for the next touch detection (branching to YES in step S2, jumping to step S7 and stopping the judging process). In addition, even if the sliding operation is performed from the right end side to the left on the door opening operation display portion 52A, the right door does not open (branch to NO in step S5, jump to step S7 and stop the judgment process).
左门21的开门操作的判断处理也一样。但是,在左门21的情况下,在触摸与右门22的朝向相反的、开门操作显示部51A的右端或者右端附近的箭头标记后向左方滑动的情况下,判断为是开门操作。因此,即使从左端或者左端附近的箭头标记向右方进行滑动操作,左门也不会开门。The same applies to the determination process of the door opening operation of the left door 21 . However, in the case of the left door 21, if the arrow mark on or near the right end of the door opening operation display portion 51A is touched and then slid to the left in the direction opposite to that of the right door 22, it is determined to be a door opening operation. Therefore, even if a sliding operation is performed from the left end or the arrow mark near the left end to the right, the left door will not open.
此外,在上述自动开门控制中,采用了以下顺序:控制部56判断开门操作,并且驱动开门驱动部54、55,但是,也可以取而代之采用以下顺序:使微机搭载于开门操作部51、52侧,静电电容式触摸传感器51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5检测用户的触摸所致的静电电容变化,并将触摸检测信号输入到该微机,在开门操作部51、52,判断为在规定时间内存在一定方向的滑动操作时,最终判断为存在开门操作而将左门开门或者右门开门的指令信号发送给控制部56,控制部56接收到该开门指令时,使开门驱动部54或者开门驱动部55进行开门驱动。In addition, in the above-mentioned automatic door opening control, the following procedure is adopted: the control part 56 judges the door opening operation, and drives the door opening driving parts 54, 55. , the electrostatic capacitive touch sensors 51-1~51-5, 52-1~52-5 detect the electrostatic capacitance change caused by the user's touch, and input the touch detection signal to the microcomputer, and the door opening operation parts 51, 52, When it is judged that there is a sliding operation in a certain direction within the specified time, it is finally judged that there is a door opening operation and an instruction signal for opening the left door or opening the right door is sent to the control unit 56, and when the control unit 56 receives the door opening instruction, the door is opened The drive unit 54 or the door opening drive unit 55 drives the door opening.
接下来,使用图6、图7来说明将开门操作部51、52分别组装于左门21、右门22的方法。另外,以下对右门22的开门操作部52进行描述,但是,对于左门21的开门操作部51而言也一样。Next, the method of assembling the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 to the left door 21 and the right door 22, respectively, is demonstrated using FIG.6, FIG.7. In addition, although the door-opening operation part 52 of the right door 22 is described below, the same applies to the door-opening operation part 51 of the left door 21.
首先,开门操作部52为以下构造:在W方向短而T方向长的细长基板52P上使静电电容式触摸传感器52-1~52-5以沿着长度方向T方向排列的方式并列设置。而且,将该开门操作部52按照以其长度方向T方向为左右方向来紧密接合于前面板22A的背面的姿势设置于右门22的下端内部。First, the door opening operation unit 52 has a structure in which capacitive touch sensors 52 - 1 to 52 - 5 are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction T on a long and thin substrate 52P that is short in the W direction and long in the T direction. And the opening operation part 52 is provided in the inside of the lower end of the right door 22 so that the longitudinal direction T direction may become a left-right direction, and it will closely adhere to the back surface of the front panel 22A.
因此,在右门22的下端部的左端附近,设置有下侧开口的操作部设置空间64。该操作部设置空间64的左右横向的宽度比开门操作部52的长度方向T的长度略长,使开门操作部52能够在使其长度方向T为横向的状态下从下表面开口部向上滑动插入。然后,使开门操作部52以使其长度方向T与左右方向一致的姿势直接从操作部设置空间64的下表面开口部向上插入到操作部设置空间64,并使之滑动到操作部设置空间64的上端而固定。之后,在使开门操作部52紧密接合于前面板22A的背面的状态下利用胶带等暂时固定。然后,将液状聚氨酯作为隔热材料22B注入到右门22的内部空洞部,并使之发泡、固化,由此,将该开门操作部52固定于操作部设置空间64内。左门21的开门操作部51也以同样的顺序安装。Therefore, in the vicinity of the left end of the lower end portion of the right door 22 , an operation unit installation space 64 opened on the lower side is provided. The left-right lateral width of the operating portion installation space 64 is slightly longer than the length of the door-opening operating portion 52 in the longitudinal direction T, so that the opening operating portion 52 can be slid and inserted upward from the opening on the lower surface with its longitudinal direction T in the transverse state. . Then, the door-opening operation part 52 is directly inserted upward from the lower surface opening of the operation part installation space 64 into the operation part installation space 64 with its longitudinal direction T aligned with the left-right direction, and is slid into the operation part installation space 64. fixed at the top. Thereafter, the opening operation portion 52 is temporarily fixed with an adhesive tape or the like in a state where the door opening operation portion 52 is closely bonded to the back surface of the front panel 22A. Then, liquid polyurethane is injected into the inner cavity of the right door 22 as the heat insulating material 22B, foamed and solidified, thereby fixing the door opening operation part 52 in the operation part installation space 64 . The door opening operation part 51 of the left door 21 is also attached by the same procedure.
通过采用这样的设置顺序,特别是由于开门操作部51、52以左右横向T方向长而上下方向W方向短的姿势设置并固定于操作部设置空间64,因此,能够避免出现以下状态:在长度方向L方向单端浮起,从而即使右侧的静电电容式触摸传感器52-5紧密接合于前面板22A的背面,左侧的静电电容式触摸传感器52-1也不会紧密接合于前面板22A的背面而以浮动的状态被固定、或者反过来,即使左侧的静电电容式触摸传感器52-1紧密接合于前面板22A的背面,右侧的静电电容式触摸传感器52-5也不会紧密接合于前面板22A的背面而以浮动的状态被固定;如图7所示那样,设置成左右横向排列的所有静电电容式触摸传感器52-1~52-5能够以均等地紧密接合于前面板22A的背面的状态可靠固定。By adopting such an installation sequence, especially since the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are arranged and fixed in the operation part installation space 64 in a posture that is long in the horizontal direction T direction and short in the vertical direction W direction, the following state can be avoided: One-end floating in the direction L direction, so that even if the capacitive touch sensor 52-5 on the right is closely bonded to the back of the front panel 22A, the capacitive touch sensor 52-1 on the left will not be tightly bonded to the front panel 22A The back surface of the front panel is fixed in a floating state, or vice versa, even if the capacitive touch sensor 52-1 on the left is closely bonded to the back surface of the front panel 22A, the capacitive touch sensor 52-5 on the right will not be tightly bonded. Bonded to the back of the front panel 22A and fixed in a floating state; as shown in FIG. The state of the back side of 22A is securely fixed.
其他实施方式Other implementations
作为最简单的冰箱门的构造,在冷藏室的前方配置1扇左开或者右开的单开门,作为该门的构造,也可以采用以下构成:在隔热性门主体的前表面安装着色透明的非导电性的前面板,并设置用于进行变更冰箱的冷却控制内容的操作的控制操作部和用于操作开门装置的开门动作的开门操作部。即、也可以采用使图1~图3所示的右门22的构成设置于1扇门的构成(第2实施方式)。As the simplest refrigerator door structure, a left-handed or right-handed single door is arranged in front of the refrigerator compartment. As the door structure, the following structure can also be adopted: a colored transparent door is installed on the front surface of the heat-insulating door body The non-conductive front panel is equipped with a control operation part for changing the cooling control content of the refrigerator and a door opening operation part for operating the door opening operation of the door opening device. That is, a configuration in which the configuration of the right door 22 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 is provided on one door may be adopted (second embodiment).
此外,控制操作部50、开门操作部51、52不限于静电电容式触摸传感器,也可以是压感式传感器、红外线传感器等在前面板21A、22A的表面侧不设置凹凸,而通过感应用户的操作来进行相应的操作的传感器(第3实施方式)。In addition, the control operation part 50 and the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are not limited to capacitive touch sensors, and may be pressure-sensitive sensors, infrared sensors, etc. that do not have unevenness on the surface side of the front panels 21A and 22A, but can be detected by sensing the user's movement. A sensor that is operated to perform a corresponding operation (third embodiment).
另外,针对控制操作部50和开门操作部51、52不同的操作方法,最好设定成与操作输入相感应。例如,可以设定成:在控制操作部50的情况下,感应对该部位的点触摸而接受一个操作输入,而在开门操作部51、52的情况下,必须在该部位以触摸的状态滑动一定距离以上才识别为开门操作输入(第4实施方式)。In addition, it is preferable to set so as to respond to the operation input for the different operation methods of the control operation part 50 and the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 . For example, it can be set so that: in the case of the control operation part 50, an operation input is accepted by sensing a point touch on the part, while in the case of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52, it is necessary to slide the part in a touched state. It is recognized as a door opening operation input at a certain distance or more (fourth embodiment).
另外,关于开门操作部51、52,也可以不是检测以手指触摸并滑动的操作,而是检测以规定的顺序触摸多个部位或者沿规定的方向按顺序触摸的操作(第5实施方式)。另外,作为其它的变更例,开门操作部也可以不是设置于门的下端部,而是设置于上端部(第6实施方式)。In addition, the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may not detect operations of touching and sliding with a finger, but operations of touching a plurality of places in a predetermined order or sequentially touching in a predetermined direction (fifth embodiment). In addition, as another modified example, the door opening operation part may be provided not in the lower end part of the door but in the upper end part (sixth embodiment).
而且,作为其它实施方式,也可以是以下这样的变更例。如图8所示,在左右的门21、22为对开式的冰箱中,将开门操作部51、52的开门操作显示部51A-l、52A-l设定于前面板21A、22A表面的距地面相同高度的位置,对于左门21的开门操作显示部51A-l而言,可以设定成:如果用户从其左端附近到右端附近,一边用手指触摸一边滑动,则能够使左门21开门,对于右门22的开门操作显示部52A-l而言,也可以设定成:如果用户从其左端附近到右端附近,一边用手指触摸一边滑动,则能够使右门22开门。另外,在该情况下,如图8的箭头A1所示,从左门21的开门操作显示部51A-l的左端附近到右门22的开门操作显示部52A-l的右端附近,单向连续地进行使手指滑动的操作,由此能够使左右两门2 1、22同时开放(第7实施方式)。Furthermore, as other embodiments, the following modified examples are also possible. As shown in FIG. 8 , in a refrigerator in which the left and right doors 21 and 22 are side-by-side, the door opening operation display parts 51A-1 and 52A-1 of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are set on the front panels 21A and 22A surfaces. The position of the same height from the ground can be set as follows for the door opening operation display part 51A-1 of the left door 21: if the user slides from the vicinity of the left end to the vicinity of the right end while touching with a finger, the left door 21 can be opened. To open the door, for the door opening operation display part 52A-1 of the right door 22, it can also be set to: if the user slides from the vicinity of the left end to the vicinity of the right end, the right door 22 can be opened while touching with a finger. In addition, in this case, as shown by arrow A1 in FIG. By performing an operation of sliding a finger, the left and right doors 21, 22 can be simultaneously opened (seventh embodiment).
此外,如图9所示,在左右门21、22为对开式的冰箱中,也可以设定为:将开门操作部51、52的开门操作显示部51A-2、52A-2设置于各门21、22的前面板21A、22A的开放端附近,通过朝向与各门21、22的开放侧相反的方向进行滑动操作,能够使各门21、22分别开门。在该情况下,对于左门21而言,其右端为开放端,因此开门操作显示部51A-2进行从其右端侧向左方滑动的显示。另外,对于右门22而言,其左端为开放端,开门操作显示部52A-2进行从其左端侧向右方滑动的显示。通过这样设定,变成以下操作:用户在门的开放端因开门操作而朝着打开的方向上使手指滑动,因此,用户的手指很少会与开始打开的门的开放端发生干涉,能够顺畅地进行开放操作(第8实施方式)。In addition, as shown in FIG. 9 , in a refrigerator in which the left and right doors 21 and 22 are side-by-side, it is also possible to set the door opening operation display parts 51A- 2 and 52A- 2 of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 on each side. The opening ends of the front panels 21A, 22A of the doors 21 , 22 are slid in a direction opposite to the opening side of the doors 21 , 22 to open the doors 21 , 22 respectively. In this case, since the right end of the left door 21 is an open end, the door opening operation display part 51A- 2 performs the display which slides from the right end side to the left. In addition, the left end of the right door 22 is an open end, and the opening operation display part 52A- 2 performs the display which slides rightward from the left end side. With this setting, the user slides his finger in the direction in which the open end of the door is opened due to the door opening operation. Therefore, the user's finger seldom interferes with the open end of the door that starts to open. The opening operation is performed smoothly (eighth embodiment).
另外,如图10所示,可以设定成:不管冰箱门是单扇门还是对开式的2扇门,在其门(在此为门22)的上下左右的四角中的任意一角附近,水平或垂直地、或者朝向角部斜向设置开门操作部52,开门操作显示部52A-3也设置于门22的前面板22A的与之对应的位置,并且在开门操作方向为朝向该门的外侧的方向的情况下,进行开门动作(第9实施方式)。In addition, as shown in Figure 10, it can be set to: no matter whether the refrigerator door is a single door or a two-leaf door of the side-opening type, near any one of the four corners of the door (here, the door 22) up, down, left, and right, The door opening operation part 52 is arranged horizontally or vertically, or obliquely toward the corner, and the door opening operation display part 52A-3 is also arranged on the corresponding position of the front panel 22A of the door 22, and in the door opening operation direction is toward the door. In the case of the outside direction, the door opening operation is performed (ninth embodiment).
例如图10(a)给出了以下设定例子:在门22的开放端侧的下端部,在水平方向上设置开门操作部52、开门操作显示部52A-31,通过朝着门22的开放端侧向左方进行滑动操作而能够开门。在该变更例的情况下,可以将开门操作部52、开门操作显示部52A-31同样地设置于门22的开放端侧的上端部。图10(b)给出了以下设置例子:在门22的开放端侧的下端,在垂直方向上设置开门操作部52、开门操作显示部52A-32,通过朝着门22的下端,从上向下进行滑动操作而能够开门。图10(c)给出了以下设定例子:在门22的开放端侧的上端,在垂直方向上设置开门操作部52、开门操作显示部52A-33,通过朝着门22的上端,从下向上进行滑动操作而能够开门。图10(d)给出了以下设定例子:在门22的旋转铰链端侧的下端,在垂直方向上设置开门操作部52、开门操作显示部52A-34,通过朝着门22的下端,从上向下进行滑动操作而能够开门。在该变更例的情况下,可以设定成:将开门操作部52、开门操作显示部52A-34设置于门22的旋转铰链端侧的上端部,通过从下向上进行滑动操作而开门。此外,图10(e)给出了以下设定例子:在门22的四角中的1角、即开放端侧的下角部沿斜对角线方向设置开门操作部52、开门操作显示部52A-35,通过朝着门22的下角,从斜上向斜下进行滑动操作而能够开门。在该变更例的情况下,也可以设定成:将开门操作部52、开门操作显示部52A-35设置于门22的四角中的其他3个角的任意一个角,通过朝向各角,从斜下向上、或者从斜上向下进行滑动操作而能够开门。For example, Fig. 10 (a) provides the following setting example: at the lower end of the open end side of the door 22, the door opening operation part 52 and the door opening operation display part 52A-31 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the opening operation toward the door 22 The door can be opened by sliding the end side to the left. In the case of this modified example, the door opening operation part 52 and the door opening operation display part 52A-31 can be similarly provided in the upper end part of the open end side of the door 22. As shown in FIG. Fig. 10 (b) has provided the following setting example: at the lower end of the open end side of the door 22, the door opening operation part 52 and the door opening operation display part 52A-32 are arranged in the vertical direction, through the lower end towards the door 22, from above Swipe down to open the door. Fig. 10 (c) has provided following setting example: on the upper end of the open end side of door 22, door opening operation part 52, door opening operation display part 52A-33 are set in vertical direction, by towards the upper end of door 22, from The door can be opened by sliding up and down. Fig. 10 (d) has provided following setting example: at the lower end of the rotary hinge end side of door 22, door opening operation part 52, door opening operation display part 52A-34 are set in the vertical direction, by towards the lower end of door 22, The door can be opened by sliding from top to bottom. In this modified example, the door opening operation part 52 and the door opening operation display part 52A-34 may be provided on the upper end of the door 22 on the side of the rotary hinge, and the door may be opened by sliding from bottom to top. In addition, Fig. 10 (e) has given the following setting example: one corner in the four corners of the door 22, that is, the lower corner of the open end side is provided with the door opening operation part 52 and the door opening operation display part 52A- 35, the door can be opened by performing a sliding operation toward the lower corner of the door 22 from obliquely upward to obliquely downward. In the case of this modified example, it is also possible to set the door-opening operation part 52 and the door-opening operation display part 52A-35 at any one of the other three corners of the four corners of the door 22. The door can be opened by performing a sliding operation diagonally upward or diagonally downward.
此外,如图11所示,不管冰箱门是单扇门还是对开式的2扇门,关于设置于在其门22的前面板22A的背面侧设置的开门操作部52的静电电容触摸传感器52-1~52-5,可以构成为:在与滑动操作方向A2不同的方向A3上,相邻的传感器彼此一部分重叠。通过该传感器的重叠构成,滑动操作时不会出现触摸不足,即使相邻的传感器彼此同时被触摸,静电电容的变化也是面积大的传感器较大,具有不会同时检测出的效果(第10实施方式)。In addition, as shown in FIG. 11 , regardless of whether the refrigerator door is a single door or a side-opening two-leaf door, the capacitive touch sensor 52 provided on the door opening operation part 52 provided on the back side of the front panel 22A of the door 22 -1 to 52-5 may be configured such that adjacent sensors partially overlap each other in a direction A3 different from the slide operation direction A2. With this overlapping structure of sensors, there is no lack of touch during the sliding operation, and even if adjacent sensors are touched at the same time, the change in electrostatic capacitance is larger for a sensor with a larger area, and has the effect of not simultaneously detecting (the tenth embodiment) Way).
另外,如图12、图13所示,不管冰箱门是单扇门还是对开式的2扇门,组装于其门上(在此也为门22)的开门操作部52因滑动操作而检测出开门操作,可以是多个滑动检测用触摸传感器配置成圆环状或者以矩阵状上下、左右配置,并且针对它们的多个电极描画成一定图案这样的滑动操作而检测出开门操作(第11实施方式)。In addition, as shown in Fig. 12 and Fig. 13, regardless of whether the refrigerator door is a single door or a two-leaf door of the side-opening type, the door-opening operation part 52 assembled on the door (here also the door 22) detects due to the sliding operation. The door-opening operation can be that a plurality of sliding detection touch sensors are arranged in a circular shape or arranged up and down, left and right in a matrix, and a sliding operation such as a certain pattern is drawn on their plurality of electrodes to detect the door-opening operation (No. 11 implementation).
图12的例子中,将组装于门22上的开门操作部52的多个滑动检测用触摸传感器52-1~52-8配置成圆环状,针对这样的开门操作部52,3个以上的相邻触摸传感器以画圆的方式被连续触摸时进行开门动作。因此,不管是箭头A4~A6中某一个箭头的滑动操作还是与它们相反方向的滑动操作,都可以进行开门动作。而且,图13的例子中,将组装于门22上的开门操作部52的多个滑动检测用的电极5211~5244以矩阵状上下左右配置,针对这样的开门操作部52,如箭头A7~A13所示,3个以上的在上方、下方或者斜上方、斜下方相邻的电极被连续触摸时,进行开门动作。In the example of FIG. 12 , a plurality of sliding detection touch sensors 52 - 1 to 52 - 8 of the door opening operation unit 52 assembled on the door 22 are arranged in an annular shape. For such a door opening operation unit 52 , three or more When adjacent touch sensors are touched continuously in a circular manner, the door will be opened. Therefore, regardless of the sliding operation of any one of the arrows A4 to A6 or the sliding operation in the opposite direction to these arrows, the door opening operation can be performed. Moreover, in the example of FIG. 13 , a plurality of electrodes 5211-5244 for sliding detection of the door-opening operation part 52 assembled on the door 22 are arranged in a matrix up and down, left and right. For such a door-opening operation part 52, arrows A7-A13 As shown, when more than three adjacent electrodes above, below, or obliquely above, obliquely below are touched continuously, the door-opening action is performed.
另外,如图14所示,不管冰箱门是单扇门还是对开式的2扇门(在此示出了对开式。),其门21、22的开门操作部51、52都构成为:检测通过朝向规定的一个方向的滑动操作而进行的开门操作,对于左门21而言,从其旋转铰链侧朝向开放端侧,从左向右滑动时进行开门检测,对于右门22而言,从其旋转铰链侧朝向开放端侧,反过来从右向左滑动时进行开门检测。在此情况下,开门操作显示部51A、52A为了表示滑动操作方向,分别形成了朝向开放端的箭头标记(第12实施方式)。朝向该开放端的滑动操作所进行的开门操作,特别是,用户通常情况下是从冰箱外侧来到冰箱的中心部进行开门操作,其移动路线方向与滑动操作方向一致,具有容易进行开门操作的效果。In addition, as shown in Figure 14, regardless of whether the refrigerator door is a single door or a two-leaf door of the side-opening type (the side-opening type is shown here.), the door opening operation parts 51, 52 of the doors 21, 22 are all constituted as : Detects the door opening operation performed by sliding operation towards a specified direction. For the left door 21, the door opening detection is performed when sliding from the left to the right from its rotating hinge side to the open end side. For the right door 22 , door opening detection is performed when sliding from its rotating hinge side toward the open end side, and vice versa from right to left. In this case, the opening operation display parts 51A and 52A are respectively formed with arrow marks facing the opening end in order to indicate the sliding operation direction (twelfth embodiment). The door opening operation performed by the sliding operation toward the open end, in particular, the user usually comes from the outside of the refrigerator to the center of the refrigerator to perform the door opening operation, and the direction of the moving route is consistent with the direction of the sliding operation, which has the effect of facilitating the door opening operation .
此外,作为其它变更例,也可以是以下构成。将用于检测人站立于冰箱门前的人体探测机构(例如红外线传感器、识别人的摄像机等)设置于门上,在该人体探测机构检测到人后,控制部进行使开门操作有效的控制。由此,能够防止水、静电等导致冰箱门乱打开(第13实施方式)。In addition, as another modified example, the following configurations are also possible. A human body detection mechanism (such as an infrared sensor, a camera for identifying people, etc.) for detecting a person standing in front of the refrigerator door is installed on the door. After the human body detection mechanism detects a person, the control unit performs control to make the door opening operation effective. Thereby, the refrigerator door can be prevented from opening accidentally by water, static electricity, etc. (thirteenth embodiment).
此外,也可以在蔬菜室13、切换室14等的推拉式门23、24等上设置冷藏室门21、22的开门操作部51、52,而不是冷藏室12前面的旋转打开式门21、22(第14实施方式)。而且,在该情况下,电气配线沿着推拉式门的滑动轨道而与控制部56连接。In addition, the door opening operation parts 51, 52 of the refrigerator compartment doors 21, 22 may be provided on the sliding doors 23, 24 of the vegetable compartment 13, the switching compartment 14, etc., instead of the rotary open doors 21, 52 in front of the refrigerator compartment 12 22 (fourteenth embodiment). In addition, in this case, the harness is connected to the control unit 56 along the slide rail of the sliding door.
另外,实施方式的冰箱1也可以像以下依次说明的那样来构成。In addition, the refrigerator 1 of embodiment may be comprised as demonstrated sequentially below.
第15实施方式15th Embodiment
如图15所示,控制操作部(也称控制操作基板)50可以从插入口50V沿着G方向插入并收纳于收纳部50R内,其中插入口50V形成于门罩(door cap),该门罩是右门22的纵向侧面部,对门前面板进行支撑,构成门的左右上下侧面。开门操作部(也称为触摸打开用开关基板)52可以从右门22的纵向侧面部的插入口52V沿着G方向插入并收纳于收纳部52R内。而且,开门操作部(触摸打开用开关基板)51可以从左门21的纵向侧面部的插入口51V沿着H方向插入并收纳于收纳部51R内。As shown in FIG. 15, the control operation part (also referred to as the control operation board) 50 can be inserted and accommodated in the storage part 50R along the G direction from the insertion port 50V formed in the door cap (door cap), and the door The cover is a longitudinal side portion of the right door 22, supports the door front panel, and constitutes the left, right, upper, and lower sides of the door. The door opening operation part (also referred to as a touch open switch board) 52 can be inserted into the storage part 52R from the insertion opening 52V of the longitudinal side part of the right door 22 along the G direction and accommodated. Furthermore, the door opening operation part (touch open switch board|substrate) 51 can be inserted and accommodated in the storage part 51R from the insertion opening 51V of the longitudinal side part of the left door 21 along H direction.
如图15所示,把手(抓手)61、62分别配置于左门21的下表面部(下边)和右门22的下表面部(下边),把手61、62和开门操作部51、52分别配置于左门21的下侧角部的位置和右门22的下侧角部的位置,且配置于门的不同边。此外,开门操作部51、52和把手61、62也可以位于上下方向上不同的位置。As shown in Fig. 15, handles (handles) 61, 62 are arranged on the lower surface portion (bottom) of the left door 21 and the lower surface portion (bottom) of the right door 22, respectively, and the handles 61, 62 and the door opening operation parts 51, 52 They are arranged at the lower corner of the left door 21 and the lower corner of the right door 22, respectively, and are arranged on different sides of the door. In addition, the opening operation parts 51, 52 and the handles 61, 62 may be located at different positions in the vertical direction.
另外,上述右门22如后述的图19所示,例如右门22由作为玻璃板的前面板22A、内板22K以及门罩72构成,可以将插入口50V设置于门罩72。而且,可以以与插入口50V连续地从门罩72沿着前面板22A的方向延伸的方式设置收纳部50R,并将基板插入该收纳部50R。19 described later, the right door 22 is composed of, for example, a front panel 22A as a glass plate, an inner panel 22K, and a door cover 72 , and an insertion port 50V may be provided in the door cover 72 . Furthermore, the accommodating portion 50R may be provided so as to extend from the door cover 72 in the direction of the front panel 22A continuously from the insertion port 50V, and the substrate may be inserted into the accommodating portion 50R.
另外,收纳部50R的外侧前面板22A、内板22K与门罩72之间的空间优选利用聚氨酯等泡沫隔热材料、真空隔热材料填埋来进行隔热。In addition, the space between the outer front panel 22A, the inner panel 22K, and the door cover 72 of the storage portion 50R is preferably filled with a foam heat insulating material such as polyurethane or a vacuum heat insulating material for heat insulation.
而且,所插入的控制操作部50和开门操作部51也可以通过插入后从后方将其按压到前面板22A的弹性机构来紧密接合于前面板22A,但是,在横向宽度长的基板的情况下(开门操作部51等)也可以直接利用粘接材料粘接于前面板22A的背面。这样,能够提高操作灵敏度。Moreover, the inserted control operation part 50 and the door opening operation part 51 may also be tightly bonded to the front panel 22A by an elastic mechanism that presses them to the front panel 22A from behind after insertion, but in the case of a board with a long lateral width (The door opening operation part 51 etc.) may be adhere|attached directly to the back surface of 22 A of front panels with an adhesive material. In this way, operational sensitivity can be improved.
表示开门操作部51、52的位置的箭头标记亦即开门操作显示部51A、52A可以使用LED51M、52M。而且,作为箭头标记,可以是直接印刷于玻璃,也可以是印刷到薄膜后设置于玻璃的背面,通过光能够看到。LED51M, 52M can be used for opening operation display part 51A, 52A which is an arrow mark which shows the position of door opening operation part 51, 52. Furthermore, as the arrow mark, it may be directly printed on the glass, or it may be printed on a film and provided on the back surface of the glass so that it can be seen by light.
图15所示的用于打开左门21和右门22的开门操作部51、52使用静电开关。对于作为旋转门的左门21和右门22而言,由于可以使静电开关通过电气配线电连接于箱体11侧的控制部,因此,是温度差较小的冷藏室的旋转门,因而作为开门操作部51、52可以使用静电开关。静电开关耐湿性差,因而使用于温度差小的部分。The door opening operation parts 51 and 52 for opening the left door 21 and the right door 22 shown in FIG. 15 use electrostatic switches. For the left door 21 and the right door 22 as the revolving door, since the electrostatic switch can be electrically connected to the control unit on the side of the casing 11 through the electric wiring, it is a revolving door of a refrigerator room with a smaller temperature difference. Electrostatic switches can be used as the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 . Electrostatic switches have poor moisture resistance, so they are used in parts with small temperature differences.
与此相对,用于打开推拉门例如冷冻室15的推拉门25的开门操作部71、用于打开推拉门23的开门操作部77使用霍尔IC开关。推拉门是能够从箱体11(冰箱主体)拉出并取下的构造,因此,不能使用电气配线来连接开门操作部77和箱体11侧的控制部。因此,作为例如开门操作部71、77,在推拉门上配置磁铁,推入推拉门时,磁铁的位置发生变化,霍尔IC开关能够以非接触方式检测出该磁铁的位置变化。控制部根据来自该霍尔IC的表示磁铁位置发生了变化的信号,操作对推拉门进行推拉的推拉机构,由此能够打开推拉门。On the other hand, Hall IC switches are used for opening operation unit 71 for opening a sliding door such as sliding door 25 of freezer compartment 15 and opening operation unit 77 for opening sliding door 23 . The sliding door has a structure that can be pulled out from the cabinet 11 (refrigerator main body), and therefore cannot be connected to the control unit on the side of the cabinet 11 using the wiring harness. Therefore, for example, a magnet is arranged on the sliding door as the door opening operation parts 71 and 77, and when the sliding door is pushed in, the position of the magnet changes, and the Hall IC switch can detect the position change of the magnet in a non-contact manner. The control unit can open the sliding door by operating the sliding mechanism that pushes and pulls the sliding door based on the signal from the Hall IC indicating that the position of the magnet has changed.
图19表示图15所示的右门22的水平截面。例如右门22具有作为玻璃板的前面板22A、内板22K、加强板70、门罩72、以及开门操作部52的基板74。在该右门22的内部,配置有隔热用聚氨酯部件或者20mm厚的真空隔热材料73。基板74与玻璃板22A的间隙为零。门罩72覆盖作为玻璃板的前面板22A的端部。作为玻璃板的前面板22A是强化玻璃,如果玻璃板的端部处于露出状态,则为了保护玻璃板露出的端部,在玻璃板露出的端部设置C面倒角。FIG. 19 shows a horizontal section of the right door 22 shown in FIG. 15 . For example, the right door 22 has a front panel 22A as a glass plate, an inner panel 22K, a reinforcement panel 70 , a door cover 72 , and a base plate 74 of the door opening operation part 52 . Inside the right door 22, a polyurethane member for heat insulation or a vacuum heat insulating material 73 with a thickness of 20 mm is arranged. The gap between the substrate 74 and the glass plate 22A is zero. The door cover 72 covers the end portion of the front panel 22A which is a glass plate. The front panel 22A, which is a glass plate, is tempered glass, and if the end of the glass plate is exposed, a C-face chamfer is provided on the exposed end of the glass plate in order to protect the exposed end of the glass plate.
通过这样设置,即使由于操作开门操作部52来使门自动开放,而使得前面板22A的端部有可能接触配置于冰箱旁边的其他厨房家具、墙壁,但是也能够防止端面碎裂。此外,也可以在前面板22A的端部设置防止机构,该防止机构用于防止接触,通过覆盖端部来保护端部。而且,开门操作部52的基板74配置成相对于前面板22A的内表面没有间隙。另外,虽然是左右对称形状,但是左门21也是同样的构造。而且,也可以使左右的开门操作部52的基板的大小不同。例如,可以使较大的门侧的基板大于较小的门的基板。With this arrangement, even if the end of the front panel 22A may contact other kitchen furniture or walls arranged next to the refrigerator due to the automatic opening of the door by operating the door opening operation portion 52, the end face can be prevented from being broken. In addition, a prevention mechanism may be provided at the end of the front panel 22A for preventing contact and protecting the end by covering the end. Moreover, the board|substrate 74 of the opening operation part 52 is arrange|positioned so that there may be no gap with respect to the inner surface of 22 A of front panels. In addition, although it is a symmetrical shape, the left door 21 also has the same structure. Moreover, the size of the board|substrate of the door opening operation part 52 on either side may differ. For example, the base plate on the side of the larger door can be made larger than the base plate of the smaller door.
第16实施方式Sixteenth embodiment
如图18所示,在比左门21内侧的盛肉托盘顶板的下端线的位置LL靠下的位置配置开门操作部51。即、图24示出了冰箱主体的纵向截面。如图24所示,在箱体11内,来自冷却器的冷气所通过的冷气管道位于背面,从管道朝向门侧设置有喷出口,如图24所示,冷气沿箭头方向流动。As shown in FIG. 18 , the door opening operation part 51 is disposed below the position LL of the lower end line of the meat tray top plate inside the left door 21 . That is, Fig. 24 shows a longitudinal section of the main body of the refrigerator. As shown in FIG. 24, in the box body 11, the cold air duct through which the cold air from the cooler passes is located at the back side, and an outlet is provided from the duct toward the door side. As shown in FIG. 24, the cold air flows in the direction of the arrow.
箱体11内配置有盛肉托盘99T,在盛肉托盘99T的后侧设置有喷出口。在左门21上,在比盛肉托盘顶板的下端线的位置LL靠下的位置配置开门操作部51。由此,通过盛肉托盘99T的冷气因为构成盛肉托盘的前表面的前壁等防风机构而不会到达左门21内的开门操作部51。因此,冷气不会到达左门21内的开门操作部51(52),因而不会产生开门操作部51(52)被冷却而导致的结露现象。A meat tray 99T is disposed in the housing 11, and a discharge port is provided on the rear side of the meat tray 99T. On the left door 21, the door opening operation part 51 is arrange|positioned below the position LL of the lower end line of the meat tray top plate. As a result, cold air passing through the meat tray 99T does not reach the door opening operation portion 51 in the left door 21 due to the windproof mechanism such as the front wall constituting the front surface of the meat tray. Therefore, cold air does not reach the door-opening operation part 51 (52) in the left door 21, and thus no dew condensation phenomenon caused by the door-opening operation part 51 (52) being cooled will not occur.
如图24所示,搁架框的上端比盛肉托盘99T的上端靠上,使得冷气不会到达门背面。由此,能够防止冷气直接吹到开门操作部51(52)部分,在该部分为了收纳开门操作部51(52),隔热材料较薄,因而容易结露。因此,不会发生:因结露而进行动作,导致向控制部发送信号,从而能够防止开门操作部51不慎动作,使得左门21乱打开。这些对于图18所示的右门22的开门操作部52而言,也是一样的。As shown in FIG. 24, the upper end of the shelf frame is higher than the upper end of the meat tray 99T so that cold air does not reach the back of the door. Thereby, cold air can be prevented from being directly blown to the door-opening operation part 51 (52) part, in which the heat insulating material is thin in order to accommodate the door-opening operation part 51 (52), and dew condensation is easy to occur. Therefore, there will be no occurrence of sending a signal to the control unit due to dew condensation and operation, thereby preventing the door opening operation unit 51 from operating inadvertently and causing the left door 21 to be opened indiscriminately. These are also the same for the door opening operation part 52 of the right door 22 shown in FIG. 18 .
另外,盛肉托盘99T也能够作为冷鲜室来使用,具有门和推拉容器,能够向前方进行拉出操作。该冷鲜室也可以由以下的密闭空间来构成,该密闭空间能够由收纳推拉容器的进行了加强的收纳盒和门加以密闭,也可以构成为:由作为减压机构的真空泵来对该密闭收纳空间内部的空间进行减压。这样,能够防止从设置于作为盛肉托盘99T的收纳盒的背面的冷气喷出口喷出的冷气直接到达门,并且能够由密闭空间被减压后的隔热层对喷出口的冷温度带进行隔热,能够防止传热。在该情况下,可以设置成由收纳盒覆盖喷出口。此外,也可以由作为风量调整机构的风门来对从设置于该密闭收纳部的背面的喷出口喷出的冷气进行控制,还可以通过以下方式进行控制:由为了防止结露而测定冰箱内的温度的温度传感器来检测出温度的降低,使风门关闭从而使得冷气难以到达门。In addition, 99 T of meat trays can also be used as a refrigerated compartment, it has a door and a sliding container, and it can pull out ahead. The refrigerated room can also be composed of the following airtight space, which can be sealed by a reinforced storage box and door that accommodates the push-pull container, or it can be configured such that the airtight space is sealed by a vacuum pump as a decompression mechanism. The space inside the storage space is decompressed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the cold air ejected from the cold air outlet provided on the back side of the storage box as the meat tray 99T from reaching the door directly, and the cold temperature zone of the outlet can be controlled by the heat insulation layer after the airtight space is decompressed. Insulated to prevent heat transfer. In this case, the discharge port may be covered with a storage case. In addition, the cold air ejected from the outlet provided on the back side of the airtight storage part may also be controlled by a damper as an air volume adjustment mechanism. The temperature sensor detects the drop in temperature and closes the damper so that it is difficult for cold air to reach the door.
此外,可以是,在具有开门操作部52的基板的后方且配置于门的内部的真空隔热材料设置在基板与配置于盛肉托盘99T之后的喷出口之间来进行隔热,使得不使基板结露。此外,该基板是收纳于在门内部形成的具有空气层的树脂制收纳部,在该情况下,特别容易结露,但是,由于设置真空隔热材料来对冰箱内的冷能进行隔离,因此能够防止结露从而防止门突然被开放的误检测。而且,也可以通过在该收纳部的周围配置传热优异的金属部件,使外气的热传到收纳部并温暖收纳部,由此防止结露。In addition, a vacuum heat insulating material disposed behind the base plate having the door opening operation portion 52 and disposed inside the door may be provided between the base plate and the discharge port disposed behind the meat tray 99T to insulate heat so that the Condensation on the substrate. In addition, this substrate is accommodated in the resin storage part with the air layer formed inside the door. In this case, condensation is particularly likely to occur. However, since the cold energy in the refrigerator is isolated by installing a vacuum heat insulating material, Condensation can be prevented to prevent false detection that the door is suddenly opened. Furthermore, by arranging a metal member excellent in heat transfer around the storage part, the heat of the outside air is transferred to the storage part to warm the storage part, thereby preventing dew condensation.
另外,也可以具有纵向隔断,该纵向隔断配置于右门与左门之间,与一扇门的开闭动作连动进行开闭,在该纵向隔断的内部收纳热源。而且,通过将该基板、收纳部配置于冰箱的热源附近,能够将热传导到基板、收纳部,能够进一步防止结露。该热源可以与纵向隔断一起沿上下方向延伸,通过提高基板或者收纳部的位置的加热器密度等来增加传热量。对于该加热器密度而言,可以将加热器线配置两重,或者弯折配置,也可以为了使热在纵向隔断内传递到基板侧而将热传导性良好的金属(例如铝)配置成从加热器延伸到基板侧。In addition, there may be a vertical partition arranged between the right door and the left door, which is opened and closed in conjunction with the opening and closing operation of one door, and the heat source is accommodated inside the vertical partition. Furthermore, by arranging the substrate and the storage part near the heat source of the refrigerator, heat can be conducted to the substrate and the storage part, and dew condensation can be further prevented. The heat source can be extended in the vertical direction together with the longitudinal partition, and the heat transfer amount can be increased by increasing the heater density at the position of the substrate or the storage part. For this heater density, the heater wires can be arranged in double or bent, and a metal with good thermal conductivity (for example, aluminum) can be arranged from the heater to transfer heat to the substrate side in the longitudinal partition. tors extend to the substrate side.
另外,如图18所示,在箱体11内的与喷出口79R的位置不同的位置安装开门操作部51(52),由此,能够使来自喷出口79R的冷气不会到达左门21内的开门操作部51(52)。因此,由于冷气不会到达左门21内的开门操作部51(52),因而不会产生开门操作部51(52)被冷却而导致的结露现象,不会发生:因该结露而进行动作,导致向控制部发送信号,从而能够防止开门操作部51(52)不慎动作,使得左门21(右门22)乱打开。In addition, as shown in FIG. 18 , the door opening operation part 51 ( 52 ) is installed at a position different from that of the discharge port 79R in the housing 11 , thereby preventing the cold air from the discharge port 79R from reaching the inside of the left door 21 . The door opening operation part 51 (52). Therefore, since the cold air does not reach the door-opening operation part 51 (52) in the left door 21, the dew condensation phenomenon caused by the cooling of the door-opening operation part 51 (52) will not occur. The operation causes a signal to be sent to the control unit, thereby preventing the door opening operation unit 51 (52) from inadvertently operating and causing the left door 21 (right door 22) to be opened indiscriminately.
第17实施方式Seventeenth Embodiment
如图16所示,控制操作部50和开门操作部51也可以在左门21上配置于1块基板99。开门操作部51(52)的检测部和检测信号处理部可以由1块基板99构成。检测部和检测信号处理部一起收纳于收纳部50R。微机MC可以配置于同一基板。As shown in FIG. 16 , the control operation unit 50 and the door opening operation unit 51 may be arranged on a single board 99 on the left door 21 . The detection part and the detection signal processing part of the door opening operation part 51 (52) can be comprised with the one board|substrate 99. The detection unit is housed in the housing unit 50R together with the detection signal processing unit. The microcomputer MC can be arranged on the same substrate.
控制操作部50和开门操作部52可以在右门22上配置于不同的基板。可以是控制操作部50和微机MC配置于1块基板99A,开门操作部52配置于另一基板99B。由此,通过将有可能引起噪声的MC配置于另一基板,能够防止开门操作部52误检测而导致门乱打开的误动作。而且,在收纳部50R具有分别收纳基板99A和基板99B的被划分开的不同收纳部的情况下,只要将基板99B的电气信号线连接于其他部位的收纳部(例如收纳了基板99A的收纳部)的控制机构(MC)即可。特别是在连接器从其他部位的收纳部预先延伸到基板99B的收纳部,并将基板99B收纳于收纳部时,如果将基板99B的连接线与连接器连起来,则容易进行门的组装制造。The control operation unit 50 and the door opening operation unit 52 may be arranged on different boards on the right door 22 . The control operation part 50 and the microcomputer MC may be arranged on one substrate 99A, and the door opening operation part 52 may be arranged on the other substrate 99B. Accordingly, by arranging the MC that may cause noise on another substrate, it is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the door is accidentally opened due to false detection by the door opening operation unit 52 . Moreover, in the case where the storage portion 50R has divided different storage portions for respectively storing the substrate 99A and the substrate 99B, it is only necessary to connect the electrical signal lines of the substrate 99B to other storage portions (for example, the storage portion that accommodates the substrate 99A). ) of the control mechanism (MC). Especially when the connector is extended from the storage part of other parts to the storage part of the substrate 99B in advance, and the substrate 99B is stored in the storage part, if the connecting wire of the substrate 99B is connected with the connector, it is easy to assemble and manufacture the door. .
另外,微机MC可以配置于该基板99B上,也可以配置于在其他位置配置的另一基板99C。而且,基板99可以是纵长形状,也可以是横长形状。In addition, the microcomputer MC may be arranged on this substrate 99B, or may be arranged on another substrate 99C arranged at another position. Furthermore, the substrate 99 may be vertically long or horizontally long.
如图18所示,控制操作部50和开门操作部51、52由导线直接连接起来。即、控制操作部50和开门操作部51、52使用不同的的电气配线LA、LB,分别通过控制部56的电源基板连接起来。这样做是为了可靠防止控制操作部50产生的噪声导致开门操作部51、52不慎进行开门动作。As shown in FIG. 18, the control operation part 50 and the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are directly connected by wires. That is, the control operation unit 50 and the door opening operation units 51 and 52 are connected via the power supply board of the control unit 56 using different wiring harnesses LA and LB. This is done in order to reliably prevent the noise generated by the control operation part 50 from causing the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 to open the door inadvertently.
如图15所示,推拉门23、24、25、26的把手(抓手)可以配置于各推拉门的23、24、25、26的左或右侧面部。把手(抓手)不配置于推拉门的前表面部,例如推拉门23的开门操作部77和推拉门25的开门操作部71分别配置于前表面部。由此,在推拉门的前表面部没有把手(抓手),因此外观美观。As shown in FIG. 15, handles (handles) of the sliding doors 23, 24, 25, and 26 may be arranged on the left or right side surfaces of the sliding doors 23, 24, 25, and 26. The handle (grip) is not arranged on the front surface of the sliding door, for example, the opening operation part 77 of the sliding door 23 and the opening operation part 71 of the sliding door 25 are respectively arranged on the front surface. Thereby, since there is no handle (handle) in the front surface part of a sliding door, an external appearance is beautiful.
第18实施方式Eighteenth embodiment
如图17所示,在右门22上,控制操作部50和开门操作部52的配置位置在左右横向上不同。即、控制操作部50位于右门22的靠近右侧面部的位置,开门操作部52位于右门22的靠近左侧面部的位置。由此,控制操作部50未配置于开门操作部52的上侧,因此,即使例如使用者以湿手接触而水从控制操作部50滴落,该水也不会滴落到下部的开门操作部52。而且,控制操作部50的收纳部和开门操作部52的收纳部之间的距离Wb比控制操作部50与开门操作部52之间的距离Wa小,距离Wb是最低限度的分离距离。As shown in FIG. 17 , on the right door 22 , the arrangement positions of the control operation unit 50 and the door opening operation unit 52 are different in the left and right lateral directions. That is, the control operation part 50 is located on the right side of the right door 22 and the opening operation part 52 is located on the left side of the right door 22 . Thus, the control operation part 50 is not arranged on the upper side of the door opening operation part 52. Therefore, even if the user touches it with wet hands and water drips from the control operation part 50, the water will not drip to the lower door opening operation. Section 52. And the distance Wb between the storage part of the control operation part 50 and the storage part of the door opening operation part 52 is smaller than the distance Wa between the control operation part 50 and the door opening operation part 52, and distance Wb is the minimum separation distance.
另外,控制操作部50也可以配置成:收纳开门操作部52的基板的收纳部与之在上下方向上错开,并在左右方向重叠。控制操作部50还可以配置成:开门操作部52的基板也与之在左右方向上重叠。只要各个基板上的静电电容式开关SA和开门操作显示部52A不重叠,则水就不会从配置于上方的静电电容式开关SA滴落到配置于下方的开门操作部52A。并且,通过使收纳部、基板重叠,使得在门这样的小面积中且在左右方向上重叠配置,从而布局自由度得以增加。另外,关于使各个基板在左右方向上重叠配置,也可以应用在同一收纳部内配置基板的情况。In addition, the control operation part 50 may be arrange|positioned so that the storage part which accommodates the board|substrate of the door-opening operation part 52 may deviate from it in the up-down direction, and may overlap in the left-right direction. The control operation part 50 may also be arrange|positioned so that the board|substrate of the opening operation part 52 may overlap with it in the left-right direction. As long as the capacitive switch SA on each board does not overlap with the door opening operation display part 52A, water does not drip from the capacitive switch SA arranged above to the door opening operation part 52A arranged below. Furthermore, by stacking the accommodating portion and the substrate so that they are stacked in the left-right direction in a small area such as a door, the degree of freedom in layout is increased. In addition, it is also possible to apply the case of arranging the substrates in the same storage portion with respect to arranging the respective substrates so as to overlap in the left-right direction.
也可以使使用者进行操作时的开门操作部51、52的电极与控制操作部50的电极的检测灵敏度不同。例如通过使开门操作部51、52的电极的检测灵敏度高于控制操作部50的电极,能够提高开门操作部51、52的操作灵敏度。可以使开门操作部51、52的电极与控制操作部50的电极的电容不同,也可以通过变更电极的面积来使他们不同。开门操作部51、52的电极也可以不配置多个而是由一个电极构成。The detection sensitivities of the electrodes of the opening operation parts 51 and 52 and the electrodes of the control operation part 50 may be made different when the user operates. For example, by making the detection sensitivity of the electrodes of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 higher than that of the electrodes of the control operation part 50, the operation sensitivity of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 can be improved. The electrodes of the opening operation parts 51 and 52 and the electrodes of the control operation part 50 may be different in capacitance, or may be made different by changing the area of the electrodes. The electrodes of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may be composed of one electrode instead of arranging a plurality of electrodes.
对控制操作部50的操作与对开门操作部51、52的操作采用了不同的操作方法。作为不同的操作方法,对控制操作部50进行例如0.5秒的长按操作,对开门操作部51、52进行例如1秒的长按操作来进行操作的检测。Different operation methods are used for the operation of the control operation part 50 and the operation of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 . As a different operation method, a long-press operation is performed on the control operation part 50 for, for example, 0.5 second, and a long-press operation is performed on the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 for, for example, one second to detect the operation.
第19实施方式Nineteenth Embodiment
如图21所示,控制操作部50的LED全部灭灯,当按压控制操作部50的某处的开关时,控制操作部50的多个LED或者全部LED亮灯。而且,可以采用以下构成:在亮灯过程中,被控制为在其间开门操作部51、52的开关即使检测到操作也视为无效,不接受使用者的操作而使得门开放操作为无效(也可以是有效,且能够操作)。在亮灯过程中,其间,开门操作部51、52的LED是OFF(断开),不亮灯。相反,在控制操作部50的LED全部灭灯过程中,开门操作部51、52的开关有效,能够操作(也可以是无效,不能操作)。在控制操作部50的LED全部灭灯过程中,在开门操作部51、52的LED是ON(接通),亮灯。As shown in FIG. 21 , all LEDs of the control operation unit 50 are turned off, and when a switch on the control operation unit 50 is pressed, a plurality of LEDs or all LEDs of the control operation unit 50 are turned on. And, can adopt the following structure: in the lighting process, even if the switch that is controlled to open the door operation part 51,52 therebetween detects the operation is also regarded as invalid, does not accept the user's operation and makes the door opening operation invalid (also may be valid and operational). During lighting, the LEDs of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are OFF (disconnected) and are not lit. On the contrary, in the process of turning off all the LEDs of the control operation part 50, the switches of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are valid and can be operated (may also be invalid and cannot be operated). While all the LEDs of the control operation portion 50 are turned off, the LEDs of the door opening operation portions 51 and 52 are ON (turned on) and turned on.
如上所述,通过构成为:控制开关有效,在使开门操作部51、52无效,具有以下效果:防止在以手指按压控制操作部50时,在肘部不慎撞到开门操作部51、52而导致门不慎开放。As mentioned above, by making the control switch effective, the door-opening operation parts 51 and 52 are invalidated, thereby having the following effect: when pressing the control operation part 50 with fingers, accidentally hitting the door-opening operation parts 51 and 52 with the elbow This caused the door to open inadvertently.
此外,控制开关的LED亮灯、在使开门操作部51、52的LED灭灯的构成有时会有以下情况发生:同时亮灯时,例如被孩子想同时按压控制操作部50和开门操作部51、52的冲动所驱使,门被开放,但是,通过本发明的构成能够加以解决。In addition, in the structure of turning on the LED of the control switch and turning off the LEDs of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52, the following situation may sometimes occur: when the lights are turned on at the same time, for example, a child wants to press the control operation part 50 and the door opening operation part 51 at the same time. , 52 impulsively driven, the door is opened, but, can be solved by the formation of the present invention.
此外,即使在使控制操作部50和开门操作部51、52都有效而检测出同时被按压的情况下,通过显示或语音等来告知将使开门操作部51、52无效,能够唤起注意。In addition, even if both the control operation part 50 and the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are enabled and simultaneous pressing is detected, the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 will be disabled by a display or voice, and attention can be called.
如图17所示,可以使控制操作部50的形状不同的开关SA和开关SB在规定时间,操作灵敏度相同且以相同动作方法接通(ON)。同一操作方式的开关SA和开关SB位于基板的一面。而且,开门操作部51、52亦可以采用与开关SA相同的操作方式,该构成可以用于各实施方式。As shown in FIG. 17 , the switches SA and SB having different shapes of the control operation unit 50 can be turned on (ON) with the same operation sensitivity and the same operation method at a predetermined time. The switch SA and the switch SB of the same operation mode are located on one side of the substrate. In addition, the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 can also be operated in the same manner as the switch SA, and this configuration can be used in each embodiment.
如图18所示,控制操作部50的电气配线LA的线束和开门操作部51、52的电气配线LB的线束以及加热器线未捆在一起。即、可以在门内使它们具有间隔地配置,在通到箱体的门铰链部位接近。并且,AC线和DC线可以分开捆扎。由此可以防止噪声。As shown in FIG. 18, the wire harness of the harness LA of the control operation part 50, the wire harness of the harness LB of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52, and a heater wire are not bundled together. That is, they can be arranged at intervals in the door and approached at the door hinge portion leading to the box. Also, AC wires and DC wires can be bundled separately. Noise can thereby be prevented.
如图15所示,例如、右门22的图19所示的作为玻璃板的前面板22A是强化玻璃,但是,也可以增加加强板70,并且配置防飞散薄膜。为了保护前面板22A的端部,以覆盖前面板22A的端部的方式配置有门罩72。As shown in FIG. 15 , for example, the front panel 22A as a glass plate of the right door 22 shown in FIG. 19 is tempered glass, but a reinforcing plate 70 may be added and an anti-scattering film may be arranged. In order to protect the end of the front panel 22A, a door cover 72 is arranged to cover the end of the front panel 22A.
但是,可以是与图19不同,在门罩不覆盖前面板22A的端部,玻璃板22A的端部处于露出状态的情况下,在玻璃板22A的端部形成作为倒角面的C面倒角或者R面。作为玻璃板的前面板22A是强化玻璃,但是,如果玻璃板22A的端部处于露出状态,则为了保护玻璃板22A的端部,在玻璃板22A上设置C面倒角,由此,即使在设置开门操作部而导致门不慎开放的情况下,也能够防止端部碰到某处而造成缺损。此外,虽然是左右对称形状,但是左门21也是同样构造。However, unlike FIG. 19 , when the door cover does not cover the end of the front panel 22A and the end of the glass plate 22A is exposed, a C-face chamfer may be formed as a chamfered surface at the end of the glass plate 22A. Or the R side. The front panel 22A which is a glass plate is tempered glass, but if the end of the glass plate 22A is exposed, in order to protect the end of the glass plate 22A, a C-face chamfer is provided on the glass plate 22A, thereby, even when the glass plate is installed Even when the door is accidentally opened by opening the door operation part, it is also possible to prevent the end from hitting somewhere and causing damage. In addition, although it is a left-right symmetrical shape, the left door 21 also has the same structure.
图17所示的开门操作部51、52需要没有故障。因此,如图19所示,配置有真空隔热材料73,该真空隔热材料73的隔热厚度为20mm以上,由于配置于纵向隔断,因此,真空隔热材料73不会结露。加热器(未图示)配置于开门操作部51、52附近,开门操作部51、52的背面配置有真空隔热材料73。由此,开门操作部51、52可避免因低温部的影响而结露。The door opening operation parts 51 and 52 shown in FIG. 17 need not be malfunctioned. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19 , a vacuum heat insulating material 73 is arranged. The heat insulating thickness of the vacuum heat insulating material 73 is 20 mm or more, and since it is arranged in a vertical partition, the vacuum heat insulating material 73 does not condense. The heater (not shown) is arrange|positioned near the door opening operation part 51,52, and the vacuum heat insulating material 73 is arrange|positioned at the back of the door opening operation part 51,52. Thereby, the door-opening operation parts 51 and 52 can avoid dew condensation due to the influence of the low-temperature part.
图17所示的控制操作部50的开关SA、SB具有调整操作灵敏度的功能,具有变更灵敏度、规定时间的设定机构。由此,通过使用设定机构,能够设定成操作开关SA、SB或者开门操作显示部51A、52A时的操作灵敏度不同。The switches SA and SB of the control operation unit 50 shown in FIG. 17 have a function of adjusting the operation sensitivity, and have a setting mechanism for changing the sensitivity and a predetermined time. Thereby, by using a setting mechanism, it can set so that the operation sensitivity at the time of operating switch SA, SB or door-opening operation display part 51A, 52A differs.
第20实施方式twentieth embodiment
图20是表示图15所示的例如推拉门23、25的俯视图。图15所示的例如推拉门23、25分别具有开门操作部77、71。当开门操作部77、71的基板82构成为能够从推拉门23、25的上表面部向下插入到收纳部81并收纳时,由于推拉门23、25的前表面部上不会产生间隙,因此外观漂亮,推拉门23、25的前表面部的玻璃面的外观良好。FIG. 20 is a plan view showing, for example, sliding doors 23 and 25 shown in FIG. 15 . For example, sliding doors 23 and 25 shown in FIG. 15 have door opening operation parts 77 and 71, respectively. When the base plate 82 of the door opening operation part 77,71 is configured to be able to be inserted downward into the storage portion 81 from the upper surface portion of the sliding door 23,25 and accommodated, no gap will be generated on the front surface portion of the sliding door 23,25, Therefore, the external appearance is beautiful, and the external appearance of the glass surface of the front surface part of the sliding doors 23 and 25 is good.
图20所示的开门操作部77、71具有:基板82、电池83、用于将基板82按压于前表面部的内表面的弹性机构84,电池83对开门操作部77、71提供电源。这样,与沿着金属轨道将下述的电气配线引导到门的情况相比,能够防止噪声进入开门操作部77、71,防止门被乱开放。The door opening operation parts 77 and 71 shown in FIG. In this way, noise can be prevented from entering the door-opening operation parts 77 and 71 and the door can be prevented from being opened indiscriminately, compared with a case where electrical wiring described later is guided to the door along the metal rail.
在取代图20所示的电池83,而从其他部分利用电气配线获取电源的电源式的情况下,可以采用以下构成:将电气配线配置成沿着金属轨道引导到门,并以根据门的开闭动作能够使配线拉出最长时的距离所对应的配线长度发生变动的方式变形。In the case of a power supply type in which power is obtained from other parts using wiring harnesses instead of the battery 83 shown in FIG. The opening and closing action can change the wiring length corresponding to the longest distance when the wiring is pulled out.
在此情况下,噪声有可能沿着引导推拉门的金属轨道而搭载于电气配线,因此,可以设置作为噪声除去机构的噪声过滤器,该噪声过滤器用于除去进入开门操作部77、71或者从开门操作部77、71进入指示开放操作的微机的噪声。此外,也可以在沿着金属轨道配置的电气配线的周围设置绝缘机构(噪声除去机构),通过不与金属直接接触而进行噪声的除去(第21实施方式)。In this case, noise may be mounted on the electrical wiring along the metal rails that guide the sliding door. Therefore, a noise filter as a noise removal mechanism may be provided to remove noise that enters the door opening operation parts 77, 71 or The noise of the microcomputer instructing the opening operation enters from the door opening operation parts 77 and 71 . In addition, an insulation mechanism (noise elimination mechanism) may be provided around the electric wiring arranged along the metal rail, and the noise may be eliminated by not directly contacting the metal (21st embodiment).
如图16所示,具有玻璃板的推拉门23、24、25、26中的例如推拉门25,在位于推拉门25的玻璃制的前表面部以外的部位的不同原材料的门罩(例如树脂制)上设置按压按键95。通过按压该树脂制的按压按键95,能够打开推拉门25。As shown in FIG. 16 , among the sliding doors 23, 24, 25, and 26 having glass plates, for example, the sliding door 25, a door cover of a different material (such as resin) at a position other than the glass front surface portion of the sliding door 25 System) set the push button 95. By pressing the push button 95 made of resin, the sliding door 25 can be opened.
第22实施方式22nd Embodiment
图22是表示推拉门23(24、25、26)和冰箱的箱体11的水平截面图,在推拉门23(24、25、26)与冰箱的箱体11之间,配置有按压部件120。按压部件120在推拉门23(24、25、26)与冰箱的箱体11之间设定有间隙DH。使用者通过抵抗按压部件120的力,将推拉门23(24、25、26)向以箭头表示的按压方向按压,使得非接触的距离传感器130的发送部131靠近接收部132。由此,距离传感器130检测距离,该检测出的距离小于预定的距离时,开门操作部77(71)对控制部发送指令,能够利用推出机构来打开推拉门。Figure 22 is a horizontal cross-sectional view showing the sliding door 23 (24, 25, 26) and the cabinet 11 of the refrigerator, between the sliding door 23 (24, 25, 26) and the cabinet 11 of the refrigerator, a pressing member 120 is arranged. . The pressing member 120 sets a gap DH between the sliding doors 23 ( 24 , 25 , 26 ) and the cabinet 11 of the refrigerator. The user pushes the sliding door 23 ( 24 , 25 , 26 ) in the pressing direction indicated by the arrow against the force of the pressing member 120 , so that the transmitting part 131 of the non-contact distance sensor 130 approaches the receiving part 132 . Thus, the distance sensor 130 detects the distance, and when the detected distance is less than a predetermined distance, the door opening operation part 77 (71) sends a command to the control part, and the sliding door can be opened by the pushing mechanism.
也可以如图17所示,在例如左门21设置用于打开推拉门23、24、25、26的开门操作部101、102、103、104。开门操作部101、102、103、104根据推拉门23、24、25、26的配置形状进行设计。由此,使用者容易从视觉上进行把握,不必改变姿势就能够容易地打开需要打开的推拉门。As shown in FIG. 17 , for example, door opening operation parts 101 , 102 , 103 , and 104 for opening the sliding doors 23 , 24 , 25 , and 26 may be provided on the left door 21 . The door opening operation parts 101, 102, 103, 104 are designed according to the arrangement shape of the sliding doors 23, 24, 25, 26. Thereby, a user can grasp visually easily, and can open the sliding door which needs to be opened easily, without changing a posture.
在左门21、右门22、推拉门23、24、25、26的前表面部,可以不设置任何把手(抓手),而形成为完全扁平(all flat)。The front surfaces of the left door 21 , the right door 22 , and the sliding doors 23 , 24 , 25 , and 26 may not be provided with any handles (handles), but may be formed completely flat (all flat).
第23实施方式23rd Embodiment
如图15所示,关于推拉门23、24、25、26之间的间隙X、Y,间隙X>间隙Y。即、具有开门操作部77的推拉门23和具有开门操作部71的推拉门25的间隙Y设定得比没有开门操作部的推拉门24、26的间隙X小。即、具有把手140而没有开门操作部的推拉门24、26的间隙X为了能够放入手,比具有开门操作部77的推拉门23和具有开门操作部71的推拉门25的间隙Y形成得大。而且,具有开门操作部77的推拉门23和具有开门操作部71的推拉门25只要将把手设置于推拉门的左右侧面部即可。此时,该把手可以通过在支撑玻璃板的罩上设置出凹部来形成。As shown in FIG. 15 , with respect to gaps X and Y between sliding doors 23 , 24 , 25 , and 26 , gap X>gap Y. That is, the gap Y between the sliding door 23 having the opening operation part 77 and the sliding door 25 having the opening operation part 71 is set smaller than the gap X between the sliding doors 24 and 26 without the opening operation part. That is, the gap X between the sliding doors 24 and 26 with the handle 140 and no opening operation part is formed to be larger than the gap Y between the sliding door 23 with the door opening operation part 77 and the sliding door 25 with the door opening operation part 71 in order to be able to put in your hand. big. Furthermore, the sliding door 23 having the opening operation part 77 and the sliding door 25 having the opening operation part 71 may be provided with handles on the left and right side surfaces of the sliding door. In this case, the handle can be formed by providing a recess on the cover supporting the glass plate.
为了开闭具有玻璃板的推拉门,作为图22所示的检测门的变位量的机构而使用非接触的距离传感器130,因此,只要将具有玻璃板的推拉门稍稍向箭头方向按压,即可打开推拉门。In order to open and close a sliding door with a glass plate, a non-contact distance sensor 130 is used as a mechanism for detecting the amount of displacement of the door shown in FIG. Sliding doors can be opened.
如图16所示,控制操作部50也可以配置于左门21和右门22的一方或者双方。As shown in FIG. 16 , the control operation unit 50 may be disposed on one or both of the left door 21 and the right door 22 .
第24实施方式24th embodiment
如图23所示,在左门21和右门22的玻璃板(前面板21A、22A)的上部配置有门的框架亦即作为装饰部的罩150。该罩150具有突出于外部(上方)而设置的突起151,该突起151与推出机构160的推压部件162抵接。突起151设置于离开作为玻璃板的前面板21A、22A的位置,在推出机构160的推压部件162推压突起151而要打开左门21或者右门22时,前面板21A、22A不受力的影响。在罩150的内部形成有加强筋161、163、164、165,玻璃板(前面板21A、22A)嵌入于加强筋161、163,加强筋163、164上固定有截面コ字型的加强板169。加强筋165上配置有内板170。在作为玻璃板的前面板21A(22A)与内板170之间,为了进行加强而埋入了聚氨酯。As shown in FIG. 23 , a cover 150 serving as a door frame, which is a decorative portion, is arranged on the upper portion of the glass plates (front panels 21A, 22A) of the left door 21 and the right door 22 . The cover 150 has a protrusion 151 protruding from the outside (upper side), and the protrusion 151 comes into contact with the pressing member 162 of the pushing mechanism 160 . The protrusion 151 is provided at a position apart from the front panels 21A, 22A which are glass plates, and when the pushing member 162 of the pushing mechanism 160 pushes the protrusion 151 to open the left door 21 or the right door 22, the front panels 21A, 22A are not stressed. Impact. Ribs 161, 163, 164, 165 are formed inside the cover 150, glass plates (front panels 21A, 22A) are embedded in the ribs 161, 163, and ribs 163, 164 are fixed with a U-shaped reinforcing plate 169. . The inner panel 170 is arranged on the rib 165 . Urethane is embedded between the front panel 21A ( 22A) which is a glass plate and the inner panel 170 for reinforcement.
上述各实施方式不限于各图所示的具有对开门的冰箱,也可以应用于单开门的冰箱。The above-mentioned embodiments are not limited to refrigerators with side-by-side doors shown in the figures, and may also be applied to refrigerators with single-door doors.
第25实施方式25th embodiment
图25(a)表示冰箱的例如推拉门25的俯视图,在推拉门25的两侧具有墙壁200。在推拉门25的左右侧面部25S上设置有凹状的把手201。图25(b)中,在推拉门25的左右侧面部设置有凹状的把手202,但是左右侧面部为向前侧倾斜的倾斜面25G。由此,即使左右有墙壁200,由于形成有倾斜面25G,因此能够形成间隙,使用者能够将手指简单地放入把手202。此外,此时,把手202也可以如图的右侧所示,采用容易把持的形状。FIG. 25( a ) shows a plan view of, for example, a sliding door 25 of a refrigerator, and walls 200 are provided on both sides of the sliding door 25 . A recessed handle 201 is provided on the left and right side parts 25S of the sliding door 25 . In FIG. 25( b ), the concave handle 202 is provided on the left and right sides of the sliding door 25 , but the left and right sides are inclined surfaces 25G inclined to the front side. Thereby, even if there are walls 200 on the left and right, since the inclined surface 25G is formed, a gap can be formed, and the user can easily put fingers in the handle 202 . In addition, at this time, the handle 202 may have an easy-to-hold shape as shown on the right side of the figure.
第26实施方式26th Embodiment
图26示出了推拉门210、220、230的例子,在推拉门220的上表面部设置有凹状的把手240。推拉门230在其前表面部设置有开门操作部77。推拉门230在其前表面部设置有开门操作部77,因此前表面部的前表面可以采用玻璃面。推拉门230与推拉门220的间隙C可以比推拉门210与推拉门220的间隙B形成得小,从而外观美观。FIG. 26 shows examples of sliding doors 210 , 220 , and 230 , and a recessed handle 240 is provided on the upper surface of the sliding door 220 . The sliding door 230 is provided with a door opening operation part 77 on the front surface part. The sliding door 230 is provided with the door opening operation part 77 on the front surface part, Therefore The front surface of the front surface part can use a glass surface. The gap C between the sliding door 230 and the sliding door 220 can be formed smaller than the gap B between the sliding door 210 and the sliding door 220, so that the appearance is beautiful.
此外,也可以不是在使用者使手接触例如如图15所示的触摸开关式的开门操作部51或者开门操作部52时使左门21或者右门22打开,而是在使手指离开时使左门21或者右门22打开。此外,也可以从使用者使手指触摸接触开门操作部51或者开门操作部52起经过了预定的规定时间时,打开左门21或者右门22。In addition, instead of opening the left door 21 or the right door 22 when the user touches the door opening operation part 51 or the door opening operation part 52 of the touch switch type as shown in FIG. The left door 21 or the right door 22 is opened. In addition, the left door 21 or the right door 22 may be opened when a predetermined predetermined time elapses after the user touched the door opening operation part 51 or the door opening operation part 52 with a finger.
即、可以是,控制部进行控制,使得在与使用者按压开门操作部51时不同的时刻指示进行门开放,不是检测使用者按压开门操作部51时而是检测离开时来指示进行门开放,也可以是在从按压开门操作部51时起经过了规定时间后指示进行门开放。此外,还可以在从离开开门操作部51时起经过了规定时间后指示进行门开放。That is, the control unit may control to instruct to open the door at a timing different from that when the user presses the door opening operation unit 51, and to instruct to open the door by detecting when the user presses the door opening operation unit 51 instead of when the user leaves the door. Door opening may be instructed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opening operation portion 51 was pressed. In addition, it is also possible to instruct to open the door after a predetermined time has elapsed since leaving the door opening operation unit 51 .
控制部进行以下控制:在进行开门控制时在触摸传感器检测到触摸操作后且在检测不到后进行开门控制,或者构成为:在进行开门控制时,在触摸传感器检测到触摸操作后经过了规定时间后(例如1秒以内,优选0.3秒)进行开门控制。The control unit controls the door opening after the touch sensor detects the touch operation and fails to detect it during the door opening control, or is configured to perform the door opening control after the touch sensor detects the touch operation after a predetermined period of time. After a certain time (for example, within 1 second, preferably 0.3 seconds), the door opening control is performed.
通过采用这样的构成,与使用者用手指触摸开门操作部51或者开门操作部52时左门21或者右门22立即被打开的情况相比,能够抑制触摸开门操作部51或者开门操作部52的手撞到打开的左门21或者右门22。By adopting such a structure, compared with the situation where the left door 21 or the right door 22 is opened immediately when the user touches the door-opening operation portion 51 or the door-opening operation portion 52 with a finger, it is possible to suppress the risk of touching the door-opening operation portion 51 or the door-opening operation portion 52. The hand hits the left door 21 or the right door 22 which is opened.
特别是,在使用者用手指长时间按压开门操作部51或者开门操作部52的情况下,触摸开门操作部51或者开门操作部52的手会碰到打开的左门21或者右门22,但是,如上所述,通过在使用者用手指触摸开门操作部51或者开门操作部52后经过了预定的规定时间时,使得左门21或者右门22打开,能够防止触摸的手撞到打开的左门21或者右门22。Especially, when the user presses the door-opening operation part 51 or the door-opening operation part 52 with fingers for a long time, the hand touching the door-opening operation part 51 or the door-opening operation part 52 will bump into the left door 21 or the right door 22 that is opened, but As mentioned above, by making the left door 21 or the right door 22 open when the user touches the door opening operation part 51 or the door opening operation part 52 with a finger after a predetermined specified time has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the touching hand from colliding with the opened left door. Door 21 or right door 22.
另外,关于上述的门的构造,详细而言,可以是下述的构成。In addition, as for the structure of the said door, in detail, the following structures may be sufficient.
图27是仅对图1所示的冰箱1的冷藏室12的对开式门的一个门进行分解而示出的分解立体图的概略图。构成图1所示的冰箱1的冷藏室12的对开式门的左门21和右门22以及蔬菜室13、制冰室16、上部冷冻室14及冷冻室15的各推拉式门23~25的构造基本上与图27所示的门相同,作为门103b以构造例为代表进行说明。Fig. 27 is a schematic diagram showing an exploded perspective view of only one of the side-by-side doors of the refrigerator compartment 12 of the refrigerator 1 shown in Fig. 1 . The left door 21 and the right door 22 of the side-by-side door of the refrigerating room 12 of the refrigerator 1 shown in FIG. The structure of 25 is basically the same as that of the door shown in FIG. 27, and it demonstrates using the door 103b as a representative structure example.
图27所示的冷藏室12的门103b具有外表面的玻璃板121,玻璃板121设置成全面覆盖门103b的前表面。在图27中,设置玻璃板121的一侧是门103b的前表面侧,与玻璃板121相反一侧的后方是朝向冷藏室12的内部的门103b的后侧。The door 103b of the refrigerator compartment 12 shown in FIG. 27 has the glass plate 121 of an outer surface, and the glass plate 121 is provided so that the front surface of the door 103b may be fully covered. In FIG. 27 , the side where the glass plate 121 is provided is the front side of the door 103b, and the rear side opposite to the glass plate 121 is the rear side of the door 103b toward the inside of the refrigerator compartment 12 .
在玻璃板121的上下左右的外周部分别设置有上侧门罩134、下侧门罩133、左侧门罩135、以及右侧门罩137。这些上下左右4个门罩从上下左右的外侧保持固定玻璃板121的上下左右的侧面。这些上侧门罩134、下侧门罩133、左侧门罩135以及右侧门罩137固定于玻璃板121的4边部分,并且起到对玻璃板121的4边部分进行装饰的装饰部的作用。An upper door cover 134 , a lower door cover 133 , a left door cover 135 , and a right door cover 137 are respectively provided on the upper, lower, left, and right outer peripheral portions of the glass plate 121 . These four door covers up, down, left, and right hold and fix the up, down, left, and right side surfaces of the glass plate 121 from the up, down, left, and right outer sides. The upper door cover 134 , lower door cover 133 , left door cover 135 , and right door cover 137 are fixed to the four sides of the glass plate 121 and function as decorative parts for decorating the four sides of the glass plate 121 . .
如图27所示,在玻璃板121的内侧,通过将构成门的内板的门内侧构成体125安装于门罩,整体或者一体地组装成门103b。在该门内侧构成体125的朝向冷藏室12的内部的内侧,设置有对门和箱体进行密封的矩形密封机构亦即垫圈127。而且,在玻璃板121、门罩和门内侧构成体125之间的空间中填充有由泡沫聚氨酯等构成的泡沫隔热材料,提高隔热性能,并且泡沫隔热材料粘接于玻璃板121的内表面来固定玻璃板121,使得玻璃板121不会脱落,也不会弯曲。玻璃板121上涂敷有涂料,在其背面侧设置有防止玻璃碎裂而飞散的飞散防止板,还可以设置防止该飞散防止板与聚氨酯接触的保护部件。As shown in FIG. 27 , the door 103 b is assembled as a whole or integrally by attaching a door inside structure 125 constituting an inner panel of the door to the door cover inside the glass plate 121 . A gasket 127 , which is a rectangular sealing mechanism for sealing the door and the box, is provided on the inner side of the door inner side structure 125 facing the interior of the refrigerator compartment 12 . Moreover, the space between the glass plate 121, the door cover, and the door inside structure 125 is filled with a foam heat insulating material made of foam polyurethane or the like to improve heat insulation performance, and the foam heat insulating material is bonded to the glass plate 121. The inner surface is used to fix the glass plate 121, so that the glass plate 121 will not fall off and will not bend. Paint is applied to the glass plate 121, and a scatter prevention plate for preventing the glass from breaking and scattering is provided on the back side thereof, and a protective member for preventing the scatter prevention plate from coming into contact with urethane may be provided.
接下来,参照图28来说明具有静电电容型开关的基板与门的关系性的构造例。Next, a structural example of the relationship between the substrate having the capacitive switch and the gate will be described with reference to FIG. 28 .
图28是具有构成上述的控制操作部50、开门操作部51、52的静电电容型开关(对应于开关SA、SB、开门操作显示部51A、52A等)的门(门21、22等)的横截面图的示意图。Fig. 28 is a diagram of doors (doors 21, 22, etc.) with electrostatic capacitive switches (corresponding to switches SA, SB, door opening operation display portions 51A, 52A, etc.) that constitute the above-mentioned control operation portion 50, door opening operation portions 51, 52. Schematic representation of the cross-sectional view.
图28所示的左侧门罩135是设置于门103b的上下方向(图28的垂直于的垂直方向)的左侧的装饰部,右侧门罩137是设置于门103b的上下方向的右侧的装饰部。门103b的上下方向是图28所示的Z方向。The left side door cover 135 shown in FIG. 28 is a decorative part arranged on the left side of the door 103b in the up-down direction (the vertical direction perpendicular to FIG. 28 ), and the right side door cover 137 is arranged on the right side of the door 103b in the up-down direction. side decoration. The up-down direction of the door 103b is the Z direction shown in FIG. 28 .
如图28所示,玻璃板121的一端部(左端部)155未被左侧门罩135全面覆盖,是处于从左侧门罩135露出的状态的大致露出状态的端部。与此相对,玻璃板121的另一端部(右端部)121f被夹持部137a覆盖,由此成为未露出的端部。As shown in FIG. 28 , one end (left end) 155 of the glass plate 121 is not fully covered by the left door cover 135 , but is a substantially exposed end in a state exposed from the left door cover 135 . On the other hand, the other end part (right end part) 121f of the glass plate 121 is covered by the clamping part 137a, and it becomes an unexposed end part by this.
在玻璃板121的一端部155的侧面152的前侧部分形成有R面156,不是呈直角形状。该R面156是例如1/4圆周形状的R面。例如、R面156可以通过将一端部155的一部分切除后进行研磨而具有圆角地来形成,该R面156形成为在Z方向上连续。An R surface 156 is formed on the front side portion of the side surface 152 of the one end portion 155 of the glass plate 121 , and does not have a right-angled shape. This R surface 156 is, for example, a 1/4 circular R surface. For example, the R surface 156 may be formed to have rounded corners by cutting a part of the one end portion 155 and then grinding it, and the R surface 156 may be formed continuously in the Z direction.
如图28所示,与左侧门罩135的侧面153相比,玻璃板121的一端部155的侧面152未向外侧突出。由此,由于玻璃板121的侧面152未从左侧门罩135的侧面153突出出来,因此能够保护玻璃板121的侧面152。As shown in FIG. 28 , the side surface 152 of the one end portion 155 of the glass plate 121 does not protrude outward compared with the side surface 153 of the left door cover 135 . Thereby, since the side surface 152 of the glass plate 121 does not protrude from the side surface 153 of the left door cover 135, the side surface 152 of the glass plate 121 can be protected.
如图28所示,在左侧门罩135的侧面153上设置有基板插入部154。该基板插入部154是贯通孔,是为了从左侧门罩135的外侧将基板110插入到收纳部件105的内部而设置的。基板110上搭载有将静电电容型开关101和冰箱的信息发送到外部,或者从外部接收其他信息的通信机构106。收纳部件105分别固定于玻璃板121的内表面121M和左侧门罩135的内表面135M。该收纳部件105是构成能够收纳基板110的收纳部的部件。而且,基板插入部154上设置有盖,通过由盖进行封闭,能够构成为将收纳部密闭起来。As shown in FIG. 28 , a substrate insertion portion 154 is provided on a side surface 153 of the left door cover 135 . The substrate insertion portion 154 is a through hole provided for inserting the substrate 110 into the storage member 105 from the outside of the left door cover 135 . On the board 110 is mounted a communication means 106 that transmits information on the capacitive switch 101 and the refrigerator to the outside, or receives other information from the outside. The storage member 105 is respectively fixed to the inner surface 121M of the glass plate 121 and the inner surface 135M of the left door cover 135 . The storage member 105 is a member that constitutes a storage portion capable of storing the substrate 110 . Furthermore, a cover is provided on the board insertion part 154, and by closing with the cover, it can be configured so that the accommodating part can be hermetically sealed.
如上所述,通过在该收纳部的周围设置热传导性优良的铝等金属,或者在内部配置加强用的金属,能够防止结露。As described above, it is possible to prevent dew condensation by arranging metal such as aluminum having excellent thermal conductivity around the housing portion or arranging reinforcing metal inside.
基板110使用弹簧这样的弹性机构103,从收纳部件105侧向玻璃板121的内表面121M按压,由此保持为与内表面121M紧密接合。基板110固定于左侧门罩135的与支撑部P2不同的位置P1。由此,具有静电电容型开关101的基板110能够避开左侧门罩135的支撑部P2而以紧密接合的方式固定于玻璃板121的内表面121M。因此,静电电容型开关101能够配置成不空有间隙地被按压于玻璃板121的内表面121M,因此使用者能够可靠地从玻璃板121的表面进行静电电容型开关101的接通断开(ON/OFF)操作。The substrate 110 is held in close contact with the inner surface 121M by being pressed against the inner surface 121M of the glass plate 121 from the storage member 105 side using an elastic mechanism 103 such as a spring. The base plate 110 is fixed at a position P1 of the left door cover 135 that is different from the support portion P2. Thereby, the board|substrate 110 which has the capacitive switch 101 can avoid the support part P2 of the left door cover 135, and can be fixed to the inner surface 121M of the glass plate 121 in close contact. Therefore, the capacitive switch 101 can be arranged so as to be pressed against the inner surface 121M of the glass plate 121 without a gap, so that the user can reliably turn on and off the capacitive switch 101 from the surface of the glass plate 121 ( ON/OFF) operation.
另外,作为将静电电容型开关101不空有间隙地按压于玻璃板121的内表面121M的方法,也可以不设置弹性机构,而设置使基板110从后方向前方移动的引导机构,例如也可以以使收纳部朝向基板的插入方向变窄的方式设置倾斜,或者将设置于基板110的突起插入设置于收纳部的引导槽来进行引导,由此进行按压。In addition, as a method of pressing the capacitive switch 101 against the inner surface 121M of the glass plate 121 without gaps, it is also possible to provide a guide mechanism for moving the substrate 110 from the rear to the front instead of an elastic mechanism. The pressing is performed by providing an inclination so that the storage portion becomes narrow toward the insertion direction of the substrate, or by inserting and guiding a protrusion provided on the substrate 110 into a guide groove provided in the storage portion.
此外,基板也可以采用配置于支撑基板的支撑容器的构成,可以在该支撑容器内配置作为发光机构的LED,使LED从基板的背面发光。In addition, the substrate may be configured in a support container that supports the substrate, and an LED as a light emitting mechanism may be disposed in the support container so that the LED emits light from the back surface of the substrate.
而且,静电电容型开关101可以通过在配置于背面的LED基板的表面配置电极来形成为一体型,也可以设置于与配置LED的基板不同的其他基板。该基板可以在具有弹性的薄膜状透明薄膜上设置静电电容型开关的电极。这样,可以将LED配置于透明电极的背面,能够从电极的背面侧发光。Furthermore, the capacitive switch 101 may be formed integrally by arranging electrodes on the surface of the LED substrate arranged on the back, or may be provided on another substrate different from the substrate on which the LEDs are arranged. In this substrate, electrodes of capacitive switches may be provided on an elastic film-like transparent film. In this way, the LED can be arranged on the back surface of the transparent electrode, and light can be emitted from the back surface side of the electrode.
第27实施方式27th embodiment
图29是第27实施方式的冰箱1的主视图,图30是该冰箱1的开门状态的立体图,图31是该冰箱1的冷藏室部12部分的放大立体图。29 is a front view of a refrigerator 1 according to a twenty-seventh embodiment, FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the refrigerator 1 with the door opened, and FIG. 31 is an enlarged perspective view of the refrigerator compartment 12 of the refrigerator 1 .
如图29和图30所示,在第27实施方式的冰箱1中,作为冰箱主体的箱体11从上层起,由冷藏室12、蔬菜室13、能够切换冰箱内设定温度的切换室14、冷冻室15构成。而且,在切换室14的左侧设置有制冰室16。As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the refrigerator 1 of the twenty-seventh embodiment, the cabinet 11 as the main body of the refrigerator consists of a refrigerator compartment 12, a vegetable compartment 13, and a switching compartment 14 capable of switching the set temperature in the refrigerator from the upper layer. , Freezer 15 constitutes. Furthermore, an ice making compartment 16 is provided on the left side of the switch compartment 14 .
如图29~图31所示,为了覆盖冷藏室12的前表面开口部,左右ー对左门21、右门22分别在左端部、右端部的上下利用铰链部安装成以对开式进行开闭。蔬菜室13、切换室14、冷冻室15、制冰室16上分别设置有推拉式的门23、24、25、26。As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31 , in order to cover the front opening of the refrigerating compartment 12, a pair of left and right doors 21 and 22 are mounted on the left and right ends by hinges so that they can be opened in half. close. Push-pull doors 23, 24, 25, 26 are respectively arranged on the vegetable compartment 13, the switching compartment 14, the freezing compartment 15, and the ice-making compartment 16.
左门21、右门22都是以下构造:在前表面开口的扁平内板的开口部安装有着色透明的玻璃制前面板21A、22A,并且在内部空洞部配置有真空隔热材料,在未被真空隔热材料填埋的空洞部中配置有聚氨酯隔热材料或者固体隔热材料。前面板21A、22A的着色度为在受到外光照射的状态从外看不到前面板21A、22A背面侧的隔热材料等填充物的浓度。并且,前面板21A、22A的着色度还是在对后述的操作按键名、冷却功能名、冷却强度等进行透过显示的LED显示灯、对温度值等变化的数值进行透过显示的7段LED显示装置的亮灯状态下光透过而从表面侧能够看到的浓度。Both the left door 21 and the right door 22 have the following structures: colored transparent glass front panels 21A, 22A are installed in the openings of the flat inner panels with open front surfaces, and vacuum heat insulating materials are arranged in the internal hollows. A polyurethane heat insulating material or a solid heat insulating material is disposed in the cavity filled with the vacuum heat insulating material. The degree of coloring of the front panels 21A and 22A is the concentration at which the filler such as the heat insulating material on the back side of the front panels 21A and 22A cannot be seen from the outside in a state of being irradiated with external light. In addition, the coloring degree of the front panels 21A and 22A is also the 7-segment LED display lamps for transparently displaying the name of the operation button, the name of the cooling function, the cooling intensity, etc. to be described later, and the transparent display for changing numerical values such as the temperature value. The concentration at which light passes through and can be seen from the front side in the lit state of the LED display device.
在右门22的前面板22A的背面侧,设置有用于通过来自前面板22A的表面的触摸操作来操作冰箱的静电电容式控制操作部50。该控制操作部50上设置有用于检测冰箱周围的环境状态的红外线受光部、HOME按键、检测出对该HOME按键的触摸而对操作按键名、冷却功能名、冷却强度等进行透过显示的LED显示灯、对温度值等变化的数值进行透过显示的7段LED显示装置等。On the rear side of the front panel 22A of the right door 22, a capacitive control operation unit 50 for operating the refrigerator by touch operation from the surface of the front panel 22A is provided. The control operation part 50 is provided with an infrared light receiving part for detecting the environmental state around the refrigerator, a HOME button, and an LED for transparently displaying the name of the operation button, the name of the cooling function, the cooling intensity, etc. by detecting the touch of the HOME button. Display lamps, 7-segment LED display devices that transparently display changing values such as temperature values, etc.
在左门21的前面板21A、右门22的前面板22A的下边附近的背面侧,分别设置有左右横向细长的开门操作部51、52。而且,在前面板21A、22A的表面设置有表示是开门操作部并且表示开门操作方向的开门操作显示部51A、52A。在此,左门21的开门操作显示部51A设置有朝左的箭头标记,该朝左的箭头标记认知在手指触摸的状态下使手指向左方滑动来进行开门操作。右门22的开门操作显示部52A设置有朝右的箭头标记,该朝右的箭头标记认知在手指触摸的状态下使手指向右方滑动来开门操作。On the rear side near the lower side of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 and the front panel 22A of the right door 22, door opening operation parts 51 and 52 that are elongated in the left and right horizontal directions are provided, respectively. And the door opening operation display part 51A, 52A which shows that it is a door opening operation part and shows a door opening operation direction is provided in the surface of front panel 21A, 22A. Here, the door-opening operation display portion 51A of the left door 21 is provided with a leftward arrow mark for recognizing that the door-opening operation is performed by sliding the finger to the left while the finger is in the touch state. The door-opening operation display portion 52A of the right door 22 is provided with a rightward arrow mark for recognizing that the door-opening operation is performed by sliding the finger to the right while being touched by the finger.
在箱体11的顶板上表面的前端附近的左右2个部位,在各自的与左门21、右门22的各上边的开放侧端部附近对应的位置,分别设置有开门驱动部54、55。这些开门驱动部54、55通过利用电磁铁将动铁芯54A、55A向前方推出,能够将左门21、右门22各自的开放侧端部附近的上边向前方推出,而使各门自动开放。另外,为了对左门21进行开门,如果在触摸左门开门操作显示部51A的右端或者右端附近的箭头标记的状态下使手指向左方滑动,则开门操作部51感知该连续的触摸,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56,如果由控制部56判断为是开门操作指令,则使左门21的开门驱动部54动作,使左门21自动开门。另一方面,为了使右门22开门,如果在触摸右门开门操作显示部52A的左端或者左端附近的箭头标记的状态下使手指向右方滑动,则开门操作部52感知该连续的触摸,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56,如果由控制部56判断为是开门操作指令,则使右门22的开门驱动部55动作,使右门22自动开门。In the left and right 2 positions near the front end of the upper surface of the top plate of the casing 11, at respective positions corresponding to the opening side ends of the respective upper sides of the left door 21 and the right door 22, door opening drive parts 54, 55 are respectively provided. . These door-opening driving parts 54, 55 push out the moving iron cores 54A, 55A forward by utilizing the electromagnet, and can push out the upper edge near the respective opening side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22 forward, so that each door is automatically opened. . In addition, in order to open the left door 21, if the finger is slid to the left while touching the right end of the left door opening operation display part 51A or the arrow mark near the right end, the door opening operation part 51 senses the continuous touch, and The touch detection signal is sent to the control unit 56, and if the control unit 56 determines that it is a door opening operation command, the door opening driving unit 54 of the left door 21 is activated to automatically open the left door 21. On the other hand, in order to open the right door 22, if the finger is slid to the right while touching the left end of the right door opening operation display part 52A or the arrow mark near the left end, the door opening operation part 52 senses the continuous touch, And the touch detection signal is sent to the control unit 56, if it is judged by the control unit 56 that it is a door-opening operation command, the door-opening drive unit 55 of the right door 22 is activated to make the right door 22 open automatically.
另外,第27实施方式的冰箱的控制部56进行的冷却控制是一般的控制,没有特别限定,但是,例如压缩机、操作面板、结露防止加热器、制冰室内部的制冰装置、冷藏室风扇、冷冻室风扇、除霜加热器连接于该控制部56并被控制。In addition, the cooling control performed by the control unit 56 of the refrigerator according to the twenty-seventh embodiment is general control and is not particularly limited. A compartment fan, a freezer compartment fan, and a defrosting heater are connected to and controlled by the control unit 56 .
开门操作显示部51A、52A的箭头标记不限于该显示,只要是如果触摸该处并向右方或者左方滑动,则能够容易识别为进行开门操作的显示,则标记的形状、形态没有限定。The arrow marks on the door opening operation display parts 51A and 52A are not limited to this display, as long as the arrow marks are easily recognized as the door opening operation when touched and slid to the right or left, the shape and form of the marks are not limited.
在左门21、右门22上,在分别比开门操作显示部51A、52A靠下侧的下端面部分设置有把手61、62,把手61、62设置成通过使手掌朝上并将手指插入,并且向面前拉动的操作能够对左门21、右门22分别个别地进行手动开门。On the left door 21 and the right door 22, handles 61, 62 are provided on the lower end faces of the door opening operation display parts 51A, 52A, respectively. And the operation of pulling toward the front can manually open the left door 21 and the right door 22 respectively individually.
接下来,说明第27实施方式的冰箱的自动开门动作。图32是冰箱1的开门控制的框图。如图32所示,在开门操作部51、52上,沿开门操作显示部51A、52A的左右横向排列的5个箭头标记处分别以夹着前面板21A、22A相对的方式排列设置有静电电容式触摸传感器51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5。这些静电电容式触摸传感器51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5分别设定为:检测由用户的触摸所致的静电电容变化,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56。Next, the automatic door opening operation of the refrigerator according to the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a block diagram of door opening control of the refrigerator 1 . As shown in FIG. 32 , on the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 , the five arrow marks arranged in the left and right lateral directions of the door opening operation display parts 51A and 52A are respectively arranged with electrostatic capacitors in such a manner as to sandwich the front panels 21A and 22A. Type touch sensors 51-1 to 51-5, 52-1 to 52-5. These capacitive touch sensors 51 - 1 to 51 - 5 , 52 - 1 to 52 - 5 are respectively set to detect a change in capacitance caused by a user's touch and to transmit a touch detection signal to the control unit 56 .
因此,用户要打开右门22而在开门操作显示部52A的部分用手指触摸左端的箭头标记,并在触摸的状态下向右方滑动该手指时,静电电容式触摸传感器52-1~52-5中的检测出静电电容变化的传感器,按照触摸的顺序分别将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56。因此,控制部56判断是否是开门操作,如果判断为是正规的开门操作,则对右门的开门驱动部55输出开门驱动信号而使右门22自动开门。此外,在是左门21的开门操作的情况下,针对在左门21的开门操作显示部51A上,在触摸右端或者右端附近的箭头标记的状态下使手指向左方滑动的操作,对左门21的开门操作进行同样的判断。Therefore, when the user wants to open the right door 22 and touches the arrow mark on the left end with a finger on the part of the door opening operation display part 52A, and slides the finger to the right while touching, the capacitive touch sensors 52-1 to 52- The sensors in 5 that detect changes in electrostatic capacitance transmit touch detection signals to the control unit 56 in the order of touch. Therefore, the control part 56 judges whether it is a door opening operation, and if it judges that it is normal door opening operation, it outputs a door opening drive signal to the door opening drive part 55 of the right door, and makes the right door 22 open automatically. In addition, in the case of the door opening operation of the left door 21, on the door opening operation display part 51A of the left door 21, for the operation of sliding the finger to the left while touching the arrow mark on the right end or near the right end, the left The same judgment is performed for the door opening operation of the door 21 .
此处的开门判断的逻辑如下。左右各5个传感器中至少3个传感器在规定时间(例如0.5秒或者1秒)内,并且在按照排列顺序检测到触摸的情况下判断为是开门操作而使相应的门自动开门。在此,针对右门22的开门操作进行说明。The logic of door opening judgment here is as follows. At least 3 sensors in each of the 5 sensors on the left and right are within a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1 second), and in the case of detecting a touch according to the order of arrangement, it is judged that it is a door opening operation, and the corresponding door is automatically opened. Here, the door opening operation of the right door 22 will be described.
当触摸了右门22的开门操作显示部52A的箭头标记的任意一个时,开门操作部52侧的相应的静电电容式触摸传感器(通常由于左端或者左端附近的箭头标记被触摸,因此在此假设是左端的传感器52-1)进行触摸检测,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56。控制部56接收该信号,并开始开门操作的判断处理,其结果,控制部56判断为是对右门22的正规的开门操作,并对右门的开门驱动部55输出开门驱动指令,使开门驱动部55动作而使右门22自动开门。左门21的开门操作的判断处理也一样。但是,在左门21的情况下,与右门22的朝向相反,在触摸开门操作显示部51A的右端或者右端附近的箭头标记之后向左方滑动的情况下,判断为是开门操作。When any one of the arrow marks on the door opening operation display portion 52A of the right door 22 is touched, the corresponding electrostatic capacitive touch sensor on the door opening operation portion 52 side (usually due to the left end or the arrow marks near the left end being touched, it is assumed here that The sensor 52 - 1 ) at the left end detects a touch and sends a touch detection signal to the control unit 56 . Control section 56 receives this signal, and starts the judging process of door-opening operation, and as a result, control section 56 judges as the normal door-opening operation to right door 22, and outputs the door-opening drive instruction to the door-opening drive section 55 of right door, makes the door open. The drive unit 55 operates to automatically open the right door 22 . The same applies to the determination process of the door opening operation of the left door 21 . However, in the case of the left door 21 , in the opposite direction to the right door 22 , when the arrow mark on or near the right end of the door opening operation display unit 51A is touched and then slid to the left, it is determined to be a door opening operation.
接下来,参照图29~图31,对作为语音识别机构的2个语音识别传感器NS1、NS2、人体探测传感器HS、照度传感器LS进行说明。Next, two voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2, human body detection sensor HS, and illuminance sensor LS as voice recognition means will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31 .
如图29~图30所示,1个语音识别传感器NSl、人体探测传感器HS、照度传感器LS配置于冰箱1的箱体11的上表面。另一个语音识别传感器NS2在例如右门22的下部配置成与1个语音识别传感器NSl隔开距离。作为这些语音识别传感器NS1、NS2,可以使用例如电容式麦克风,没有特别限制。As shown in FIGS. 29 to 30 , a voice recognition sensor NS1, a human body detection sensor HS, and an illuminance sensor LS are arranged on the upper surface of the cabinet 11 of the refrigerator 1 . The other voice recognition sensor NS2 is arranged, for example, at a lower portion of the right door 22 at a distance from one voice recognition sensor NS1. As these speech recognition sensors NS1 and NS2, for example, condenser microphones can be used, and there is no particular limitation.
如图30和图31所示,上侧的语音识别传感器NSl配置于冰箱1的箱体11的上表面,下侧的语音识别传感器NS2配置于例如右门22的下端部内,但是,不限于此,也可以只配置2个语音识别传感器NS1、NS2中的任意一方的语音识别传感器。As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 , the upper voice recognition sensor NS1 is disposed on the upper surface of the cabinet 11 of the refrigerator 1, and the lower voice recognition sensor NS2 is disposed, for example, in the lower end of the right door 22, but it is not limited thereto. Alternatively, only one of the two voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 may be provided.
作为图31所示的人体探测传感器HS,可以使用例如红外线传感器。图31所示的上侧的语音识别传感器NSl、人体探测传感器HS、照度传感器LS分别收纳于收纳盒CS1、CS2、CS3。由此,语音识别传感器NSl、人体探测传感器HS、照度传感器LS可以重叠配置于箱体11的上表面,也可以并列配置,能够得到保护而不会落灰。收纳盒Cl、C2、C3在箱体11的上表面配置于例如开门操作部51、52之间的位置,但是,各传感器的配置位置不限于此。As the human body detection sensor HS shown in FIG. 31 , for example, an infrared sensor can be used. The upper voice recognition sensor NS1, human body detection sensor HS, and illuminance sensor LS shown in FIG. 31 are housed in storage boxes CS1, CS2, and CS3, respectively. Thus, the speech recognition sensor NS1, the human body detection sensor HS, and the illuminance sensor LS can be arranged overlappingly on the upper surface of the box 11, or arranged in parallel, and can be protected from dust. The storage boxes C1, C2, and C3 are arranged, for example, at positions between the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 on the upper surface of the box body 11, but the arrangement positions of the sensors are not limited thereto.
此外,这些传感器可以收纳于开门驱动部54、55的壳体内,也可以收纳于用于遮盖对门进行开闭的支点亦即铰链的壳体。In addition, these sensors may be housed in the housings of the door-opening drive units 54 and 55, or may be housed in housings for covering hinges that are fulcrums for opening and closing the doors.
图32是冰箱的开门控制的框图。图33的流程图表示自动打开冷藏室的左门21和右门22的情况。Fig. 32 is a block diagram of door opening control of the refrigerator. The flowchart of Fig. 33 shows the case where the left door 21 and the right door 22 of the refrigerator compartment are automatically opened.
如图32所示,2个语音识别传感器NS1、NS2、人体探测传感器HS、照度传感器LS与控制部56电连接。由此,2个语音识别传感器NS1、NS2接收到声音时的语音信号可以发送给控制部56。人体探测传感器HS的检测信号可以发送给控制部56。照度传感器LS的照度信号可以发送给控制部56。As shown in FIG. 32 , the two voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 , the human body detection sensor HS, and the illuminance sensor LS are electrically connected to the control unit 56 . Thereby, when two voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 receive voice, the voice signal can be sent to the control part 56. FIG. The detection signal of the human body detection sensor HS can be sent to the control unit 56 . The illuminance signal of the illuminance sensor LS can be sent to the control unit 56 .
通过像这样设置2个语音识别传感器NS1、NS2,如图33所示的流程图那样,使用者以语音说话,由此不是由使用者手动打开冷藏室的左门21和右门22,即、除了使用者握住把手(抓手)打开门以外,可以利用检测声音、语音等的不同检测(操作)方法自动地打开,后面进行说明。By providing the two voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 in this way, the user speaks by voice as shown in the flowchart shown in FIG. In addition to the user holding the handle (grip) to open the door, it can be automatically opened by different detection (operation) methods of detecting sound, voice, etc., which will be described later.
另外,如图32所示,控制部56连接有存储部300和关联性输入登记机构305。在关联性输入登记机构305中,使用者可以输入“作为收纳物的食品等的名称”、例如“左门21的收纳搁架的名称”、“右门22的收纳搁架的名称”、“冰箱1的冰箱内的收纳部位的名称”等来进行登记。“作为收纳物的食品等的名称”为例如“牛奶”、“鸡蛋”、“黄油”、“果汁”、“芥末”、“豆腐”等。“冰箱1的冰箱内的收纳部位的名称”为例如图29所示的冷藏室12、蔬菜室13、切换室14、冷冻室15、制冰室16等。In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 , a storage unit 300 and a relational input registration unit 305 are connected to the control unit 56 . In the association input registration mechanism 305, the user can input "the name of food, etc. as storage objects", such as "the name of the storage shelf of the left door 21", "the name of the storage shelf of the right door 22", " The name of the storage part in the refrigerator of the refrigerator 1" and the like are registered. "The name of the food etc. which are storage things" is "milk", "egg", "butter", "juice", "wasabi", "tofu" etc., for example. "Names of the storage parts in the refrigerator 1" are, for example, the refrigerator compartment 12, the vegetable compartment 13, the switch compartment 14, the freezer compartment 15, the ice compartment 16, and the like as shown in FIG. 29 .
图32所示的控制部56在存储部300中存储上述“作为收纳物的食品等的名称”放到“冰箱1的冰箱内的哪个收纳部位的名称”的关联信息。作为一个例子,在存储部300中,使用者可以在左门21侧的收纳搁架上设置(存储)例如“牛奶”、“鸡蛋”、“黄油”,在步骤S12中,在右门22侧的收纳搁架上设置(存储)例如“果汁”、“芥末”、“豆腐”。The control unit 56 shown in FIG. 32 stores in the storage unit 300 related information that the above-mentioned "name of food, etc. as storage items" is placed in "the name of the storage location in the refrigerator 1". As an example, in the storage unit 300, the user can set (store) such as "milk", "eggs" and "butter" on the storage shelf on the left door 21 side, and in step S12, on the right door 22 side Set (store) such as "juice", "wasabi" and "tofu" on the storage shelf.
在此,参照自动打开冷藏室的左门21和右门22的情况下的图33的流程图,具体地说明使用者通过语音自动地打开左门21和右门22的情况。Here, the case where the user automatically opens the left door 21 and the right door 22 by voice will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
在图33中,在步骤S11中,使用者预先操作关联性输入登记机构305的例如键盘、触摸板等,与左门21侧的收纳搁架相关联地输入例如“牛奶”、“鸡蛋”、“黄油”进行登记,对右门22侧的收纳搁架输入例如“果汁”、“芥末”、“豆腐”来进行登记。由此,图32所示的控制部56使图32所示的存储部300与左门21侧的收纳搁架相关联地设置(存储)例如“牛奶”、“鸡蛋”、“黄油”,在步骤S12中,针对右门22侧的收纳搁架设置(存储)例如“果汁”、“芥末”、“豆腐”。In FIG. 33 , in step S11, the user operates, for example, a keyboard, a touch panel, etc. of the association input registration mechanism 305 in advance, and inputs, for example, "milk", "egg", etc. in association with the storage shelf on the left door 21 side. "Butter" is registered, and registration is performed by inputting, for example, "juice", "wasabi", and "tofu" into the storage shelf on the right door 22 side. Thus, the control unit 56 shown in FIG. 32 sets (stores) “milk”, “eggs” and “butter” in the storage unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S12, for example, "juice", "wasabi", and "tofu" are set (stored) in the storage shelf on the right door 22 side.
在图33的步骤S13中,由例如人体探测传感器HS或者照度传感器LS等检测出使用者向冰箱的接近,由此从人体探测传感器HS向控制部56发送检测信号,或者从照度传感器LS向控制部56发送照度信号。因此,在控制部56中,由检测信号或者照度信号引起控制部56的语音识别功能开始的触发,即、在控制部56中产生发挥语音识别功能的时机,由此,控制部56的语音识别功能开始工作。In step S13 of FIG. 33 , the approach of the user to the refrigerator is detected by, for example, the human body detection sensor HS or the illuminance sensor LS, and a detection signal is sent from the human body detection sensor HS to the control unit 56, or from the illuminance sensor LS to the control unit. Section 56 sends an illuminance signal. Therefore, in the control unit 56, the trigger of the start of the voice recognition function of the control unit 56 is caused by the detection signal or the illuminance signal, that is, the timing for displaying the voice recognition function is generated in the control unit 56, whereby the voice recognition function of the control unit 56 The function starts working.
这样,该语音识别功能开始的触发是:在人体探测传感器HS检测出接近冰箱的使用者的情况下,从人体探测传感器HS向控制部56发送检测信号时,或者在照度传感器LS检测出使用者打开了放置冰箱的厨房照明的情况下,从照度传感器LS向控制部56发送照度信号时。In this way, the voice recognition function is triggered when the human body detection sensor HS detects a user approaching the refrigerator, when a detection signal is sent from the human body detection sensor HS to the control unit 56, or when the illuminance sensor LS detects a user approaching the refrigerator. When the lighting in the kitchen where the refrigerator is placed is turned on, an illuminance signal is sent from the illuminance sensor LS to the control unit 56 .
接下来,在图33的步骤S14中,使用者以语音说出“牛奶”、“鸡蛋”、“黄油”中的至少1个时,图32所示的语音识别传感器NS1、NS2接收该语音并向控制部56发送语音信号,因此控制部56识别语音。由此,在步骤S15中,控制部56针对至少收纳有“牛奶”、“鸡蛋”、“黄油”中的至少1个的图32所示的左门21的开门驱动部54输出开门驱动指令,使开门驱动部54动作。因此,在步骤S16中,左门21的收纳搁架在开门驱动部54的动作下能够自动地打开。Next, in step S14 of FIG. 33, when the user utters at least one of “milk”, “egg” and “butter” by voice, the voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 shown in FIG. 32 receive the voice and Since the voice signal is sent to the control unit 56, the control unit 56 recognizes the voice. Thus, in step S15, the control unit 56 outputs a door opening drive command to the door opening drive unit 54 of the left door 21 shown in FIG. The door opening drive unit 54 is operated. Therefore, in step S16, the storage shelf of the left door 21 can be opened automatically by the operation|movement of the door opening drive part 54. FIG.
同样,在步骤S14中,使用者以语音说出“果汁”、“芥末”、“豆腐”中的至少1个时,图32所示的语音识别传感器NS1、NS2接收该语音,向控制部56发送语音信号,因此控制部56识别语音。由此,在步骤S17中,控制部56对收纳有“果汁”、“芥末”、“豆腐”中的至少1个的右门22的开门驱动部55输出开门驱动指令,使开门驱动部55动作。因此,在步骤S18中,右门22的收纳搁架在开门驱动部55的动作下能够自动地打开。Similarly, in step S14, when the user utters at least one of "juice", "wasabi" and "tofu" by voice, the voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 shown in FIG. Since the voice signal is transmitted, the control unit 56 recognizes the voice. Thus, in step S17, the control unit 56 outputs a door-opening drive command to the door-opening drive unit 55 of the right door 22 storing at least one of “juice”, “wasabi” and “tofu” to operate the door-opening drive unit 55. . Therefore, in step S18 , the storage shelf of the right door 22 can be automatically opened by the operation of the door opening drive unit 55 .
在存储部300中,例如预先相关联地登记了已放入有“牛奶”的左门21侧的收纳搁架,即使是不知道放入“牛奶”的冰箱内的部位的人,如果说出“牛奶”,则能够自动地打开左门21。由此,不知道放入“牛奶”的冰箱内的部位的人不会错误地打开未放入“牛奶”的右门22。因此,门的打开关闭次数减少,提高了节能效果。In the storage unit 300, for example, the storage shelf on the left door 21 side where "milk" has been put in is registered in advance in association with each other. "Milk", then the left door 21 can be opened automatically. Thereby, the person who does not know the part in the refrigerator which puts "milk" does not open the right door 22 which does not put "milk" by mistake. Therefore, the number of times of opening and closing of the door is reduced, and the energy-saving effect is improved.
另外,在冰箱内配置有制冰用的储水罐的情况下,通过使用者例如说出“储水”,放置储水罐一侧的门、例如左门21将会打开,使用者能够在拿着储水罐的状态下将储水罐收纳于冰箱内的储水罐的规定收纳位置。由此,即使在使用者双手拿着储水罐而双手占满的情况下,也能够不使用图29所示的把手61而自动地打开为了收纳储水罐而要打开的例如左门21。In addition, when a water storage tank for ice making is installed in the refrigerator, the door on the side where the water storage tank is placed, such as the left door 21, will open when the user speaks, for example, "water storage", and the user can Store the water storage tank in a predetermined storage position of the water storage tank in the refrigerator while holding the water storage tank. Thereby, even when the user holds the water tank with both hands and both hands are full, the left door 21 , for example, which is to be opened to accommodate the water tank can be automatically opened without using the handle 61 shown in FIG. 29 .
另外,对于图29所示的推拉式的门23、24、25、26而言,也可以通过分别设置开门驱动部,与左门21和右门22同样地利用语音进行自动开门。Also, the push-pull doors 23, 24, 25, and 26 shown in FIG. 29 can be opened automatically by voice similarly to the left door 21 and the right door 22 by providing door opening drive parts respectively.
这样,与使用者抓住把手来手动地打开左门21、右门22、推拉式的门23、24、25、26的手动操作不同,能够自动地打开门,因此在例如使用者双手拿着食品等的情况下等,非常便利。In this way, unlike the manual operation in which the user grasps the handle to manually open the left door 21, the right door 22, and the push-pull doors 23, 24, 25, and 26, the door can be opened automatically, so for example, when the user holds the door with both hands, It is very convenient for cases such as food.
此外,在同时识别出使不同的门开放的语音的情况下,可以通过使这些不同的门的开放时机错开地来进行开放等,防止门与使用者产生冲突。In addition, when voices for opening different doors are recognized at the same time, it is possible to prevent the doors from colliding with the user by staggering the opening timings of these different doors to open them.
此外,在图33所示的步骤S13中,作为对控制部56提供用于语音识别开始的触发的例子,是由语音识别传感器NSl、NS2识别使用者发出的语言(单词)而得到的来自语音识别传感器NSl、NS2的语音信号。作为使用者发出的预先确定的语言(单词),可以采用例如“芝麻快开门”等。即、作为对该控制部56提供用于语音识别开始的触发的优选例,希望是例如“芝麻开门”,进而“芝麻快开门”这样的通常会话中不会出现的单词。In addition, in step S13 shown in FIG. 33, as an example of providing a trigger for the start of voice recognition to the control unit 56, the voice recognition sensor NS1, NS2 recognizes the language (word) uttered by the user from the voice The voice signals of the sensors NS1, NS2 are recognized. As the predetermined language (word) uttered by the user, for example, "open sesame quickly" or the like can be used. That is, as a preferable example of providing the control unit 56 with a trigger for starting voice recognition, words such as "Open Sesame" and "Open Sesame Quickly" that do not appear in normal conversation are desirable.
即、在对控制部56提供用于语音识别开始的触发的例子是人的声音的情况下,为了防止利用在通常的会话内容中出现的单词可能会导致控制部56开始进行语音识别动作的问题,优选使用在通常的会话中不会出现的单词。由此能够防止控制部56错误地开始语音识别动作。对控制部56提供用于语音识别开始的触发的语音可以设定成与冰箱产生的杂音、例如压缩机等的声音、通过门开放时的警告音、门的开闭音、房间中使用的吸尘器或房间中播放的音乐等的声音不同的声音。此外,在将要识别的声音设定为非语音的声音时,如果设定成识别多次(例如2次)拍手的声音,则因为与冰箱产生的声音不同,因此不会出现误开关。That is, when the example of the trigger provided to the control unit 56 for starting speech recognition is a human voice, in order to prevent the use of words that appear in the content of normal conversations, the problem that the control unit 56 may start the speech recognition operation may be caused. , preferably using words that do not occur in normal conversation. This can prevent the control unit 56 from erroneously starting the speech recognition operation. The voice that provides the trigger for the start of voice recognition to the control unit 56 can be set to the noise generated by the refrigerator, such as the sound of the compressor, the warning sound when the door is opened, the opening and closing sound of the door, and the vacuum cleaner used in the room. Or the sound of the music playing in the room is different. In addition, when the sound to be recognized is set to non-speech sound, if it is set to recognize the sound of clapping hands multiple times (for example, twice), it is different from the sound produced by the refrigerator, so there will be no erroneous switching.
接下来,参照图34来说明图30所示的配置于右门22的下部的语音识别传感器NS2的配置例。图34是例如右门22的横截面的示意图。Next, an arrangement example of the voice recognition sensor NS2 arranged under the right door 22 shown in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 . FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of a cross section of, for example, the right door 22 .
如图34所示,语音识别传感器NS2是例如电容麦克风,配置于右门22的下部。该语音识别传感器NS2配置于收纳部件105内。该收纳部件105分别被固定于玻璃板121的内表面121M和左侧门罩135的内表面135M。该收纳部件105是构成能够收纳基板110的收纳部的部件。孔部154设置于例如右门22的左侧门罩135的下部。使用者产生的语音等通过孔部154而到达语音识别传感器NS2。该孔部154可以是由单一的的孔构成,也可以是由多个孔构成。由此,语音识别传感器NS2能够配置成内置于右门22的下部内,并且能够通过孔部154而可靠地拾取外部的语音等。此外,该语音识别传感器NS2可以搭载于基板110,也可以具有覆盖孔部154的盖,并在盖上形成小孔。As shown in FIG. 34 , the voice recognition sensor NS2 is, for example, a condenser microphone, and is disposed under the right door 22 . This speech recognition sensor NS2 is arranged in the storage member 105 . The storage member 105 is respectively fixed to the inner surface 121M of the glass plate 121 and the inner surface 135M of the left door cover 135 . The storage member 105 is a member that constitutes a storage portion capable of storing the substrate 110 . The hole portion 154 is provided, for example, in a lower portion of the left door cover 135 of the right door 22 . A voice or the like generated by the user reaches the voice recognition sensor NS2 through the hole portion 154 . The hole portion 154 may be composed of a single hole or may be composed of a plurality of holes. Accordingly, the voice recognition sensor NS2 can be arranged to be built in the lower portion of the right door 22 and can reliably pick up external voices and the like through the hole portion 154 . In addition, this speech recognition sensor NS2 may be mounted on the board|substrate 110, and may have the cover which covers the hole part 154, and may form a small hole in a cover.
如图32所示,控制部56连接于发光部330、声音产生部340、语音产生部350。发光部330、声音产生部340和语音产生部350是在利用语音识别传感器NS1、NS2检测出的声音(语音)来打开门的情况下,为了警告而向使用者告知该门将被打开的告知机构。As shown in FIG. 32 , the control unit 56 is connected to the light emitting unit 330 , the sound generation unit 340 , and the speech generation unit 350 . The light emitting unit 330, the sound generating unit 340, and the voice generating unit 350 are means for notifying the user that the door will be opened in order to warn the user when the door is opened by the sound (voice) detected by the voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2. .
发光部330是例如LED发光部,声音产生部340是例如蜂鸣器。语音产生部350是例如扬声器。如上所述,图32所示的语音识别传感器NS1、NS2的至少一方检测使用者的语音,控制部56发出打开例如左门21或者右门22的指令,控制部56可以使图32所示的发光部330以例如“赤色”发光,或者使声音产生部340产生警报音,或者使语音产生部350以语音向使用者告知“门将被打开”等警告内容。由此,能够对使用者以光、声音、语音的至少一种告知门将被打开,因此,能够防止使用者不慎被门撞到。The light emitting unit 330 is, for example, an LED light emitting unit, and the sound generating unit 340 is, for example, a buzzer. The voice generator 350 is, for example, a speaker. As mentioned above, at least one of the voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 shown in FIG. 32 detects the voice of the user, and the control unit 56 issues an instruction to open, for example, the left door 21 or the right door 22. The light emitting unit 330 emits light in “red”, or makes the sound generating unit 340 generate an alarm sound, or makes the sound generating unit 350 notify the user of warning content such as “the door will be opened” by voice. Thereby, the user can be notified that the door will be opened by at least one of light, sound, and voice, so that the user can be prevented from accidentally being hit by the door.
此外,如图32所示,人体探测传感器HS连接于控制部56。该人体探测传感器HS检测到使用者接近冰箱时,对控制部56发出检测信号而通知检测到了人。这样,控制部56在检测到使用者接近冰箱时,如图32所示的控制部56能够借助语音产生部350通过语音引导来向使用者询问“打开门吗?”这样的询问内容。在该情况下,使用者如果回答例如“YES”,则该“YES”被语音识别传感器NS1、NS2所识别,并将语音信号通知给控制部56。由此,控制部56通过向例如右门22的开门驱动部55输出开门驱动指令,能够打开右门22。同样,控制部56通过向例如左门21的开门驱动部54输出开门驱动指令,能够打开左门21。In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 , the human body detection sensor HS is connected to the control unit 56 . When the human body detection sensor HS detects that a user approaches the refrigerator, it sends a detection signal to the control unit 56 to notify that a person has been detected. In this way, when the control unit 56 detects that the user is approaching the refrigerator, the control unit 56 as shown in FIG. 32 can ask the user the question “Do you want to open the door?” through voice guidance through the voice generator 350 . In this case, when the user answers, for example, “YES”, this “YES” is recognized by the voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 , and a voice signal is notified to the control unit 56 . Thereby, the control part 56 can open the right door 22 by outputting a door opening drive command to the door opening drive part 55 of the right door 22, for example. Similarly, the control part 56 can open the left door 21 by outputting a door opening drive command to the door opening drive part 54 of the left door 21, for example.
另外,该左门21和右门22能够使各自的打开速度不同。左门21和右门22在开门驱动部54、55的驱动下,通常将打开速度设定得缓缓变慢,由此使门不会被急剧打开。In addition, the left door 21 and the right door 22 can have different opening speeds. The left door 21 and the right door 22 are driven by the door opening driving parts 54 and 55, and the opening speed is generally set to be gradually slowed down so that the doors are not opened suddenly.
如图35所示,控制部56上连接有身高测量传感器410。该身高测量传感器410可以使用例如光耦合这样的光传感器,测量使用者的大致身高。例如、身高测量传感器410只要能够区分测量出使用者的身高值是达到上层侧的左门21和右门22的值、还是未达到的值即可。由此,控制部56能够基于身高测量传感器410测定的使用者的身高值来使上层侧的左门21与右门22的打开速度不同。As shown in FIG. 35 , a height measurement sensor 410 is connected to the control unit 56 . The height measurement sensor 410 can measure the approximate height of the user using, for example, an optical sensor such as an optical coupler. For example, the height measuring sensor 410 only needs to be able to distinguish whether the measured height value of the user has reached the left door 21 and the right door 22 on the upper floor side or has not reached the value. Accordingly, the control unit 56 can make the opening speeds of the left door 21 and the right door 22 on the upper stage side different based on the height value of the user measured by the height measurement sensor 410 .
例如、在身高测量传感器410测量出的使用者的身高值是达到上层侧的左门21和右门22的值的情况下,控制部56使开门驱动部54、55的动作进一步变慢,开门驱动部54、55使上层侧的左门21和右门22以比各自的通常打开速度进一步变缓的速度打开。For example, when the height value of the user measured by the height measurement sensor 410 reaches the value of the left door 21 and the right door 22 on the upper side, the control unit 56 further slows down the operation of the door opening drive units 54, 55 to open the door. The driving units 54 and 55 open the left door 21 and the right door 22 on the upper stage side at a speed slower than the respective normal opening speeds.
由此,可以避免左门21和右门22撞到使用者的头部或身体。此外,在身高测量传感器410测量出的使用者的身高值是未达到上层侧的左门21和右门22的值的情况下,开门驱动部54、55使上层侧的左门21和右门22各自以通常的打开速度打开。Thereby, it is possible to prevent the left door 21 and the right door 22 from colliding with the user's head or body. In addition, when the height value of the user measured by the height measurement sensor 410 is a value that does not reach the left door 21 and the right door 22 on the upper side, the door opening drive parts 54 and 55 make the left door 21 and the right door on the upper side 22 each open with a usual opening speed.
在图32或者图35所示的控制部56使用语音产生部350对使用者告知例如“将打开右门”这样的警告内容的情况下,在该使用者再一次想要确认该警告内容时,可以如下进行。当使用者说出“再一次”或者“重复”这样的重复催促内容时,语音识别传感器NS1、NS2将“再一次”或者“重复”这样的重复催促内容的语音信号发送给控制部56。控制部56通过来自语音识别传感器NS1、NS2的语音信号,使用语音产生部350至少再一次对使用者告知“将打开右门”这样的警告内容。由此,使用者即使错过冰箱侧发出的警告内容,也能够简单地再次确认。When the control unit 56 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 35 uses the voice generating unit 350 to inform the user of the warning content such as "the right door will be opened", when the user wants to confirm the warning content again, This can be done as follows. When the user utters the repetitive prompting content such as “again” or “repeat”, the voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2 send the voice signal of the repetitive prompting content such as “again” or “repeat” to the control unit 56 . The control unit 56 uses the voice generation unit 350 to notify the user at least once again of the warning content of "the right door will be opened" based on the voice signals from the voice recognition sensors NS1 and NS2. Thereby, even if a user misses the content of the warning issued from the refrigerator side, he can easily confirm again.
另外,在使用者打开上层的冷藏室的右门22而对冰箱内进行观察时,控制部56不接受例如作为其他门的左门21自动打开的操作。由此,在使用者打开右门22而对冰箱内进行观察,且使用者嘟囔着说例如“牛奶也得取出”时,能够防止放置有“牛奶”一侧的左门21错误地自动打开,能够可靠防止左门21撞到使用者的例如脸。In addition, when the user opens the right door 22 of the refrigerator compartment on the upper stage to view the interior of the refrigerator, the control unit 56 does not accept an operation to automatically open the left door 21 which is another door, for example. Thus, when the user opens the right door 22 to observe the inside of the refrigerator, and the user mutters, for example, "the milk must be taken out", the left door 21 on the side where "milk" is placed can be prevented from being automatically opened by mistake, It is possible to reliably prevent the left door 21 from hitting the user's face, for example.
同样,在使用者打开上层的冷藏室的右门22而对冰箱内进行观察时,嘟囔着说“蔬菜也得取出”时,能够防止放置有“蔬菜”的蔬菜室的门错误地自动弹出而撞到使用者的下腹部或膝盖等。Similarly, when the user opens the right door 22 of the refrigerator compartment on the upper floor and observes the inside of the refrigerator, and mumbles that "vegetables must also be taken out", the door of the vegetable compartment where the "vegetables" are placed can be prevented from automatically popping out by mistake. hit the user's lower abdomen or knees, etc.
另外,除了如上所述那样使接受无效以外,也可以设定成在某个门被开放时使其他门的开放速度比通常的速度慢。In addition, in addition to invalidating the reception as described above, it may be set so that when a certain door is opened, the opening speed of other doors is slower than the normal speed.
此外,在冰箱发出杂音(压缩机音、蜂鸣器音)时,语音识别变得无法很好地进行识别的情况下,也可以从扬声器发出“请再说一次”等对使用者的指示语音。In addition, when the refrigerator makes noise (compressor sound, buzzer sound) and voice recognition becomes difficult to recognize, an instruction voice to the user such as "Please say it again" may be emitted from the speaker.
如图35所示,控制部56上连接有接近传感器400。该接近传感器400配置于例如左门21和右门22,当使用者使手接近左门21或者右门22时,作为触摸开关的开门操作部51、52、控制操作部50使用例如LED灯等进行发光。由此,即使放置冰箱的部位是暗处,使用者也能够目视确认开门操作部51、52、控制操作部50的位置。As shown in FIG. 35 , a proximity sensor 400 is connected to the control unit 56 . The proximity sensor 400 is disposed, for example, on the left door 21 and the right door 22. When the user approaches the left door 21 or the right door 22, the door opening operation parts 51, 52 and the control operation part 50 of the touch switch use, for example, LED lamps. To glow. Thereby, even if the place where a refrigerator is placed is a dark place, a user can visually confirm the position of the opening operation part 51, 52, and the control operation part 50. FIG.
此外,可以兼具该接近传感器的功能和开门操作部51、52的功能。在该情况下,如图35所示,无需另外设置接近传感器400。In addition, the function of the proximity sensor and the functions of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may be combined. In this case, as shown in FIG. 35 , it is not necessary to separately provide a proximity sensor 400 .
图36是表示具有接近传感器的功能的开门操作部的动作例的流程图。在该情况下,如图36所示,在步骤S21中,图35的控制部56通过软件提高兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52的静电开关的灵敏度并加以保持,由此也能够维持作为接近传感器的功能。Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the door opening operation unit having the function of the proximity sensor. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 , in step S21, the control unit 56 of FIG. 35 improves and maintains the sensitivity of the electrostatic switches of the door opening operation units 51 and 52 that also serve as proximity sensors through software, thereby maintaining Function as a proximity sensor.
接下来,在图36的步骤S22中,兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52检测到使用者手指的接近时,在步骤S23中,根据控制部56的指令,兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52发光,将兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52的灵敏度降到原来状态,由此,兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52仅作为开门操作部起作用。在此,如果不降低兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52的灵敏度,则会在对兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52进行触摸输入之前感知,从而无法进行准确的输入。Next, in step S22 of FIG. 36 , when the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 serving as proximity sensors detect the approach of the user's fingers, in step S23, according to the instruction of the control part 56, the door opening operation of the proximity sensor is also performed. The parts 51, 52 emit light, and the sensitivity of the door opening operation parts 51, 52 which also serve as proximity sensors is reduced to the original state, whereby the door opening operation parts 51, 52 which also serve as proximity sensors only function as door opening operation parts. Here, if the sensitivity of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 also serving as proximity sensors is not reduced, the touch input to the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 serving as proximity sensors will be sensed before the touch input, and accurate input cannot be performed.
这样,兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52感知使用者手指的接近,兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52发光,由此,可以明确得知兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52的位置,并且可以通知使用者能够使用兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52进行输入。不需要另外设置接近传感器,因此能够减少零部件数量。In this way, the door opening operation parts 51, 52 which also serve as proximity sensors sense the approach of the user's fingers, and the door opening operation parts 51, 52 which also serve as proximity sensors emit light. 52, and the user can be notified that the door-opening operation parts 51, 52, which also serve as proximity sensors, can be used for input. There is no need to provide an additional proximity sensor, so the number of parts can be reduced.
相反,兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52发光之前,控制部56使得无法使用兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52来进行输入,不管使用者是否是无意识输入,都能够防止使用者的手指接触兼做接近传感器的开门操作部51、52时误输入。On the contrary, before the door-opening operation parts 51, 52 which also serve as proximity sensors emit light, the control part 56 makes it impossible to use the door-opening operation parts 51, 52 which also serve as proximity sensors for input, regardless of whether the user is unconsciously inputting, it is possible to prevent the user from Misinput when the finger touches double as the door-opening operation part 51,52 of proximity sensor.
第28实施方式28th Embodiment
图37是第28实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。图38是该冰箱1的开门状态的立体图。图39是该冰箱1的冷藏室部分的放大立体图。Fig. 37 is a front view of refrigerator 1 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 38 is a perspective view of the refrigerator 1 in a door-open state. FIG. 39 is an enlarged perspective view of a refrigerator compartment portion of the refrigerator 1 .
如图37和图38所示,第28实施方式的冰箱1具有作为冰箱主体的箱体11。箱体11从上层起具有:冷藏室12、蔬菜室13、能够切换冰箱内设定温度的切换室14、冷冻室15。此外,在切换室14的左侧设置有制冰室16。As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 , refrigerator 1 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment has cabinet 11 as a refrigerator main body. Housing 11 has, from the upper stage, refrigerator compartment 12 , vegetable compartment 13 , switching compartment 14 capable of switching the set temperature in the refrigerator, and freezing compartment 15 . In addition, an ice making compartment 16 is provided on the left side of the switch compartment 14 .
如图37~图39所示,为了覆盖冷藏室12的前表面开口部,左右ー对左门21、右门22分别在左端部、右端部的上下利用铰链部安装成以对开式进行开闭。As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 , in order to cover the front opening of the refrigerator compartment 12 , a pair of left and right doors 21 and 22 are installed on the left and right ends by hinges so as to open in half. close.
此外,蔬菜室13、切换室14、冷冻室15、制冰室16上分别设置有推拉式的门23、24、25、26。In addition, push-pull doors 23, 24, 25, 26 are provided on the vegetable compartment 13, the switching compartment 14, the freezing compartment 15, and the ice-making compartment 16, respectively.
而且,在蔬菜室13的背面,虽然未图示,但是配置有用于冷却冷藏室12和蔬菜室13的冷藏用蒸发器,在切换室14及冷冻室15的背面,同样虽然未图示,但是配置有用于冷却切换室14、冷冻室15、制冰室16的冷冻用蒸发器。And, on the back side of the vegetable compartment 13, although not shown, a refrigerating evaporator for cooling the refrigerating compartment 12 and the vegetable compartment 13 is arranged, and on the back side of the switch compartment 14 and the freezing compartment 15, similarly, although not shown, An evaporator for freezing for cooling the switching chamber 14, the freezing chamber 15, and the ice making chamber 16 is arranged.
而且,如图37和图38所示,在蔬菜室13的背面配置有用于控制该冰箱1的由微机构成的控制部56。And, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 , a control unit 56 composed of a microcomputer for controlling the refrigerator 1 is disposed on the back surface of the vegetable compartment 13 .
如图37所示,左门21和右门22都是以下构造:在前表面开口的扁平内板的开口部安装有着色透明的玻璃制前面板21A、22A,并且在内部空洞部配置有真空隔热材料,在未被真空隔热材料填埋的空洞部配置有聚氨酯隔热材料或者固体隔热材料。As shown in FIG. 37 , the left door 21 and the right door 22 have the following structures: colored and transparent glass front panels 21A, 22A are installed in the opening of the flat inner panel with the front surface open, and a vacuum is arranged in the internal cavity. As for the heat insulating material, a polyurethane heat insulating material or a solid heat insulating material is disposed in a cavity that is not filled with the vacuum heat insulating material.
玻璃制前面板21A、22A的着色度为在受到外光照射的状态下从外看不到前面板21A、22A的背面侧的隔热材料等填充物的浓度。并且,玻璃制前面板21A、22A的着色度还是以下浓度:在对例如控制操作部50的操作按键名、冷却功能名、冷却强度等进行透过显示的LED显示灯、对温度值等变化的数值进行透过显示的7段LED显示装置的亮灯状态下,光能够透过而从表面侧看到。The degree of coloration of the glass front panels 21A, 22A is the concentration at which the filler such as a heat insulating material on the back side of the front panels 21A, 22A cannot be seen from the outside in a state of being irradiated with external light. In addition, the degree of coloring of the glass front panels 21A and 22A is still the following concentration: for example, the LED display lamps for transparent display of the name of the operation key of the control operation part 50, the name of the cooling function, the cooling intensity, etc., and the temperature value etc. In the lighted state of the 7-segment LED display device that displays numerical values through-beam, light can pass through and be seen from the front side.
如图38所示,在左门21的右端部、即、在关闭状态下接近右门22的左端部而相对的开放侧的部分,设置有用于在门关闭状态下保持与右门22的左端部亦即开放侧的部分的密封状态的旋转隔离体31。在该旋转隔离体31的内部内置有用于防止结露的结露防止加热器。As shown in FIG. 38 , at the right end of the left door 21 , that is, in the closed state, a portion on the open side that is close to the left end of the right door 22 and opposite, is provided with a handle for holding the left end of the right door 22 in the closed state. The rotating isolator 31 is in a sealed state at the part, that is, the part on the open side. A dew condensation prevention heater for preventing dew condensation is built in the rotating isolator 31 .
在右门22的前面板22A的背面侧,设置有用于通过从前面板22A的表面进行触摸操作来对冰箱进行操作的静电电容式控制操作部50。在该控制操作部50设置有:用于检测冰箱周围的环境状态的红外线受光部、HOME按键、检测对该HOME按键的触摸并对操作按键名、冷却功能名、冷却强度等进行透过显示的LED显示灯、对温度值等变化的数值进行透过显示的7段LED显示装置等。该控制操作部50为了进行变更冰箱1的冷却控制内容的操作,配置于例如右门22。控制操作部50的HOME按键是:通过用户(使用者)以手指进行触摸,而能够指令冰箱1的控制部56进行各种操作的菜单按键。On the rear side of the front panel 22A of the right door 22, there is provided a capacitive control operation unit 50 for operating the refrigerator by touch operation from the surface of the front panel 22A. The control operation part 50 is provided with: an infrared light receiving part for detecting the environmental state around the refrigerator, a HOME button, and a device for detecting the touch of the HOME button and transparently displaying the name of the operation button, the name of the cooling function, the cooling intensity, etc. LED display lamps, 7-segment LED display devices that transparently display changing values such as temperature values, etc. The control operation unit 50 is arranged, for example, on the right door 22 in order to perform an operation to change the cooling control content of the refrigerator 1 . The HOME button of the control operation unit 50 is a menu button that can instruct the control unit 56 of the refrigerator 1 to perform various operations when the user (user) touches it with a finger.
如图37所示,在左门21的前面板21A和右门22的前面板22A的下边附近的背面侧,沿着左右横向分别设置有细长的开门操作部51、52。开门操作部51、52也称为门的开门按键。在前面板21A、22A的表面,设置有表示开门操作方向的开门操作显示部51B、52B。在左门21的开门操作显示部51B上设置有朝左的箭头标记,该朝左的箭头标记认知用户以手指在触摸的状态下向左方滑动来进行开门操作。在右门22的开门操作显示部52B上设置有朝右的箭头标记,该朝右的箭头标记认知用户以手指在触摸的状态下向右方滑动来进行开门操作。As shown in FIG. 37 , on the back sides near the lower sides of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 and the front panel 22A of the right door 22 , elongated door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are respectively provided along the left and right lateral directions. The door opening operation parts 51 and 52 are also referred to as door opening buttons. On the surfaces of the front panels 21A and 22A, door opening operation display sections 51B and 52B that indicate the direction of the door opening operation are provided. A leftward arrow mark is provided on the door opening operation display portion 51B of the left door 21 , and the leftward arrow mark recognizes that the user performs the door opening operation by sliding the finger to the left while touching it. The door opening operation display part 52B of the right door 22 is provided with a rightward arrow mark that recognizes that the user slides the finger to the right while touching the door to perform the door opening operation.
如图37和图38所示,开门驱动部54、55分别设置于箱体11的顶板上表面前端附近的左右2个部位的位置、即与左门21和右门22的上边开放侧端部附近对应的位置。As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 , the door-opening drive parts 54 and 55 are respectively arranged at two positions on the left and right near the front end of the upper surface of the top plate of the box body 11, that is, at the upper opening side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22. nearby corresponding locations.
这些开门驱动部54、55通过利用电磁铁将动铁芯54B、55B向前方推出,能够将左门21和右门22的开放侧端部附近的上边向前方推出,使左门21和右门22分别自动开放。为了使左门21开门,在触摸左门开门操作显示部51B的右端或者右端附近的箭头标记的状态下使手指向左方滑动时,开门操作部51感知其连续的触摸,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56。之后,如果控制部56判断为是开门操作指令,则使左门21的开门驱动部54动作,从而能够使左门21自动开门。These door-opening driving parts 54, 55 push out the moving iron cores 54B, 55B forward by utilizing electromagnets, and can push out the upper edges near the opening side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22 forward, so that the left door 21 and the right door can be pushed forward. 22 are automatically opened respectively. In order to open the left door 21, when the finger slides to the left while touching the right end of the left door opening operation display part 51B or the arrow mark near the right end, the door opening operation part 51 senses the continuous touch and sends a touch detection signal sent to the control unit 56. Thereafter, when the control unit 56 determines that it is a door opening operation command, it operates the door opening drive unit 54 of the left door 21 to automatically open the left door 21 .
同样,为了使右门22开门,在触摸右门开门操作显示部52B的左端或者左端附近的箭头标记的状态下使手指向右方滑动时,开门操作部52感知其连续的触摸,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56。然后,如果控制部56判断为是开门操作指令,则使右门22的开门驱动部55动作,从而能够使右门22自动开门。Similarly, in order to open the right door 22, when the finger slides to the right while touching the left end of the right door opening operation display part 52B or the arrow mark near the left end, the door opening operation part 52 senses the continuous touch, and the touch The detection signal is sent to the control unit 56 . Then, when the control unit 56 determines that it is a door opening operation command, it operates the door opening driving unit 55 of the right door 22 to automatically open the right door 22 .
如图37所示,用于进行变更冰箱1的冷却控制内容的操作的控制操作部50设置于例如右门12,通过用户操作该控制操作部50,变更冰箱1的冷却控制内容。As shown in FIG. 37 , a control operation unit 50 for changing the cooling control content of the refrigerator 1 is provided, for example, on the right door 12 , and the user operates the control operation unit 50 to change the cooling control content of the refrigerator 1 .
对于右门12而言,开门操作部52配置于控制操作部50的下方,并且开门操作部52不是配置于该控制操作部50的正下方的位置,而是配置于相对于控制操作部50在左右方向错开的位置。换而言之,对于右门22而言,在具有菜单按键的控制操作部50的下方的位置配置有开门操作部52,但是,该开门操作部52相对于具有菜单按键的控制操作部50的位置,沿着箭头QR方向向右方错开而配置于不同的位置。For the right door 12, the door opening operation part 52 is arranged below the control operation part 50, and the door opening operation part 52 is not arranged directly below the control operation part 50, but is arranged at a position opposite to the control operation part 50. Positions staggered left and right. In other words, for the right door 22, the door opening operation part 52 is disposed below the control operation part 50 with the menu button, but the door opening operation part 52 is relatively different from the control operation part 50 with the menu button. The positions are shifted to the right along the arrow QR direction and arranged in different positions.
由此,在用户以手指触摸控制操作部50的菜单按键的情况下,即使用户的手指是被水沾湿的状态,且该水从手指滴落,从手指滴落的水也不会附着于开门操作部52。因此,静电触摸式的开门操作部52不会因从手指滴落的水而产生反应,能够防止:无论用户用手指触摸与否,开门操作部52乱反应而导致控制部56使右门22的开门驱动部55动作这样的误动作。因此,能够可靠防止使门22胡乱自动开门。Thus, when the user touches the menu button of the control operation unit 50 with a finger, even if the user's finger is wet with water and the water drips from the finger, the water dripped from the finger will not adhere to the surface. The door opening operation part 52. Therefore, the electrostatic touch-type door opening operation part 52 will not react due to the water dripping from the finger, and it can be prevented that the control part 56 will cause the control part 56 to make the right door 22 open regardless of whether the user touches it with the finger or not. The door-opening drive unit 55 operates such a malfunction. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the door 22 from being automatically opened indiscriminately.
另外,通过按压控制操作部50的菜单按键(菜单键),有时控制操作部50的其他操作按键发光而使得该操作按键的操作有效。即使在这种情况下,由于开门操作部52(开门开关)相对于控制操作部50处于不同部位(错开的位置),因此,即使用户以手指接触了控制操作部50的因发光而使得操作有效的其他操作按键,从手指滴落的水也不会附着于开门操作部52。因此,能够可靠地防止门22胡乱自动开门。In addition, when a menu key (menu key) of the control operation unit 50 is pressed, other operation keys of the control operation unit 50 may emit light to enable the operation of the operation key. Even in this case, since the door-opening operation part 52 (door-opening switch) is in a different position (staggered position) relative to the control operation part 50, even if the user touches the control operation part 50 with a finger, the operation is effective due to light emission. Water dripping from fingers does not adhere to the door-opening operation part 52 for other operation buttons. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the door 22 from being automatically opened indiscriminately.
此外,当仅使开门操作部52和控制操作部50的菜单按键(菜单键)印刷于玻璃制前面板22A,而控制操作部50的除了菜单按键之外的其他要素采用通过LED亮灯而上浮的构成时,冰箱1的右门22的外观会变得很清晰。In addition, when only the menu buttons (menu keys) of the door opening operation part 52 and the control operation part 50 are printed on the glass front panel 22A, and other elements of the control operation part 50 except the menu keys are adopted to be turned on by LED lighting. The appearance of the right door 22 of the refrigerator 1 becomes clear when the structure of the refrigerator 1 is configured.
而且,第28实施方式的冰箱的控制部56进行的冷却控制是一般的控制,并没有特殊限制,但是,例如、压缩机、操作面板、结露防止加热器、制冰室内部的制冰装置、冷藏室风扇、冷冻室风扇、除霜加热器与该控制部56连接而被控制。In addition, the cooling control performed by the control unit 56 of the refrigerator of the twenty-eighth embodiment is general control and is not particularly limited. , a refrigerating room fan, a freezing room fan, and a defrosting heater are connected to the control unit 56 to be controlled.
图37和图39所示的开门操作显示部51B、52B的箭头标记不限于该显示,只要是能够容易认知如果触摸该处并向右方或者左方滑动,则进行开门操作的显示的话,那么标记的形状、形态是没有限定的。The arrow marks on the door-opening operation display parts 51B and 52B shown in FIGS. 37 and 39 are not limited to this display, as long as they can be easily recognized that if they are touched and slid to the right or left, the door-opening operation will be performed. Then, the shape and form of the mark are not limited.
如图37所示,在左门21和右门22上设置有把手61、62。把手61、62设置于开门操作显示部51B、52B的下侧的下端面部分,通过使手掌朝上而把手指插入把手61、62,并向面前侧拉动的操作,能够对左门21、右门22个别进行手动开门。As shown in FIG. 37 , handles 61 and 62 are provided on the left door 21 and the right door 22 . The handles 61, 62 are provided on the lower end surface portions of the door opening operation display parts 51B, 52B, and the left door 21, the right The doors 22 are individually opened manually.
接下来,对第28实施方式的冰箱的自动开门动作进行说明。Next, an automatic door opening operation of the refrigerator according to the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described.
图40是冰箱1的开门控制的框图。如图40所示,开门操作部51、52分别具有开门操作显示部51B、52B。开门操作显示部51B、52B沿着其左右横向分别具有排列5个的箭头标记。开门操作显示部51B、52B上分别设置有静电电容式触摸传感器51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5。这些静电电容式触摸传感器51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5设定成分别检测由用户的触摸导致的静电电容变化,并将触摸检测信号发送给控制部56。FIG. 40 is a block diagram of door opening control of the refrigerator 1 . As shown in FIG. 40, the opening operation parts 51 and 52 have the opening operation display parts 51B and 52B, respectively. The door opening operation display parts 51B and 52B each have five arrow marks arranged in a row along the left and right lateral directions. Capacitive touch sensors 51 - 1 to 51 - 5 , 52 - 1 to 52 - 5 are provided on the door opening operation display parts 51B and 52B, respectively. These capacitive touch sensors 51 - 1 to 51 - 5 , 52 - 1 to 52 - 5 are set to detect changes in capacitance caused by a user's touch, respectively, and to send touch detection signals to the control unit 56 .
因此,当用户要打开右门22而在开门操作显示部52B部分用手指触摸左端的箭头标记,并在触摸的状态下使该手指向右方滑动时,静电电容式触摸传感器52-1~52-5中的检测出静电电容变化的传感器将触摸检测信号按照触摸的顺序发送给控制部56。于是,控制部56判断是否是开门操作,如果判断为是正规的开门操作,则对右门的开门驱动部55输出开门驱动信号而使右门22自动开门。此外,在左门21的开门操作的情况下,针对在触摸左门21的开门操作显示部51B的右端或者右端附近的箭头标记的状态下使手指向左方滑动的操作,控制部56同样判断左门21的开门操作。Therefore, when the user wants to open the right door 22 and touches the arrow mark on the left end with a finger on the door opening operation display portion 52B, and slides the finger to the right while touching, the capacitive touch sensors 52-1 to 52 The sensor in - 5 that detects a change in electrostatic capacitance transmits touch detection signals to the control unit 56 in the order of touch. Then, the control unit 56 determines whether it is a door opening operation, and if it is determined to be a normal door opening operation, it outputs a door opening drive signal to the door opening drive unit 55 of the right door to automatically open the right door 22 . In addition, in the case of the door opening operation of the left door 21, the control unit 56 similarly judges the operation of sliding the finger to the left while touching the right end of the door opening operation display part 51B of the left door 21 or the arrow mark near the right end. Door opening operation of the left door 21.
图41示出了以下例子:图37~图39所示的左门21的开门操作部51和右门22的开门操作部52作为用于检测冰箱1的用户的人体的人体检测机构起作用。41 shows an example in which the door opening operation part 51 of the left door 21 and the door opening operation part 52 of the right door 22 shown in FIGS.
该开门操作部51和开门操作部52检测到用户的人体后,向控制部56发送人体检测信号。由此,控制部56使来自开门操作部51的操作信号的输入有效,进行相应的左门21的开门控制,并使来自开门操作部52的操作信号的输入有效,进行相应的右门22的开门控制。The door opening operation unit 51 and the door opening operation unit 52 transmit a human body detection signal to the control unit 56 after detecting the user's human body. Thus, the control unit 56 enables the input of the operation signal from the door opening operation unit 51 to perform the corresponding door opening control of the left door 21, and enables the input of the operation signal from the door opening operation unit 52 to perform the corresponding opening control of the right door 22. Door opening control.
在以例如作为人体检测机构的开门操作部52为例的情况下,控制部56在开门操作部52检测到用户的人体后,开启开门操作部52的显示。控制部56能够根据右门22的开门操作的方式切换通过开门操作部52亮灯而进行的显示。For example, in the case of the door opening operation unit 52 as a human body detection mechanism, the control unit 56 turns on the display of the door opening operation unit 52 after the door opening operation unit 52 detects the user's human body. The control unit 56 can switch the display by lighting the door opening operation unit 52 according to the manner of the door opening operation of the right door 22 .
作为人体检测机构的开门操作部52如已经说明的那样,是静电开关,静电开关进行用户的人体的检测时,控制部56能够通过切换而提高静电开关的灵敏度来实施检测。作为人体检测机构的开门操作部52是:人体接近时将其检测出来的接近传感器,控制部56切换作为该接近传感器的开门操作部52的灵敏度,使开门操作部52作为接触传感器起作用,并使右门22的开门操作有效,同时,在检测到用户用手指接触了作为接触传感器的开门操作部52时,控制部56实际进行右门22的开门操作。As already described, the door opening operation unit 52 as the human body detection mechanism is an electrostatic switch. When the electrostatic switch detects the user's human body, the control unit 56 can perform detection by switching to increase the sensitivity of the electrostatic switch. The door-opening operation portion 52 as the human body detection mechanism is: a proximity sensor that detects it when the human body approaches, and the control portion 56 switches the sensitivity of the door-opening operation portion 52 as the proximity sensor, so that the door-opening operation portion 52 functions as a contact sensor, and While validating the opening operation of the right door 22, the control unit 56 actually performs the opening operation of the right door 22 when it is detected that the user touches the door opening operation portion 52 as a touch sensor with a finger.
如上所述,通过切换开门操作部52的灵敏度,使开门操作部52从接近传感器作为接触传感器起作用,以下参照图41的例子对此进行更具体的说明。As described above, by switching the sensitivity of the door opening operation part 52, the door opening operation part 52 functions as a contact sensor instead of a proximity sensor. This will be described in more detail below with reference to an example in FIG. 41 .
图41(a)中,控制部56为了使作为静电开关的开门操作部52作为“接近传感器”起作用,控制部56通过将开门操作部52的灵敏度设定为“高”,作为“接近传感器”的功能“有效”。因此,控制部56使开门操作部52的作为本来功能的右门22的打开(开门操作)“无效”。并且,控制部56使得开门操作部52的亮灯显示如虚线所示的那样为关闭状态。In Fig. 41 (a), in order to make the door opening operation part 52 as an electrostatic switch function as a "proximity sensor", the control part 56 acts as a "proximity sensor" by setting the sensitivity of the door opening operation part 52 to "high". " function "valid". Therefore, the control unit 56 “invalidates” the opening (door opening operation) of the right door 22 which is the original function of the door opening operation unit 52 . And the control part 56 makes the lighting display of the door opening operation part 52 into an OFF state as shown by a dotted line.
接下来,在图41(b)中,当用户使手指HT接近作为“接近传感器”的开门操作部52时,开门操作部52作为“接近传感器”起作用来检测手的接近。开门操作部52检测到手的接近时,控制部56以从“高”切换为“低”的方式来设定开门操作部52的作为“接近传感器”的灵敏度。因此,控制部56使开门操作部52起到作为本来功能的“接触传感器”的作用,因此,通过手指接触开门操作部52而进行的右门22的打开操作(开门操作)“有效”。并且,控制部56使得开门操作部52的亮灯显示如实线所示的那样,从关闭状态变成开启状态,通过例如LED使开门操作部52亮灯。Next, in FIG. 41( b ), when the user brings the finger HT close to the door opening operation part 52 as the "proximity sensor", the door opening operation part 52 functions as the "proximity sensor" to detect the approach of the hand. When the door opening operation part 52 detects the approach of a hand, the control part 56 sets the sensitivity as a "proximity sensor" of the door opening operation part 52 so that it may switch from "high" to "low". Therefore, the control unit 56 makes the door opening operation unit 52 function as a “touch sensor” which is an original function, and therefore, the opening operation (door opening operation) of the right door 22 by touching the door opening operation unit 52 with a finger is “valid”. And the control part 56 changes the lighting display of the door opening operation part 52 from a closed state to an open state as shown by a solid line, and lights up the door opening operation part 52 by LED, for example.
接着,在图41(c)中,当用户使手指HT直接接触(触摸)作为“接触传感器”的开门操作部52时,控制部56维持开门操作部52的作为“接触传感器”的灵敏度亦即“低”的状态,直接作为“接触传感器”起作用。然后,控制部56使得开门操作部52的作为本来功能的右门22的打开(开门操作)维持“有效”。并且,控制部56使得开门操作部52的亮灯显示如实现所示的那样,为开启状态,通过例如LED使开门操作部52亮灯。Next, in FIG. 41( c), when the user makes the finger HT directly touch (touch) the door opening operation part 52 as the "touch sensor", the control part 56 maintains the sensitivity of the door opening operation part 52 as the "touch sensor", that is, The "low" state acts as a "touch sensor" directly. Then, the control unit 56 keeps the opening (door opening operation) of the right door 22 which is the original function of the door opening operation unit 52 “valid”. And the control part 56 makes the lighting display of the door-opening operation part 52 into an open state as shown in realization, and lights up the door-opening operation part 52 by LED, for example.
之后,在图41(d)中,当控制部56识别出用户的手指HT脱离了直接接触(触摸)作为“接触传感器(触摸传感器)起作用的开门操作部52的状态时,控制部56使来自开门操作部52的操作信号的输入有效,使开门驱动部55动作,由此,进行相应的右门22的开门控制。由此,右门22能够自动打开。Afterwards, in FIG. 41( d), when the control unit 56 recognizes that the user's finger HT is out of the state of directly contacting (touching) the door opening operation unit 52 functioning as a “touch sensor (touch sensor), the control unit 56 makes The input of the operation signal from the door opening operation part 52 becomes effective, and the door opening driving part 55 is operated, thereby performing corresponding door opening control of the right door 22. Thereby, the right door 22 can be opened automatically.
由此,在用户去直接接触(触摸)开门操作部52的动作途中的状态下,例如用户想要接近冰箱1的状态下,为了防止开门指示的误检测,控制部56能够判断直接接触(触摸)的有效、无效。Thus, in the state where the user directly touches (touches) the door opening operation part 52, for example, when the user wants to approach the refrigerator 1, in order to prevent false detection of the door opening instruction, the control part 56 can judge that the direct contact (touch) ) is valid or invalid.
此外,开门操作部52的亮灯显示如实线所示的那样为开启状态,能够通过例如LED来使开门操作部52亮灯,因此,对于用户而言,能够提高由例如开门操作部52的LED亮灯显示所带来的开门操作部52的识别性。In addition, the lighting display of the door-opening operation part 52 is an open state as shown by the solid line, and the door-opening operation part 52 can be turned on by, for example, an LED. Visibility of the door opening operation part 52 by lighting display.
另外,当控制部56识别到用户的手指HT脱离了直接接触(触摸)作为“接触传感器(触摸传感器)起作用的开门操作部52的状态时,控制部56使来自开门操作部52的操作信号的输入有效,进行相应的右门22的开门控制。据此,在用户的手脱离右门22的开门操作部52后,右门22实际打开,因此,能够防止右门22的打开动作戳伤用户手指。In addition, when the control unit 56 recognizes that the user's finger HT is out of the state of directly contacting (touching) the door opening operation unit 52 functioning as a “touch sensor (touch sensor), the control unit 56 makes the operation signal from the door opening operation unit 52 The input of the right door 22 is effective, and the corresponding door opening control of the right door 22 is carried out. Accordingly, after the user's hand is separated from the door opening operation part 52 of the right door 22, the right door 22 is actually opened, so the opening action of the right door 22 can prevent injury. user finger.
作为开门操作部51、52亮灯显示的方法,只要配置能够从例如图40所示的静电电容式触摸传感器(电极)51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5的间隙向前方进行显示这样的LED(发光二极管)等发光元件即可。而且,也可以使静电电容式触摸传感器(电极)51-1~51-5、52-1~52-5中形成文字、标记等的去除部分,发光元件的光从电极的背面通过去除部分向前方照射。或者,也可以使用导光板来使发光元件的光从电极的背面向前方照射。As a method of lighting and displaying the door opening operation parts 51 and 52, it is only necessary to arrange them forward from the gaps of the capacitive touch sensors (electrodes) 51-1 to 51-5, 52-1 to 52-5 shown in FIG. 40, for example. Light emitting elements such as LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) for performing display may be used. Moreover, it is also possible to form the removed parts of characters, marks, etc. in the electrostatic capacitive touch sensors (electrodes) 51-1 to 51-5, 52-1 to 52-5, and the light of the light-emitting element passes through the removed parts from the back surface of the electrodes to the surface. front light. Alternatively, light from the light-emitting element may be irradiated forward from the back surface of the electrode using a light guide plate.
在图41中,所说明的右门22的打开动作也可以与以下的左门21的打开动作同样地来进行,该左门21使用图37的配置于左门21的开门操作部51。The opening operation of the right door 22 described in FIG. 41 can also be performed in the same manner as the following opening operation of the left door 21 using the door opening operation unit 51 arranged on the left door 21 of FIG. 37 .
对于左右的开门操作部51、52而言,左右的开门操作部51、52的亮灯显示的颜色可以是相同颜色,也可以是不同颜色。The colors of the lighting displays of the left and right door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may be the same color or may be different colors.
也可以是针对左门21、右门22缓缓打开时和快速打开时,左右的开门操作部51、52的亮灯显示的颜色显示为不同颜色。When the left door 21 and the right door 22 are slowly opened and when they are opened quickly, the colors of the lighting displays of the left and right door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may be displayed in different colors.
也可以针对仅左门21和右门22中的一方打开时、与左门21和右门22同时打开时,改变左右的开门操作部51、52的亮灯显示的颜色。特别是,也可以在采用用户仅操作开门操作部51、52中的一方来打开左门21和右门22双方的方式的情况下,与仅左门21和右门22中的一方打开的情况不同,采用不同的显示颜色。When only one of the left door 21 and the right door 22 is opened, or when the left door 21 and the right door 22 are opened simultaneously, the colors of the lighting displays of the left and right door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may be changed. In particular, in the case where the user operates only one of the door opening operation parts 51, 52 to open both the left door 21 and the right door 22, it may be different from the case where only one of the left door 21 and the right door 22 is opened. Different, using a different display color.
在该情况下,在使例如开门操作部51、52的灵敏度为“高”而使开门操作部51、52作为“接近传感器”起作用时,在检测到人体接近了规定时间以上时,可以改变方式,使得左门21和右门22同时打开,而不只是仅使左门21和右门22中的一方打开。此外,在改变方式,使得左门21和右门22同时打开时,可以同时使开门操作部51、52进行亮灯显示,或者使开门操作部51、52的颜色不同。开门操作部51、52闪烁显示等开门操作部51、52的亮灯方法可以任意改变。In this case, for example, when the sensitivity of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 is set to "high" to make the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 function as "proximity sensors", when it is detected that the human body has approached for a predetermined time or more, the Way, make left door 21 and right door 22 open simultaneously, not just only make one side in left door 21 and right door 22 open. In addition, when the mode is changed so that the left door 21 and the right door 22 are opened simultaneously, the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may be lit and displayed at the same time, or the colors of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may be different. The lighting method of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 such as the blinking display of the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 can be changed arbitrarily.
在第28实施方式的冰箱1中,能够防止在用户(使用者)进行触摸动作的途中出现误检测,使得不产生开门的误动作。In the refrigerator 1 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection during the touch operation by the user (user), so that the erroneous operation of opening the door does not occur.
第29实施方式29th Embodiment
图42是表示第29实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。图43是图42所示的冰箱1的包含人体检测机构的开门控制的框图。Fig. 42 is a front view showing refrigerator 1 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment. Fig. 43 is a block diagram of door opening control including a human body detection mechanism of the refrigerator 1 shown in Fig. 42 .
人体检测机构500具有:例如远程检测传感器100、以及还起到接近传感器的作用的开门操作部52。远程检测传感器100、以及还起到接近传感器的作用的开门操作部52配置于例如右门22。远程检测传感器100位于还起到接近传感器的作用的开门操作部52的上部。The human body detection mechanism 500 has, for example, the remote detection sensor 100 and the door opening operation part 52 which also functions as a proximity sensor. The remote detection sensor 100 and the door opening operation part 52 which also functions as a proximity sensor are arranged on the right door 22, for example. The remote detection sensor 100 is located on the upper part of the door opening operation part 52 which also functions as a proximity sensor.
在远程检测传感器100在用户的人体处于离冰箱1较远的部位的情况下,是用于检测人体的例如红外线传感器。而还起到接近传感器的作用的开门操作部52在用户的人体接近冰箱1的情况下是检测人体的静电检测传感器。The remote detection sensor 100 is, for example, an infrared sensor for detecting a human body when the user's human body is located far from the refrigerator 1 . And the door opening operation part 52 which also functions as a proximity sensor is a static electricity detection sensor which detects a human body when a user's human body approaches the refrigerator 1. As shown in FIG.
如图43所示,远程检测传感器100和还起到接近传感器(静电检测传感器)的作用的开门操作部52连接于控制部56。控制部56上优选连接有切换机构104。通过用户操作该切换机构104,从切换机构104向控制部56发送选择信号,由此,为了检测人体,用户可以选择采用远程检测传感器100和还起到接近传感器(静电检测传感器)的作用的开门操作部52中的任意一方来检测人体。As shown in FIG. 43, the remote detection sensor 100 and the door opening operation part 52 which also functions as a proximity sensor (static detection sensor) are connected to the control part 56. As shown in FIG. The switching mechanism 104 is preferably connected to the control unit 56 . The switching mechanism 104 is operated by the user, and a selection signal is sent from the switching mechanism 104 to the control unit 56. Thus, in order to detect a human body, the user can choose to use the remote detection sensor 100 and the door opening function that also functions as a proximity sensor (static detection sensor). Any one of the operation parts 52 is used to detect the human body.
此外,如图43所示,还起到接近传感器的作用的开门操作部52虽然是静电检测传感器,但是,也可以具有任意改变该静电检测传感器的灵敏度来进行调整的灵敏度调整机构199。灵敏度调整机构199连接于控制部56,通过用户操作灵敏度调整机构199,将灵敏度调整信号发送给控制部56。由此,控制部56能够在“高”到“低”之间调整作为静电检测传感器的开门操作部52的灵敏度。In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, although the opening operation part 52 which also functions as a proximity sensor is a static electricity detection sensor, it may have the sensitivity adjustment mechanism 199 which changes and adjusts the sensitivity of this static electricity detection sensor arbitrarily. The sensitivity adjustment mechanism 199 is connected to the control unit 56 , and a sensitivity adjustment signal is sent to the control unit 56 when the user operates the sensitivity adjustment mechanism 199 . Thereby, the control part 56 can adjust the sensitivity of the door opening operation part 52 which is a static electricity detection sensor from "high" to "low".
作为改变作为静电检测传感器的开门操作部52的灵敏度的方法,静电检测传感器具有反复进行静电电容(电容器电容)的充放电例如1秒钟几十次的循环。利用了通过用户使手指接近或者接触作为静电检测传感器的开门操作部52而使得电容器电容发生改变。由此,当用户使手指接近或者接触开门操作部52时,充放电的循环发生变化。控制部56检测充放电循环的的变化程度,通过预先设定阈值而将该阈值作为基准,控制部56能够判断用户是否使手指接近或者接触了开门操作部52。As a method of changing the sensitivity of the door opening operation part 52 which is a static electricity detection sensor, the static electricity detection sensor has a cycle in which charge and discharge of electrostatic capacitance (capacitor capacitance) are repeated, for example, tens of times per second. It utilizes that the capacitance of the capacitor changes when the user brings his finger close to or touches the door opening operation portion 52 as the static electricity detection sensor. Accordingly, when the user brings a finger close to or touches the door-opening operation portion 52 , the charge-discharge cycle changes. The control unit 56 detects the degree of change in the charge-discharge cycle, and by setting a threshold in advance as a reference, the control unit 56 can determine whether the user approaches or touches the door opening operation unit 52 with a finger.
此外,在检测用户使手指脱离了开门操作部52时的情况下,控制部56也能够通过判断从充放电的循环发生变化时返回到了通常状态来进行。In addition, when detecting that the user has released the finger from the door-opening operation part 52, the control part 56 can also perform it by judging that it returns to a normal state from the time of the charge-discharge cycle change.
如上所述,用户能够变更调整作为静电检测传感器的开门操作部52的灵敏度。如果将冰箱1设置于例如厨房的水槽的背面侧,则当用户处于水槽附近时,远程检测传感器100将始终检测出人体。在这种情况下,通过用户操作该切换机构104,从切换机构104向控制部56发送选择信号,能够选择还起到接近传感器的作用的开门操作部52作为人体的检测机构,而不是远程检测传感器100。由此,仅是用户处于水槽附近时,开门操作部52不检测人体。而且,仅在用户的手指接近了作为冰箱1的接近检测传感器起作用的开门操作部52的情况下,开门操作部52能够检测出人体。由此,能够防止用户离冰箱1比较远的情况下的误检测。As mentioned above, a user can change and adjust the sensitivity of the door opening operation part 52 which is a static electricity detection sensor. If the refrigerator 1 is installed behind a kitchen sink, for example, the remote detection sensor 100 will always detect a human body when the user is near the sink. In this case, by the user operating the switching mechanism 104, a selection signal is sent from the switching mechanism 104 to the control portion 56, and the door opening operation portion 52, which also functions as a proximity sensor, can be selected as a human body detection mechanism instead of remote detection. sensor 100. Thereby, only when the user is near the water tank, the door opening operation part 52 does not detect a human body. Furthermore, only when the user's finger approaches door-opening operation portion 52 functioning as an approach sensor of refrigerator 1 , door-opening operation portion 52 can detect a human body. Thereby, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection when the user is relatively far away from refrigerator 1 .
由于使用远程检测传感器100,因此,在图42所示的玻璃前面板22A的背面,作为印刷着色,可以采用透过红外线的印刷,或者在玻璃前面板22A的背面的透过红外线的部位不进行印刷。Since the remote detection sensor 100 is used, on the back of the glass front panel 22A shown in FIG. print.
第29实施方式的冰箱1能够防止在用户(使用者)进行触摸的动作途中误检测,能够不产生开门的误动作。The refrigerator 1 of the twenty-ninth embodiment can prevent erroneous detection in the middle of a user's (user) touch operation, and can prevent erroneous operation of opening the door.
在配置于冰箱1的顶板的壳体上具有语音识别机构,该壳体上具有供语音传播的孔。控制基板的壳体配置成与螺线管的壳体的高度相同,或者在其以下。控制基板配置于顶壁的后部呈现凹的部位,基板的支撑部被埋设于聚氨酯内。螺线管也被埋于其中。将真空隔热材料弯折并与埋设的部件隔开距离配置,配置成覆盖螺线管的下侧和基板的下侧,弯折后覆盖整体。此外,顶部照明配置成埋设于顶部的聚氨酯凹部。真空隔热材料与顶部照明隔开距离配置。A speech recognition mechanism is provided on a case disposed on the top plate of the refrigerator 1, and a hole for speech transmission is provided on the case. The housing of the control board is disposed at the same height as the housing of the solenoid or below it. The control board is placed in the recessed part of the rear part of the top wall, and the support part of the board is buried in polyurethane. The solenoid is also buried in it. The vacuum heat insulating material is bent and arranged at a distance from the embedded parts, arranged to cover the underside of the solenoid and the underside of the substrate, and covers the whole after being bent. In addition, the top lighting is configured as a urethane recess buried in the top. Vacuum insulation is placed at a distance from overhead lighting.
真空隔热材料与顶部的内壁接触配置,LED配置于顶壁之外。而且,配置于内壁弯折部的部位。The vacuum heat insulating material is arranged in contact with the inner wall of the top, and the LED is arranged outside the top wall. And, it is arranged at the position of the bent portion of the inner wall.
真空隔热材料被分割开,配置于螺线管、基板之下,发生重叠。LED与真空隔热材料具有间隔,基板下的真空隔热材料与内壁接触。The vacuum insulation material is divided and arranged under the solenoid and the substrate so as to overlap. There is a gap between the LED and the vacuum heat insulating material, and the vacuum heat insulating material under the substrate is in contact with the inner wall.
顶壁的弯折部是倾斜的,将LED埋设于倾斜部,并且不与真空隔热材料接触。The bent portion of the top wall is inclined, and the LED is embedded in the inclined portion without being in contact with the vacuum heat insulating material.
图44是表示具有上述构造的冰箱1的上部的沿前后方向的截面图。Fig. 44 is a cross-sectional view in the front-rear direction showing the upper portion of the refrigerator 1 having the above-described configuration.
如图44所示,在箱体(主体)11的顶部11A配置有壳体700。在顶部11A的后部分11B设置有凹部分1lC,壳体700配置于该凹部分11C。壳体700具有例如长方体形状,在该壳体700的内部空间倾斜地配置有控制基板710。控制基板710以控制基板710的前侧比后侧朝上的方式倾斜地配置。在控制基板710的前侧搭载有语音识别机构720。As shown in FIG. 44 , a case 700 is disposed on the top 11A of the box (main body) 11 . A concave portion 11C is provided in the rear portion 11B of the top portion 11A, and the housing 700 is disposed in the concave portion 11C. The housing 700 has, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the control board 710 is arranged obliquely in the inner space of the housing 700 . The control board 710 is arranged obliquely so that the front side of the control board 710 is directed upwards rather than the rear side. A voice recognition mechanism 720 is mounted on the front side of the control board 710 .
作为语音识别机构720,是例如麦克风。该壳体700的前侧部分具有孔700H,以使语音传播到语音识别机构720。由此,无论语音识别机构720配置于壳体700内与否,例如使用者发出的语音也能够通过壳体700的孔700H可靠地传播到语音识别机构720,因此,能够识别使用者的语音、声音。The voice recognition means 720 is, for example, a microphone. The front portion of the housing 700 has a hole 700H to allow speech to propagate to the speech recognition mechanism 720 . Thus, no matter whether the voice recognition mechanism 720 is arranged in the casing 700 or not, for example, the voice uttered by the user can be reliably transmitted to the voice recognition mechanism 720 through the hole 700H of the casing 700. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the user's voice, sound.
如图44所示,在顶部11A的前侧设置有开门驱动部54(55)。该开门驱动部54(55)优选是螺线管,开门驱动部54(55)分别具有壳体762和能够自由伸缩的杆761。开门驱动部54(55)驱动而使该杆761伸出,由此,该开门驱动部54(55)推压左门21(或者右门22)的内侧而使之打开。As shown in FIG. 44, the door opening drive part 54 (55) is provided in the front side of 11 A of ceilings. This door-opening drive part 54 (55) is preferably a solenoid, and the door-opening drive part 54 (55) has a housing 762 and a freely expandable rod 761, respectively. The door-opening drive unit 54 (55) is driven to extend the rod 761, whereby the door-opening drive unit 54 (55) presses the inside of the left door 21 (or the right door 22) to open it.
壳体700的高度与开门驱动部54(55)的壳体762的高度相同,或者壳体700的高度与开门驱动部54(55)的壳体762的高度相比,低高度差DF。由此,即使将壳体700配置于顶部11A,冰箱的整个高度也不会高于开门驱动部54(55)的壳体762。The height of the housing 700 is the same as the height of the housing 762 of the door-opening driving part 54 (55), or the height of the housing 700 is lower than the height of the housing 762 of the door-opening driving part 54 (55) by a height difference DF. Thereby, even if casing 700 is arrange|positioned at 11 A of ceilings, the whole height of a refrigerator will not be higher than casing 762 of door-opening drive part 54 (55).
如图44所示,控制基板710具有多个支撑部711,通过使用该支撑部711以倾斜状态埋设于聚氨酯等隔热材料730内而被支撑。由此,控制基板710利用隔热材料730以不能活动的方式被支撑。此外,开门驱动部54(55)具有多个支撑部763,通过使用该支撑部763埋设于隔热材料730内而被支撑。由此,开门驱动部54(55)利用隔热材料730而以不能活动的方式被支撑。As shown in FIG. 44 , the control board 710 has a plurality of support portions 711 , and is supported by embedding in a heat insulating material 730 such as polyurethane in an inclined state using the support portions 711 . Accordingly, the control board 710 is supported in a non-movable manner by the heat insulating material 730 . Moreover, the door-opening drive part 54 (55) has some support part 763, and is supported by embedding in the heat insulating material 730 using this support part 763. Thereby, the door-opening drive part 54 (55) is supported so that it cannot move by the heat insulating material 730. As shown in FIG.
如图44所示,在顶部11A的内侧重叠地配置有聚氨酯等隔热材料730和真空隔热材料740。真空隔热材料740位于隔热材料730的下侧,配置成真空隔热材料740的途中部分弯折成大致直角。这样,由于真空隔热材料740的途中部分以弯折成大致直角的方式配置,因此,真空隔热材料740可以配置成覆盖开门驱动部54(55)的下侧区域部分和控制基板710的下侧区域部分,并且真空隔热材料740与开门驱动部54(55)的支撑部763和控制基板710的支撑部711具有间隔。As shown in FIG. 44, heat insulating material 730, such as polyurethane, and vacuum heat insulating material 740 are arrange|positioned so that it may overlap inside 11 A of roof parts. The vacuum heat insulating material 740 is located on the lower side of the heat insulating material 730, and it arrange|positions so that the middle part of the vacuum heat insulating material 740 is bent at substantially right angles. In this way, since the halfway portion of the vacuum heat insulating material 740 is bent at a substantially right angle, the vacuum heat insulating material 740 can be arranged so as to cover the lower region of the door opening drive unit 54 (55) and the lower portion of the control board 710. The side region portion, and the vacuum heat insulating material 740 is spaced from the support portion 763 of the door opening driving portion 54 (55) and the support portion 711 of the control substrate 710 .
图44所示的冰箱1的顶部照明750具有例如LED(发光二极管)灯,配置成埋设于顶部的聚氨酯等隔热材料730的凹部733。因此,顶部照明750未从顶部的内壁755向下侧突出出来。真空隔热材料740与该顶部照明750被内壁755隔离开。The top lighting 750 of the refrigerator 1 shown in FIG. 44 has, for example, an LED (Light Emitting Diode) lamp, and is arranged in a concave portion 733 embedded in a heat insulating material 730 such as polyurethane on the top. Therefore, the top lighting 750 does not protrude downward from the top inner wall 755 . The vacuum insulation 740 is separated from the top lighting 750 by an inner wall 755 .
接下来,参照图45~图47,说明第29实施方式的变形例,图45~图47所示的第29实施方式的变形例的冰箱的部位与图44所示的第29实施方式的冰箱的部位实质相同的情况下,使用相同符号来进行其说明。Next, a modified example of the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. The parts of the refrigerator of the modified example of the twenty-ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. When the parts are substantially the same, the same symbols are used to describe them.
图45~图47与图44一样,分别是表示其他变形例的冰箱的上部的沿前后方向的截面图。45 to 47 are cross-sectional views along the front-rear direction showing an upper portion of a refrigerator according to another modified example, similarly to FIG. 44 .
首先,在图45所示的第1变形例的冰箱1中,顶部照明750配置成与顶部的内壁755接触,顶部照明750的LED灯750a配置于顶部的内壁755的外侧(冰箱内侧),由此露出到冷藏室内。并且,顶部照明750配置于顶部的内壁755的弯折部757。First, in the refrigerator 1 of the first modified example shown in FIG. Expose it to the refrigerator. In addition, the top lighting 750 is disposed on the bent portion 757 of the inner wall 755 of the top.
此外,使顶部的内壁755的弯折部相对于箱体(主体)11的顶部11A的凹部分11C的弯折部而位于前侧,因此,能够在箱体外壁的弯折部与内壁755的弯折部的前后方向上的间隙处形成空间,因而可以在其间沿上下方向配置真空隔热材料。因此,可以将真空隔热材料740的途中部分的弯折部配置于该空间。而且,沿上下方向配置的真空隔热材料也可以是分割开的分体材料。另外,也可以使沿该上下方向配置的真空隔热材料比其他部位的沿前后方向延伸的真空隔热材料薄。这样,能够减小箱体外壁的弯折部与内壁755的弯折部在前后方向上的间隙的空间,因此,能够使内壁755的弯折部向后方退让,能够增加冰箱内的容量。In addition, since the bent portion of the inner wall 755 of the top is located on the front side with respect to the bent portion of the concave portion 11C of the top 11A of the box body (main body) 11, it is possible to make a difference between the bent portion of the outer wall of the box and the inner wall 755. Since a space is formed in the gap in the front-back direction of the bent portion, a vacuum heat insulating material can be arranged in the up-down direction therebetween. Therefore, the bent portion of the vacuum heat insulating material 740 in the middle can be arranged in this space. Moreover, the vacuum heat insulating material arrange|positioned in the up-down direction may be the divided material. Moreover, you may make the vacuum heat insulating material arrange|positioned along this up-down direction thinner than the vacuum heat insulating material extended in the front-back direction of other places. In this way, the space between the bent portion of the outer wall of the box and the bent portion of the inner wall 755 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, so the bent portion of the inner wall 755 can be retreated to the rear, and the capacity in the refrigerator can be increased.
另外,外壁的弯折部的凹部分11C的底部的前方侧的角与内壁755的弯折部的上方侧(凹部分11C侧)的角的距离尺寸,比其他不具有弯折部的顶部11A的厚度尺寸小,因此,如果只是聚氨酯隔热材料,则隔热性有可能变差,但是,通过采用包含上述真空隔热材料的构成,能够大幅提高隔热性。In addition, the distance between the corner on the front side of the bottom of the concave portion 11C of the bent portion of the outer wall and the corner on the upper side (the side of the concave portion 11C) of the bent portion of the inner wall 755 is larger than that of the other top 11A that does not have a bent portion. The thickness dimension is small, so if only the polyurethane heat insulating material is used, the heat insulating property may be deteriorated. However, the heat insulating property can be greatly improved by adopting the structure including the above-mentioned vacuum heat insulating material.
在图46所示的第2变形例的冰箱1中,真空隔热材料770被分割成多个部分,真空隔热材料770被分成第1部分771和第2部分772。第1部分771覆盖开门驱动部54(55)的下侧区域部分,第2部分772覆盖控制基板710的下侧区域部分。顶部照明750的LED灯750a与真空隔热材料770的第1部分771具有间隔,控制基板710侧的真空隔热材料770的第2部分772与内壁部分776接触。In the refrigerator 1 of the second modified example shown in FIG. 46 , the vacuum heat insulating material 770 is divided into a plurality of parts, and the vacuum heat insulating material 770 is divided into a first part 771 and a second part 772 . The first part 771 covers the lower region of the door opening driver 54 ( 55 ), and the second part 772 covers the lower region of the control board 710 . The LED lamp 750a of the top lighting 750 is spaced from the first part 771 of the vacuum heat insulating material 770, and the second part 772 of the vacuum heat insulating material 770 on the control board 710 side is in contact with the inner wall part 776.
另外,第1部分771和第2部分772的真空隔热材料配置成在前后方向上重叠。这是以下构成:通过使顶部的内壁755的弯折部相对于箱体(主体)11的顶部11A的凹部分11C的弯折部而位于前侧,在箱体外壁的弯折部与内壁755的弯折部的前后方向上的间隙处形成空间,因此能够重叠。Moreover, the vacuum heat insulating material of the 1st part 771 and the 2nd part 772 is arrange|positioned so that it may overlap in the front-back direction. This is a structure in which the bent portion of the inner wall 755 of the top is located on the front side with respect to the bent portion of the concave portion 11C of the top 11A of the box (main body) 11, and the bent portion of the outer wall of the box and the inner wall 755 Spaces are formed in the gaps in the front-back direction of the bent parts, so they can be overlapped.
此外,在外壁的弯折部的凹部分11C的底部的前方侧的角与内壁755的弯折部的上方侧(凹部分11C侧)的角之间的尺寸比其他不具有弯折部的顶部11A的厚度尺寸小时,制造时作为泡沫隔热材料的聚氨酯有时难以流过,因此,通过在其间不配置真空隔热材料,能够确保聚氨酯流动的空间,使得聚氨酯可靠地填充,并且能够提高填充速度。In addition, the dimension between the corner on the front side of the bottom of the concave portion 11C of the bent portion of the outer wall and the corner on the upper side (the concave portion 11C side) of the bent portion of the inner wall 755 is smaller than that of other tops not having the bent portion. The thickness dimension of 11A is small, and it is sometimes difficult to flow polyurethane as a foam insulation material during manufacture. Therefore, by not arranging a vacuum insulation material in between, a space for polyurethane flow can be secured, and polyurethane can be reliably filled and the filling speed can be increased. .
在图47所示的第3变形例的冰箱1中,顶部的内壁755的弯折部780倾斜地形成。顶部照明750对应于倾斜的弯折部780的形状而形成为例如直角三角形状,顶部照明750配置成埋设于该弯折部780内。真空隔热材料740未被分割,是一体物。这样,顶部照明750的LED灯750a配置于弯折部780内,顶部照明750不与真空隔热材料740接触而具有间隔。In the refrigerator 1 of the third modified example shown in FIG. 47, the bent portion 780 of the top inner wall 755 is formed obliquely. The top lighting 750 is formed in, for example, a right triangle shape corresponding to the shape of the inclined bent portion 780 , and the top lighting 750 is arranged so as to be embedded in the bent portion 780 . The vacuum heat insulating material 740 is not divided, but is an integral body. Thus, the LED lamp 750a of the top lighting 750 is arrange|positioned in the bending part 780, and the top lighting 750 does not contact the vacuum heat insulating material 740, but there exists a gap.
在第29实施方式中,也可以通过使用者用手指持续触摸图1所示的开门操作部51、52一定时间以上,使开门装置工作。In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the door opener may be operated by the user continuing to touch the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 shown in FIG. 1 with fingers for a certain period of time or longer.
例如、图42所示的远程检测传感器100在用户(使用者)的人体位于离冰箱1较远的部位的情况下,是用于检测人体的例如红外线传感器,但是,关于将用于使该远程检测传感器的红外线透过到门前方的前面板印刷涂料剔除而形成的孔(开口),也可以配置成在该孔上粘贴与印刷涂料同色系的红外线透过部件等。此外,可以通过在该部位以形成多个小孔(开口)的方式涂刷涂料等来使涂料的剔除不太醒目。另外,由此,可以使得配置于玻璃板背面的作为红外线传感器的远程检测传感器从正面难以被观察到。而且,也可以使该涂料为透过红外线的涂料,或者具有:通过溅射、蚀刻等来使红外线波长光透过并使可见光的一部分难以透过的半透过性机构。在该情况下,作为半透过性机构,可以利用波长长的颜色透过的机构。例如,构成为使波长比蓝色的波长(450-495nm)长的红色的波长(例如620-750nm)透过时,则作为这以上的长波长的红外线的波长(例如760-830nm以上)容易透过。而且,在该情况下,位于红外线传感器附近的显示机构的颜色,通过同样利用波长长的颜色的发光机构(绿色、黄色、赤色的发光二极管等),该光的显示也能够透过半透过性机构,使使用者能够识别,并且难以识别红外线传感器、门内部的部件。For example, the remote detection sensor 100 shown in FIG. 42 is an infrared sensor for detecting a human body when the human body of the user (user) is located far away from the refrigerator 1. Infrared rays from the detection sensor pass through the hole (opening) formed by removing the printed paint on the front panel in front of the door, and an infrared-transmitting member of the same color as the printed paint can be pasted on the hole (opening). In addition, paint removal can be made less conspicuous by applying paint or the like so as to form a large number of small holes (openings) on this site. In addition, thereby, the remote detection sensor which is an infrared sensor arranged on the back surface of the glass plate can be made difficult to see from the front. Furthermore, the paint may be a paint that transmits infrared rays, or may have a semitransparent mechanism that transmits infrared wavelength light by sputtering, etching, etc., and makes it difficult to transmit part of visible light. In this case, a mechanism that transmits a color with a long wavelength can be used as the semitransparent mechanism. For example, when it is configured to transmit a red wavelength (for example, 620-750nm) longer than a blue wavelength (450-495nm), it is easy to transmit a wavelength of infrared rays (for example, 760-830nm or more) that is longer than this wavelength. Pass. Moreover, in this case, the color of the display mechanism located near the infrared sensor can also be displayed through the semi-transparent light by using the light-emitting mechanism (green, yellow, red light-emitting diode, etc.) of a color with a long wavelength. Mechanism that enables the user to identify, and it is difficult to identify the infrared sensor, the parts inside the door.
此外,作为红外线传感器的远程检测传感器也可以配置于基板,与控制操作部50或者开门操作部51、52一起插入。在该情况下,可以将控制操作部50或者开门操作部51、52的电极的一部分剔除,或者设置狭缝,使得红外线能够从该电极的背面侧向门侧发送。这样,远程检测传感器容易检测到进行操作的使用者。而且,远程检测传感器也可以设置于控制操作部50与触摸打开SW的开门操作部51、52之间。In addition, the remote detection sensor which is an infrared sensor may be arrange|positioned on a board|substrate, and may be inserted together with the control operation part 50 or the door opening operation part 51,52. In this case, a part of the electrodes of the control operation part 50 or the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 may be cut out, or a slit may be provided so that infrared rays can be transmitted from the back side of the electrodes to the door side. In this way, the remote detection sensor can easily detect the operating user. Furthermore, the remote detection sensor may be provided between the control operation part 50 and the door opening operation parts 51 and 52 of the touch open SW.
第30实施方式30th Embodiment
图48是表示第30实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。图49是图48所示的冰箱1的俯视图,图50是图48所示的冰箱1的侧视图。Fig. 48 is a front view showing refrigerator 1 according to the thirtieth embodiment. Fig. 49 is a plan view of the refrigerator 1 shown in Fig. 48, and Fig. 50 is a side view of the refrigerator 1 shown in Fig. 48 .
如图48~图50所示,一对左门21和右门22覆盖冰箱1的冷藏室12的前表面开口部。因此,左门21、右门22分别在作为冰箱主体的箱体11的左端部、右端部的上下利用铰链部安装成以对开式进行开闭。As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50 , a pair of left door 21 and right door 22 cover the front opening of refrigerator compartment 12 of refrigerator 1 . Therefore, the left door 21 and the right door 22 are attached to the upper and lower sides of the left end portion and the right end portion of the cabinet 11 which is the main body of the refrigerator, respectively, by hinge portions so as to open and close in a split style.
左门21、右门22都是以下隔热构造部件:在前表面开口的扁平内板的开口部安装有着色透明的玻璃制前面板21A、22A,并且在内部空洞部配置有真空隔热材料,在未被真空隔热材料填埋的空洞部配置有泡沫聚氨酯隔热材料(以下也简称为聚氨酯隔热材料)或者预成型的固体隔热材料(例如EPC)。Both the left door 21 and the right door 22 are heat insulating structural members: colored and transparent glass front panels 21A, 22A are attached to the opening of the flat inner panel with the front surface open, and a vacuum heat insulating material is arranged in the internal cavity. , A foamed polyurethane heat insulating material (hereinafter referred to simply as a polyurethane heat insulating material) or a preformed solid heat insulating material (such as EPC) is disposed in the cavity that is not filled with the vacuum heat insulating material.
如图48~图50所示,开门操作部551、552分别设置于左门21的前面板21A、右门22的前面板22A的下边附近。开门驱动部54、55分别设置于箱体11的顶板上表面的前端附近的左右部位,而且是设置于与左门21、右门22的上边的开放侧端部附近对应的位置。As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50 , the door opening operation parts 551 and 552 are respectively provided in the vicinity of the bottom of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 and the front panel 22A of the right door 22 . The door opening drive parts 54, 55 are respectively provided at the left and right parts near the front end of the upper surface of the top plate of the box body 11, and are provided at positions corresponding to the opening side ends of the upper sides of the left door 21 and the right door 22.
这些开门驱动部54、55是使左门21和右门22分别强制性进行开门动作的开门装置。开门驱动部54、55通过利用电磁铁使动铁芯54A、55A向前方推出,将左门21、右门22各自的开放侧端部附近的上边向前方推出,从而使左门21、右门22强制性自动开放。These door opening driving units 54 and 55 are door opening devices for forcibly opening the left door 21 and the right door 22 respectively. The door-opening driving parts 54, 55 push out the moving iron cores 54A, 55A to the front by utilizing the electromagnet, and push out the upper edge near the respective opening side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22 to the front, so that the left door 21 and the right door can be opened. 22 Mandatory automatic opening.
一个开门操作部551配置于左门21的右下位置,另一个开门操作部552配置于右门22的左下位置。开门操作部551配置于左门21的玻璃制前面板21A的内部,开门操作部552配置于右门22的玻璃制前面板22A的内部。One door opening operation part 551 is arranged at the lower right position of the left door 21 , and the other door opening operation part 552 is arranged at the lower left position of the right door 22 . The door opening operation part 551 is arranged inside the glass front panel 21A of the left door 21 , and the door opening operation part 552 is arranged inside the glass front panel 22A of the right door 22 .
图51示出了图48所示的开门操作部551的基板553的构造例。图52是表示配置于图51所示的开门操作部551的基板553的接近传感器560和保护电极570的图。图53是表示开门操作部551的构造例的分解立体图。FIG. 51 shows a configuration example of a substrate 553 of the door opening operation unit 551 shown in FIG. 48 . FIG. 52 is a diagram showing proximity sensor 560 and guard electrode 570 disposed on substrate 553 of door opening operation unit 551 shown in FIG. 51 . FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view showing a structural example of the door opening operation unit 551 .
图48所示的开门操作部551和开门操作部552具有同样构造,但是,可以是左右对称形状,还可以是左右相同形状。图51示出了开门操作部551的基板553的形状例,但是,开门操作部552与开门操作部551是实质上相同的形状,因此,参照图51~图53以开门操作部551的基板553为代表进行说明。The door-opening operation part 551 and the door-opening operation part 552 shown in FIG. 48 have the same structure, however, they may have a left-right symmetrical shape, or may have a left-right identical shape. Fig. 51 has shown the shape example of the substrate 553 of the door-opening operation part 551, but, the door-opening operation part 552 and the door-opening operation part 551 are substantially the same shape, therefore, with reference to Fig. 51~Fig. Explain for representatives.
首先,参照图53,开门操作部551具有:基板组装体500M、用于收纳基板组装体500M的被称为开口盒体的塑料制收纳空间部件585、以及塑料制盖部件590。在塑料制收纳空间部件585的背面585R,优选粘贴有作为金属体的例如铝箔。在塑料制盖部件590的内表面,粘贴有铝箔等金属体591。由此,冰箱1的主体侧产生的电磁波,不会对基板组装体500M侧造成影响。First, referring to FIG. 53 , door opening operation unit 551 has substrate assembly 500M, plastic storage space member 585 called an open box for accommodating substrate assembly 500M, and plastic cover member 590 . On the back surface 585R of the storage space member 585 made of plastic, for example, aluminum foil, which is a metal body, is preferably stuck. A metal body 591 such as aluminum foil is pasted on the inner surface of the plastic lid member 590 . Accordingly, electromagnetic waves generated on the main body side of the refrigerator 1 do not affect the board assembly 500M side.
基板组装体500M具有:塑料制遮蔽板599、基板553、操作标牌板597、搭载有显示用LED557的LED基板598。基板553是静电触摸开关基板,被支撑固定于遮蔽板599的前表面侧。在基板553的前表面侧配置有操作标牌板597。在遮蔽板599的背面侧,支撑固定有显示用LED基板598。在该LED基板598上搭载有多个LED577。遮蔽板599作为支撑2个基板553、LED基板598的指示机构、以及使LED光隔开间隔的间隔机构起作用。The substrate assembly 500M has a plastic shielding plate 599, a substrate 553, an operation signboard 597, and an LED substrate 598 on which LEDs 557 for display are mounted. The substrate 553 is an electrostatic touch switch substrate, and is supported and fixed on the front side of the shielding plate 599 . An operation sign plate 597 is disposed on the front side of the base plate 553 . On the back side of the shielding plate 599, a display LED substrate 598 is supported and fixed. A plurality of LEDs 577 are mounted on the LED substrate 598 . The shielding plate 599 functions as an indication mechanism that supports the two substrates 553 and the LED substrate 598 , and a spacing mechanism that separates the LED lights.
在基板553和操作标牌板597的对应位置,形成有左右狭缝574、575(透光机构)。狭缝574、575的位置位于接近传感器560与中间区域部分589之间。该基板组装体500M穿过收纳空间部件585的长方形开口部分586而收纳于收纳空间部件585内。收纳空间部件585的开口部分586被盖部件590覆盖。Left and right slits 574 and 575 (transmitting means) are formed at positions corresponding to the base plate 553 and the operation sign plate 597 . The slots 574 , 575 are located between the proximity sensor 560 and the mid-area portion 589 . This substrate assembly 500M is accommodated in the storage space member 585 through the rectangular opening portion 586 of the storage space member 585 . The opening portion 586 of the storage space member 585 is covered with a cover member 590 .
如图51(a)和图52所示,开门操作部551的基板553是纵长的长方形或者正方形,基板553具有图51(a)所示的表面553A和图51(b)所示的背面553B。基板553上设置有电子部件的搭载部分571、接近传感器560和保护电极570的配置部分572。在图51(a)和图52所示的电子部件的搭载部分571,以向背面突出地收纳于作为间隔机构的遮蔽板599的凹部的方式搭载有所需的电子部件、连接器部件等。此外,通过在基板553的表面以不突出而大致平坦的状态形成金属制电连接部571b,能够使基板553与玻璃门的背面接触。As shown in Figure 51 (a) and Figure 52, the substrate 553 of the door opening operation part 551 is a vertically long rectangle or square, and the substrate 553 has a surface 553A shown in Figure 51 (a) and a back surface shown in Figure 51 (b) 553B. A mounting portion 571 of electronic components, a placement portion 572 of a proximity sensor 560 and a guard electrode 570 are provided on the substrate 553 . 51( a ) and 52 , required electronic components, connector components, and the like are mounted so as to protrude toward the back and be accommodated in recesses of a shielding plate 599 as a spacer. Moreover, by forming the metal electric connection part 571b in the state which does not protrude and is substantially flat on the surface of the board|substrate 553, the board|substrate 553 can be brought into contact with the back surface of a glass door.
而且,通过利用作为盖机构的用于遮蔽基板553的操作标牌板597进行覆盖,能够防止使用者接触电连接部571b时产生误动作、以及静电积存于玻璃门时产生噪声。此外,该操作标牌板597可以是着色的板,也可以是蒸镀的板。Furthermore, by covering with the operation plate 597 that shields the substrate 553 as a cover mechanism, it is possible to prevent malfunctions when the user touches the electrical connection portion 571b and noise when static electricity accumulates on the glass door. In addition, the operation sign board 597 may be a colored board or a vapor-deposited board.
在图51(a)所示的表面553A侧的配置部分572上配置有:作为第1电极的接近传感器560、作为第3电极的保护电极570、作为第2电极的中间区域部分589。中间区域部分589设置于接近传感器560与保护电极570之间。接近传感器560、保护电极570和中间区域部分589是金属电极,但是,被彼此电绝缘。作为第2电极的中间区域部分589辅助接近传感器560,具有作为接近传感器的功能。保护电极570变更接近传感器560的检测有效范围。Proximity sensor 560 as the first electrode, guard electrode 570 as the third electrode, and intermediate region 589 as the second electrode are arranged on the arrangement portion 572 on the surface 553A side shown in FIG. 51( a ). The middle area portion 589 is disposed between the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 . Proximity sensor 560, guard electrode 570, and intermediate region portion 589 are metal electrodes, however, electrically insulated from each other. The middle region portion 589 as the second electrode assists the proximity sensor 560 and functions as a proximity sensor. The guard electrode 570 changes the effective detection range of the proximity sensor 560 .
另外,如图51(b)所示,在基板553的配置部分572所对应的背面553B,配置有作为第4电极的网状接地图案573。由此,该接地图案573使得来自冰箱主体的噪声不会对接近传感器560产生的电磁场和保护电极570产生的电磁场产生影响。In addition, as shown in FIG. 51( b ), on the rear surface 553B corresponding to the arrangement portion 572 of the substrate 553 , a mesh ground pattern 573 as a fourth electrode is arranged. Therefore, the ground pattern 573 prevents noise from the main body of the refrigerator from affecting the electromagnetic field generated by the proximity sensor 560 and the electromagnetic field generated by the guard electrode 570 .
如图51(a)和图52所示,在接近传感器560的中央位置形成有通孔560C,但是,在该通孔560C上,如图51(b)所示,连接有导线图案560H。用户用手指按压接近传感器560(接触)的行为,通常是以接近传感器560的正中为目标来进行的,因此通孔560C形成于接近传感器560的正中位置。As shown in FIG. 51( a ) and FIG. 52 , a through hole 560C is formed at the center of the proximity sensor 560 , but a lead pattern 560H is connected to the through hole 560C as shown in FIG. 51( b ). When the user presses (touches) the proximity sensor 560 with a finger, the center of the proximity sensor 560 is usually targeted, so the through hole 560C is formed at the center of the proximity sensor 560 .
像这样将通孔560C形成于接近传感器560的大致正中的位置的理由如下。即、在接近传感器560中,形成该通孔560C的中央区域与其他区域相比,开关灵敏度最高。据此,通过用户的手指按压具有通孔560C的接近开关560的正中,能够使手指接触灵敏度最高之处。The reason why the through hole 560C is formed in the approximate center of the proximity sensor 560 is as follows. That is, in the proximity sensor 560 , the central region where the through hole 560C is formed has the highest switching sensitivity compared to other regions. Accordingly, when the user's finger presses the center of the proximity switch 560 having the through hole 560C, the finger can be brought into contact with the most sensitive point.
图51和图52所示的接近传感器560是静电触摸(接触)用电极,且是:用于在图49和图50所示的左门21和右门22的正面(前表面)方向,在例如约100mm处检测人体或者物体的接近的静电电容式检测机构。该接近传感器560在用户的人体的一部分,具体而言例如手指接近时,检测出该手指的接近。接近传感器560虽然是静电电容式触摸传感器,但也可以是交互电容方式的触摸传感器或者自我电容方式的触摸传感器。The proximity sensor 560 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 is an electrode for electrostatic touch (contact), and is used in the front (front surface) direction of the left door 21 and the right door 22 shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. For example, a capacitive detection mechanism that detects the approach of a human body or an object at a distance of about 100 mm. The proximity sensor 560 detects the approach of a finger when a part of the user's body, specifically a finger, approaches. Proximity sensor 560 is a capacitive touch sensor, but may be an interactive capacitive touch sensor or a self capacitive touch sensor.
对于交互电容方式而言,由1个发送电极和1个接收电极构成,当对发送电极提供电流时,产生电磁场,电磁场被接收电极接收。例如人体的手指接近接近传感器560的检测区域时,电磁场的一部分被吸收而被接收电极接收,因此被检测出的能量减少,由此,接近传感器560能够检测出手指的接近。For the mutual capacitance method, it consists of one transmitting electrode and one receiving electrode, and when an electric current is supplied to the transmitting electrode, an electromagnetic field is generated, and the electromagnetic field is received by the receiving electrode. For example, when a finger of a human body approaches the detection area of the proximity sensor 560 , part of the electromagnetic field is absorbed and received by the receiving electrodes, so that the detected energy decreases, and thus the proximity sensor 560 can detect the approach of the finger.
对于自我电容方式而言,具有杂散电容的电极(接近传感器560)需要1个。电极(接近传感器560)的杂散电容受到位于该电极(接近传感器560)和其周围的导电体(人体的手指)之间的寄生电容影响。人体的手指接近接近传感器560时,受寄生电容的影响,杂散电容的值增加,通过测量该增加的杂散电容,接近传感器560能够检测出手指的接近。For the self-capacitance method, one electrode (proximity sensor 560 ) having stray capacitance is required. The stray capacitance of an electrode (proximity sensor 560 ) is affected by the parasitic capacitance between the electrode (proximity sensor 560 ) and the conductor (finger of the human body) around it. When a human finger approaches the proximity sensor 560 , the value of the stray capacitance increases due to the influence of the parasitic capacitance. By measuring the increased stray capacitance, the proximity sensor 560 can detect the approach of the finger.
如图51和图52所示,接近传感器560是形成为例如纵向长的长方形状的开关,狭缝574、575形成为在接近传感器560的周围包围电极。如图52所示,在该狭缝574、575上从背面覆盖有基板598,作为照明装置起作用的LED577隔着间隔配置有多个。As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 , proximity sensor 560 is, for example, a switch formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and slits 574 and 575 are formed so as to surround proximity sensor 560 . As shown in FIG. 52, the board|substrate 598 covers this slit 574,575 from the back surface, and LED577 functioning as an illumination device is arrange|positioned at intervals.
其中,多个LED577中的与狭缝574、575的4个角部576R对应的4个LED577配置于从狭缝576内脱离出的狭缝576的外侧的位置。Of these, among the plurality of LEDs 577 , four LEDs 577 corresponding to the four corners 576R of the slits 574 and 575 are arranged at positions outside the slit 576 deviated from the inside of the slit 576 .
如图52所示,接近传感器560的一端部通过连结部分560A与配置部分572连结,接近传感器560的另一端部通过连结部分560B而与配置部分572连结。在接近传感器560的中央部形成有电连接用的通孔560C。像这样在接近传感器560的中央部分形成通孔560C,如已经说明的那样,设置有通孔560C的接近传感器560的区域部分与其他区域部分相比,检测灵敏度高。由于用户的手指接近并接触的区域部分是接近传感器560的中央部分,因此,将通孔560C设置于接近传感器560的中央部分。接近传感器560通过在基板的配置部分的狭缝574、575的区域572a中,在虚线区域形成电极,形成为大致长方形。另外,狭缝574、575并未包围整个接近传感器560,而是形成为コ字状。这形成了以下构成:通过形成与狭缝周围的周围部572b连接的桥572ab,将内侧与外侧连结起来,基板不被分割地保持为1个基板。As shown in FIG. 52 , one end of the proximity sensor 560 is connected to the placement portion 572 via a connection portion 560A, and the other end of the proximity sensor 560 is connected to the placement portion 572 via a connection portion 560B. A through hole 560C for electrical connection is formed in the center portion of the proximity sensor 560 . Through hole 560C is thus formed in the central portion of proximity sensor 560 . As already described, the region of proximity sensor 560 in which through hole 560C is provided has higher detection sensitivity than other regions. Since the area portion where the user's finger approaches and contacts is the central portion of the proximity sensor 560 , the through hole 560C is provided at the central portion of the proximity sensor 560 . The proximity sensor 560 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape by forming electrodes in the region 572a of the slits 574 and 575 in the arrangement portion of the substrate in the dotted line region. In addition, the slits 574 and 575 do not surround the entire proximity sensor 560 but are formed in a U-shape. This results in a configuration in which the inner side and the outer side are connected by forming a bridge 572ab connected to the peripheral portion 572b around the slit, and the substrate is held as one substrate without being divided.
图51和图52所示的保护电极570在配置部分572,且在接近传感器560和中间区域部分589的周围形成为长方形状的框形。保护电极570是金属体,由一对短边电极部分570A和一对长边电极部分570B构成。保护电极570产生与接近传感器560产生的电磁场相反方向的电磁场。The guard electrode 570 shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 is formed in a rectangular frame shape around the proximity sensor 560 and the middle area portion 589 in the arrangement portion 572 . The guard electrode 570 is a metal body and is composed of a pair of short-side electrode portions 570A and a pair of long-side electrode portions 570B. The guard electrode 570 generates an electromagnetic field in a direction opposite to that generated by the proximity sensor 560 .
由此,如图49和图50所示,接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P在保护电极570产生的相反方向的电磁场的作用下,扩展被抑制。因此,通过由保护电极570产生的电磁场来抑制接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P的扩展,保护电极570起到检测范围的有效范围变更机构的作用,该检测范围的有效范围变更机构变更人体的检测范围的有效范围。Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 , the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 is suppressed from spreading due to the electromagnetic field in the opposite direction generated by the guard electrode 570 . Therefore, the expansion of the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 is suppressed by the electromagnetic field generated by the guard electrode 570, and the guard electrode 570 functions as an effective range change mechanism of the detection range that changes the detection range of the human body. effective range.
保护电极570通过以缩窄的方式来变更使检测人体的例如手指的接近时的接近传感器560的检测范围,变更接近传感器560的检测范围的有效范围。具体而言,保护电极570变更接近传感器560的检测范围的有效范围,其结果,如图49所示,左门21的开门操作部551的接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P仅被导向接近传感器560的正面前方方向。同样,右门22的开门操作部552的接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P仅被导向接近传感器560的正面前方方向。The guard electrode 570 changes the effective range of the detection range of the proximity sensor 560 by narrowing the detection range of the proximity sensor 560 when detecting the approach of a human body such as a finger. Specifically, the guard electrode 570 changes the effective range of the detection range of the proximity sensor 560. As a result, as shown in FIG. frontal direction. Similarly, the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 of the door opening operation part 552 of the right door 22 is guided only in the front front direction of the proximity sensor 560 .
因此,如图49所示,接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P被缩窄,使得不会在作为左右方向的X方向上扩展。Therefore, as shown in FIG. 49 , the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 is narrowed so as not to spread in the X direction which is the left-right direction.
而且,如图50所示,左门21的开门操作部551的接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P仅被导向接近传感器560的正面前方方向。同样,右门22的开门操作部552的接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P仅被导向接近传感器560的正面前方方向。因此,在图50中,接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P被缩窄,使得在作为上下方向的Z方向上不会扩展。And, as shown in FIG. 50 , electromagnetic field 560P generated by proximity sensor 560 of door opening operation portion 551 of left door 21 is guided only in the front front direction of proximity sensor 560 . Similarly, the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 of the door opening operation part 552 of the right door 22 is guided only in the front front direction of the proximity sensor 560 . Therefore, in FIG. 50 , the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 is narrowed so as not to expand in the Z direction which is the up and down direction.
即、图49和图50所示的接近传感器560的电磁场560P示出人体的检测范围的有效范围,该人体的检测范围的有效范围相当于与和接近传感器560的前方不同方向的范围(上下、左右扩展的范围)不同的范围。即、人体的检测范围的有效范围至少将接近传感器560的使用者的操作方向作为有效范围,而且通过缩窄等来变更与操作方向不同方向的范围,由此限定有效范围,具体而言,是除了与前方不同方向的范围的至少一部分(向上下、左右、后方扩展的范围等的至少一部分)之外的范围。That is, the electromagnetic field 560P of the proximity sensor 560 shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 shows the effective range of the detection range of the human body, and the effective range of the detection range of the human body corresponds to a range in a different direction from the front of the proximity sensor 560 (up and down, Left and right extended range) different ranges. That is, the effective range of the detection range of the human body takes at least the user's operation direction of the proximity sensor 560 as the effective range, and the range in the direction different from the operation direction is changed by narrowing or the like, thereby limiting the effective range. A range other than at least a part of a range in a direction different from the front (at least a part of a range extending up and down, left and right, and rearward, etc.).
图54是表示控制部556、开门操作部551、552、作为开门装置的开门驱动部54、55等的电连接的框图。Fig. 54 is a block diagram showing the electrical connection of the control unit 556, the door opening operation units 551, 552, the door opening driving units 54, 55 as door opening devices, and the like.
如图54所示,控制部556电连接于开门操作部551、552的接近传感器560及保护电极570、开门驱动部54、55、以及多个作为照明装置的LED577。As shown in FIG. 54, the control part 556 is electrically connected to the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 of the door-opening operation part 551,552, the door-opening drive part 54,55, and LED577 which is several lighting devices.
控制部556使得接近传感器560保持“高灵敏度”状态。手指进入到作为接近传感器560的检测区域的图49和图50所示的电磁场560P内时,图54的控制部556从接近传感器560接收手指接近接近传感器560的信号SG。The control unit 556 keeps the proximity sensor 560 in the "high sensitivity" state. When the finger enters the electromagnetic field 560P shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 as the detection area of the proximity sensor 560 , the control unit 556 of FIG.
然后,图54的控制部556接收到来自该接近传感器560的信号SG时,判断为手指接近了接近传感器560,并停止对保护电极570的通电,同时将接近传感器560的灵敏度从“高灵敏度”变更为“低灵敏度”来降低灵敏度。并且,控制部556在接收到来自该接近传感器560的信号SG时,控制部556使LED577亮灯,对接近开关560的周围进行照明,由此,通过照明使接近开关560的位置上浮,使得用户能够通过视觉确认接近开关560的位置。Then, when the control unit 556 in FIG. 54 receives the signal SG from the proximity sensor 560, it determines that the finger has approached the proximity sensor 560, stops the power supply to the guard electrode 570, and simultaneously changes the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 from "high sensitivity" to "high sensitivity". Change to "Low Sensitivity" to reduce sensitivity. And, when the control unit 556 receives the signal SG from the proximity sensor 560, the control unit 556 turns on the LED 577 to illuminate the vicinity of the proximity switch 560, whereby the position of the proximity switch 560 is floated by lighting, allowing the user to The position of the proximity switch 560 can be confirmed visually.
另外,作为LED577亮灯的效果,由于由LED577进行亮灯显示,因此,用户能够确认操作部位,不需要对作为玻璃板的前面板21A(或者22A)实施表示操作部的操作位置的印刷等。In addition, as an effect of lighting the LED 577, since the LED 577 performs a lighting display, the user can confirm the operation part, and there is no need to print the operation position of the operation part on the front panel 21A (or 22A) which is a glass plate.
此外,从手指接近接近传感器560的状态转移到接触接近传感器560时,接近传感器560作为接触开关起作用,接近传感器560对控制部556发送手指接触了接近传感器560的接触信号SH。由此,控制部556使接近传感器560作为接触传感器起作用,使例如左门21的开门操作有效,控制部56能够使开门驱动部54动作来实际进行左门21的开门操作。上述操作顺序,对于右门22而言也是同样的。In addition, when the finger touches the proximity sensor 560 and touches the proximity sensor 560 , the proximity sensor 560 functions as a touch switch, and the proximity sensor 560 sends a touch signal SH indicating that the finger touches the proximity sensor 560 to the control unit 556 . Thus, the control unit 556 enables the proximity sensor 560 to function as a touch sensor to enable the opening operation of the left door 21 , for example, and the control unit 56 can operate the door opening driving unit 54 to actually perform the opening operation of the left door 21 . The above operation sequence is also the same for the right door 22 .
由此,用户能够借助LED577的照明一边目视确认一边接触配置于左门21或者右门22的玻璃面内侧的接近开关560的位置,从而打开左门21或者右门22。Thereby, the user can open the left door 21 or the right door 22 by visually confirming the position of the proximity switch 560 disposed inside the glass surface of the left door 21 or the right door 22 while visually checking the position by the illumination of the LED 577 .
如上所述,控制部556通过将接近传感器560的灵敏度从手指接近时的“高灵敏度”切换为“低灵敏度”,使接近传感器560起到接触传感器的作用。手指接近接近传感器560时,控制部556使静电开关560作为“接近传感器”起作用,因此,控制部556通过将接近传感器560的灵敏度设定为“高”,作为“接近传感器”的功能是“有效”的。因此,控制部556不使接近传感器560作为“接触传感器”起作用,因此接近传感器560使得开门操作部551、552的作为本来功能的左门21、右门22的打开(开门操作)“无效”。As described above, the control unit 556 makes the proximity sensor 560 function as a touch sensor by switching the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 from "high sensitivity" when a finger approaches to "low sensitivity". When the finger approaches the proximity sensor 560, the control unit 556 makes the electrostatic switch 560 function as a "proximity sensor". Effective. Therefore, the control unit 556 does not make the proximity sensor 560 function as a “contact sensor”, so the proximity sensor 560 “invalidates” the opening (door opening operation) of the left door 21 and the right door 22 which are the original functions of the door opening operation parts 551 and 552. .
如上所述,使用户的手指接近接近传感器560,手指进入到作为接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P时,接近传感器560将手指的接近通知给控制部556。然后,在手指的接近从接近传感器560被通知给控制部556时,控制部556将作为接近传感器560的灵敏度从“高”切换设定为“低”。并且,控制部556使接近传感器560的亮灯显示从关闭状态成为开启状态,利用LED577能够明示接近传感器560的位置。因此,用户能够一边目视确认接近传感器560的位置,一边用手指可靠地接触接近传感器560。控制部556使接近传感器560起到作为本来功能的“接触传感器”的作用,因此,通过用手指接触接近传感器560,左门21或者右门22的打开操作(开门操作)变成“有效”。As described above, when the user's finger is brought close to the proximity sensor 560 and the finger enters the electromagnetic field 560P which is the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 , the proximity sensor 560 notifies the control unit 556 of the proximity of the finger. Then, when the approach of the finger is notified from the proximity sensor 560 to the control unit 556 , the control unit 556 switches the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 from “high” to “low”. Furthermore, the control unit 556 turns the lighting display of the proximity sensor 560 from the off state to the on state, and the position of the proximity sensor 560 can be clearly indicated by the LED 577 . Therefore, the user can reliably touch the proximity sensor 560 with a finger while visually confirming the position of the proximity sensor 560 . The control unit 556 makes the proximity sensor 560 function as a "touch sensor" as an original function, so that the opening operation (door opening operation) of the left door 21 or the right door 22 becomes "valid" by touching the proximity sensor 560 with a finger.
上述左门21的打开操作(开门操作)与右门22的打开操作(开门操作)一样,因此,省略其说明。The opening operation (door opening operation) of the left door 21 described above is the same as the opening operation (door opening operation) of the right door 22, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.
如图51和图52所示,在接近传感器560的周围配置保护电极570,由此,作为接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P在左门21和右门22的正面方向(前方方向)且在例如约100mm的范围内检测人手、手指的接近。此时,作为接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P因为配置保护电极570而被限制,使得在上下方向和左右方向上不扩展。As shown in Figure 51 and Figure 52, guard electrode 570 is arranged around proximity sensor 560, thus, as the electromagnetic field 560P of the effective range of the human body detection range of proximity sensor 560, in the front direction (front direction) of left door 21 and right door 22 direction) and detect the approach of human hands and fingers within a range of, for example, about 100 mm. At this time, the electromagnetic field 560P, which is the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560, is limited by the arrangement of the guard electrode 570 so as not to expand in the up-down direction and the left-right direction.
如图49所示,针对左右方向(X方向)限制接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的扩展,由此,如图49所示,在要沿着箭头21M所示的轨迹打开左门21而使手指接近左门21的接近传感器560时,能够不让关闭着的右门22的接近传感器560检测手指。同样,在要沿着箭头22M所示的轨迹打开右门22而使手指接近右门22的接近传感器560时,能够不让关闭着的左门21的接近传感器560检测手指。As shown in FIG. 49, the expansion of the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 is limited for the left and right directions (X direction), thereby, as shown in FIG. 49, when the left door 21 is to be opened along the trajectory shown by the arrow 21M On the other hand, when a finger approaches the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21, the proximity sensor 560 of the closed right door 22 cannot detect the finger. Similarly, when the right door 22 is opened along the trajectory indicated by the arrow 22M and the finger is approached to the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22, the proximity sensor 560 of the closed left door 21 can prevent the finger from being detected.
因此,作为右门22的接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P,不会进入到打开作为移动机构的左门21时的轨迹内。同样,作为左门21的接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P,不会进入到打开作为移动机构的右门22时的轨迹内。Therefore, the electromagnetic field 560P, which is the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22, does not enter the trajectory when the left door 21, which is the moving mechanism, is opened. Similarly, the electromagnetic field 560P within the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21 will not enter the trajectory when the right door 22 as the moving mechanism is opened.
由此,在打开左门21或者右门22时,能够防止不打开而是关闭着的一侧的右门22或者左门21的接近传感器560不慎而误检测出用户的手指或左门21或者右门22。Thus, when the left door 21 or the right door 22 is opened, the proximity sensor 560 of the closed right door 22 or the left door 21 can be prevented from inadvertently detecting the user's finger or the left door 21. Or right door 22.
此外,如图50所示,通过针对上下方向(Z方向)限制接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的扩展,在将作为移动机构的推拉式的门23沿箭头方向拉出时,作为左门21的接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P和作为右门22的接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P不会进入到打开推拉式的门23时的轨迹内。In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, by restricting the expansion of the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 in the up and down direction (Z direction), when the push-pull door 23 as a moving mechanism is pulled out in the direction of the arrow, as the left The electromagnetic field 560P in the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 of the door 21 and the electromagnetic field 560P in the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22 will not enter the trajectory when the push-pull door 23 is opened.
由此,在打开推拉式的门23时,能够防止左门21的接近传感器560和右门22的接近传感器560不慎而误检测出用户的手指或推拉式的门23。This prevents the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21 and the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22 from inadvertently detecting the user's finger or the sliding door 23 when the sliding door 23 is opened.
对于图51和图52所示的保护电极570的大小而言,纵横尺寸可以为例如30mmx30mm以上。通过像这样设定保护电极570的大小,在用户要用例如肘部而不是手指接触接近传感器560来打开左门21或者右门22的情况下,能够防止肘部同时接触接近传感器560和保护电极570双方。由此,用户能够以手指也能够以肘部打开左门21或者右门22。Regarding the size of the guard electrode 570 shown in FIGS. 51 and 52 , the vertical and horizontal dimensions may be, for example, 30 mm×30 mm or more. By setting the size of the guard electrode 570 in this way, when the user wants to open the left door 21 or the right door 22 by touching the proximity sensor 560 with, for example, an elbow instead of a finger, it is possible to prevent the elbow from touching the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode at the same time. 570 sides. Thus, the user can open the left door 21 or the right door 22 with fingers or elbows.
接下来,参照图55来说明左门21和右门22的基板553的收纳构造例。图55是表示左门21和右门22的基板553的收纳构造例的图。图55(a)是左门21和右门22的主视图,图55(b)是示出了表示基板553的收纳构造的左门21的内侧端面部21T(右门22的内侧端面部22T)的构造的立体图。图55(c)是表示盖部件590的例子的图。Next, an example of the storage structure of the base plate 553 of the left door 21 and the right door 22 will be described with reference to FIG. 55 . FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a storage structure of the base plate 553 of the left door 21 and the right door 22 . Fig. 55 (a) is a front view of the left door 21 and the right door 22, and Fig. 55 (b) shows the inside end surface 21T of the left door 21 (the inside end surface 22T of the right door 22) showing the storage structure of the substrate 553. ) perspective view of the structure. FIG. 55( c ) is a diagram showing an example of a cover member 590 .
如图55(a)所示,在关闭左门21和右门22的状态下,左门21的内侧端面部21T和右门22的内侧端面部22T相向闭合。收纳空间部件585的长方形的开口部分586位于各内侧端面部21T,基板组装体500M的收纳空间部件585位于左门21和右门22的内部。基板组装体500M从开口部分586插入到收纳空间部件585内而被收纳。As shown in FIG. 55( a ), when the left door 21 and the right door 22 are closed, the inner end surface 21T of the left door 21 and the inner end surface 22T of the right door 22 are closed toward each other. The rectangular opening portion 586 of the storage space member 585 is located in each inner end surface portion 21T, and the storage space member 585 of the board assembly 500M is located inside the left door 21 and the right door 22 . The substrate assembly 500M is inserted into the storage space member 585 from the opening 586 to be stored.
开口部分586在收纳了基板组装体500M后,利用盖部件590封闭。在该盖部件590的内表面配置有铝箔带、铁板这样的金属体591。金属体591限制接近传感器560产生的作为人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场,且是变更接近传感器560的检测范围的有效范围的变更机构。作为检测范围的有效范围变更机构的金属体591配置于作为相邻移动机构的左门21与右门22之间。The opening portion 586 is closed by the cover member 590 after the substrate assembly 500M is accommodated. A metal body 591 such as an aluminum foil strip or an iron plate is disposed on the inner surface of the cover member 590 . The metal body 591 restricts the electromagnetic field generated by the proximity sensor 560 as the effective range of the detection range of the human body, and is a changing mechanism for changing the effective range of the detection range of the proximity sensor 560 . The metal body 591 serving as an effective range changing mechanism of the detection range is disposed between the left door 21 and the right door 22 serving as adjacent moving mechanisms.
通过像这样将金属体591配置于盖部件590,金属体591在左门21与右门22之间截断电磁场。因此,左门21的接近传感器560的电磁场和保护电极570的电磁场不会对右门22的接近传感器560和保护电极570的电磁场产生影响。而且,来自右门22的接近传感器560的电磁场和保护电极570的电磁场不会对左门21的接近传感器560和保护电极570的电磁场产生影响。By arranging the metal body 591 on the cover member 590 in this way, the metal body 591 blocks the electromagnetic field between the left door 21 and the right door 22 . Therefore, the electromagnetic field of the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21 and the electromagnetic field of the guard electrode 570 will not affect the electromagnetic field of the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 of the right door 22 . Furthermore, the electromagnetic field from the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22 and the electromagnetic field of the guard electrode 570 will not affect the electromagnetic field of the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 of the left door 21 .
接下来,参照图48~图50和图54来说明用户打开例如左门21的情况下的动作例。Next, an operation example when the user opens, for example, the left door 21 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50 and 54 .
用户使手指接近图49和图50所示的左门21侧的接近传感器560,从而进入到图49和图50所示的作为人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P时,高灵敏度状态的接近传感器560检测出手指接近了接近传感器560。由此,图54的控制部556接收表示手指接近了接近传感器560的信号SG。When the user makes his finger close to the proximity sensor 560 on the left door 21 side shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 , thereby entering the electromagnetic field 560P shown in FIGS. 49 and 50 as the effective range of the human body detection range, the proximity sensor in a high sensitivity state 560 detects that a finger approaches the proximity sensor 560 . As a result, control unit 556 in FIG. 54 receives signal SG indicating that the finger has approached proximity sensor 560 .
然后,图54的控制部556根据来自该接近传感器560的信号SG,停止对保护电极570的通电,并且,控制部556降低接近传感器560的灵敏度而从“高灵敏度”变更为“低灵敏度”。并且,控制部556通过使LED577亮灯而对接近开关560进行照明,明示接近开关560的位置,使得用户能够通过视觉确认接近开关560的位置。Then, the control unit 556 in FIG. 54 stops the energization of the guard electrode 570 based on the signal SG from the proximity sensor 560, and the control unit 556 lowers the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 from "high sensitivity" to "low sensitivity". And the control part 556 illuminates the proximity switch 560 by turning on the LED577, and clearly shows the position of the proximity switch 560, so that a user can visually confirm the position of the proximity switch 560.
而且,当手指接触接近传感器560时,低灵敏度的接近传感器560起到用于打开左门21的触摸开关(接触开关)的作用,向图54的控制部556发送手指接触了接近传感器560的接触信号SH。由此,控制部556使左门21的开门操作有效,控制部556使开门驱动部54动作,因此能够进行左门21的开门。Moreover, when the finger touches the proximity sensor 560, the low-sensitivity proximity sensor 560 functions as a touch switch (touch switch) for opening the left door 21, and sends a contact signal that the finger touches the proximity sensor 560 to the control unit 556 of FIG. 54 . Signal SH. Accordingly, the control unit 556 enables the opening operation of the left door 21, and the control unit 556 operates the door opening drive unit 54, so that the left door 21 can be opened.
此外,用户打开右门22时的动作例与上述打开左门21时的动作例一样,因此,省略说明。In addition, the operation example when the user opens the right door 22 is the same as the operation example when the user opens the left door 21 described above, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.
这样,在用户以手指接触作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560时,控制部556能够使左门21或者右门22自动打开。In this manner, when the user touches the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a contact sensor with a finger, the control unit 556 can automatically open the left door 21 or the right door 22 .
在用户仅接触接近传感器560时,控制部556使接近传感器560作为触摸传感器(接触传感器)起作用,通过使左门21的开门操作“有效”,进行左门21的开门操作。这对于右门22也一样。When the user only touches the proximity sensor 560, the control unit 556 makes the proximity sensor 560 function as a touch sensor (contact sensor), and performs the opening operation of the left door 21 by enabling the opening operation of the left door 21 . The same applies to the right door 22 .
在用户不慎接触到图51所示的接近传感器560和保护电极570双方的情况下,控制部556不使接近传感器560起到接触传感器的作用,而使左门21的开门操作“无效”,由此,不进行左门21的开门操作。由此,控制部556在用户的例如肘部等不慎接触到接近传感器560和保护电极570双方的情况下,使左门21的开门操作“无效”,能够禁止左门21的开门操作。并且,即使在水滴附着于图54和图51所示的接近传感器560和保护电极570双方的情况下,控制部556通过不使接近传感器560作为接触传感器起作用而使左门21的开门操作“无效”,也不进行左门21的开门操作。上述开门操作的禁止对于右门22也一样。When the user accidentally touches both the proximity sensor 560 and the protective electrode 570 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the door opening operation of the left door 21 is not performed. Accordingly, when the user's elbow touches both the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 accidentally, the control unit 556 disables the opening operation of the left door 21 and prohibits the opening operation of the left door 21 . And, even if water droplets adhere to both the proximity sensor 560 and the protective electrode 570 shown in FIGS. Invalid", the door opening operation of the left door 21 is not performed either. The prohibition of the above-mentioned door opening operation is the same for the right door 22 .
此外,在例如用户的肘部同时接触图54和图51所示的保护电极570和中间区域部分589双方的情况下,能够使门21的开门操作“有效”而进行左门21的开门操作。这对于右门22也一样。In addition, for example, when the user's elbow touches both the guard electrode 570 and the intermediate region portion 589 shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. The same applies to the right door 22 .
如上所述,具有玻璃制前面板21A、22A的对开式的左门21和右门22分别具有静电触摸型接触传感器,该静电触摸型接触传感器用作检测人体的手指等的接近的接近传感器560。如图51所示,基板553中,在作为静电触摸用电极的接近传感器560的周围,保护电极570配置成以与接近传感器560具有间隔的方式包围接近传感器560。As described above, the two-fold type left door 21 and right door 22 having glass front panels 21A, 22A each have an electrostatic touch type contact sensor serving as a proximity sensor that detects the approach of a finger or the like of a human body. 560. As shown in FIG. 51 , on the substrate 553 , around the proximity sensor 560 serving as an electrode for electrostatic touch, the guard electrode 570 is disposed so as to surround the proximity sensor 560 at a distance from the proximity sensor 560 .
该保护电极570是在人体接近时,用于变更接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的检测范围的有效范围变更机构。保护电极570产生与接近传感器560检测人体的接近时产生的电磁场相反方向的电磁场。The guard electrode 570 is an effective range change mechanism for changing the detection range of the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 when a human body approaches. The guard electrode 570 generates an electromagnetic field in a direction opposite to the electromagnetic field generated when the proximity sensor 560 detects the approach of a human body.
由此,保护电极570对接近传感器560检测人体的接近时产生的电磁场在上下方向、左右方向上进行限制,如图49和图50所示,限制接近传感器560产生的接近检测用电磁场的扩展范围。因此,接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P(接近检测范围)仅限制在接近传感器560的正面前方方向。Thus, the guard electrode 570 limits the electromagnetic field generated when the proximity sensor 560 detects the proximity of the human body in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. As shown in FIGS. . Therefore, the electromagnetic field 560P (proximity detection range) generated by the proximity sensor 560 is limited only in the front front direction of the proximity sensor 560 .
因此,在具有左门21和右门22的对开式的冰箱的情况下,利用例如左门21的开门关门,能够防止右门22的接近传感器560误检测,利用右门22的开门关门,能够防止左门21的接近传感器560误检测。Therefore, in the case of a side-by-side refrigerator with the left door 21 and the right door 22, for example, the opening and closing of the left door 21 can prevent false detection by the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22, and the opening and closing of the right door 22 can Misdetection by the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21 can be prevented.
另外,在不是对开式冰箱而是单开门式冰箱的情况下,在人体或者物体来到冰箱的侧面的情况下,能够防止门的接近传感器不慎误检测出该人体或者物体。In addition, in the case of a single-door refrigerator instead of a side-by-side refrigerator, when a human body or an object comes to the side of the refrigerator, the proximity sensor of the door can prevent the human body or object from being inadvertently and erroneously detected.
第31实施方式Thirty-first embodiment
图56是表示第31实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。Fig. 56 is a front view showing refrigerator 1 according to the thirty-first embodiment.
如图56所示,一对左门21和右门22以能够开闭的方式覆盖冰箱1的冷藏室12的前表面开口部。因此,左门21、右门22分别在作为冰箱主体的箱体11的左端部、右端部的上下利用铰链部安装成以对开式进行开闭。As shown in FIG. 56 , a pair of left door 21 and right door 22 cover the front opening of refrigerator compartment 12 of refrigerator 1 in an openable and closable manner. Therefore, the left door 21 and the right door 22 are attached to the upper and lower sides of the left end portion and the right end portion of the cabinet 11 which is the main body of the refrigerator, respectively, by hinge portions so as to open and close in a split style.
左门21和右门22都是以下隔热构造部件:在前表面开口的扁平内板的开口部安装有着色透明的玻璃制前面板21A、22A,并且在内部空洞部配置有真空隔热材料,在未被真空隔热材料填埋的空洞部配置有泡沫聚氨酯隔热材料(以下也简称为聚氨酯隔热材料)或者预成型的固体隔热材料(例如EPC)。Both the left door 21 and the right door 22 are thermally insulating structural members in which colored and transparent glass front panels 21A and 22A are attached to the opening of the flat inner panel with the front surface open, and a vacuum heat insulating material is placed in the internal cavity. , A foamed polyurethane heat insulating material (hereinafter referred to simply as a polyurethane heat insulating material) or a preformed solid heat insulating material (such as EPC) is disposed in the cavity that is not filled with the vacuum heat insulating material.
如图56所示,一对开门操作部651、652分别设置于左门21的前面板21A、右门22的前面板22A的背面侧的下边附近。能够通过用户的手指从前面板21A的表面对开门操作部651、652进行触摸操作。开门操作部651具有静电电容式接近传感器607和静电电容式触控按键的电极633。开门操作部652具有静电电容式接近传感器608和静电电容式触控按键的电极633。接近传感器607配置于触控按键的电极633的上侧,接近传感器608配置于触控按键的电极633的上侧。As shown in FIG. 56 , a pair of door opening operation parts 651 and 652 are respectively provided in the vicinity of the lower sides of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 and the front panel 22A of the right door 22 on the back side. The door opening operation parts 651 and 652 can be touch-operated from the surface of the front panel 21A with a user's finger. The door opening operation part 651 has a capacitive proximity sensor 607 and an electrode 633 of a capacitive touch key. The door opening operation part 652 has a capacitive proximity sensor 608 and an electrode 633 of a capacitive touch key. The proximity sensor 607 is disposed above the electrode 633 of the touch key, and the proximity sensor 608 is disposed above the electrode 633 of the touch key.
另外,在左门21的前面板21A的背面侧设置有静电电容式控制操作部650,控制操作部650用于通过用户的手指从前面板21A的表面进行触摸操作来操作冰箱。Also, on the back side of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 is provided a capacitive control operation unit 650 for operating the refrigerator by touching the front panel 21A with a user's finger.
该控制操作部650上设置有:用于检测例如冰箱周围的环境状态的红外线受光部、控制按键(控制开关)650CS和HOME按键(HOME开关)650HS、检测出对该HOME按键650HS的触摸并对操作按键名、冷却功能名、冷却强度等进行透过显示的LED显示灯、对温度值等变化的数值进行透过显示的7段LED显示装置等。The control operation part 650 is provided with: an infrared light receiving part for detecting, for example, the environmental state around the refrigerator, a control button (control switch) 650CS, and a HOME button (HOME switch) 650HS; LED display lights for transparent display of operation button names, cooling function names, cooling strength, etc., 7-segment LED display devices for transparent display of changing values such as temperature values, etc.
如图56所示,开门驱动部54、55分别设置于箱体11的顶板上表面的前端附近的左右部位,且是与左门21、右门22的上边的开放侧端部附近对应的位置。As shown in FIG. 56, the door-opening drive parts 54, 55 are respectively provided at the left and right parts near the front end of the upper surface of the top plate of the box body 11, and are positions corresponding to the vicinity of the open side ends of the upper sides of the left door 21 and the right door 22. .
这些开门驱动部54、55是使左门21、右门22分别强制性地进行开门动作的开门装置。开门驱动部54、55通过电磁铁将动铁芯54A、55A向前方推出,由此将左门21、右门22各自的开放侧端部附近的上边向前方推出,从而使左门21、右门22强制性地自动开放。These door opening drive units 54 and 55 are door opening devices for forcibly opening the left door 21 and the right door 22 , respectively. The door-opening driving parts 54, 55 push out the moving iron cores 54A, 55A to the front through the electromagnet, thereby pushing out the upper edge near the respective opening side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22 to the front, so that the left door 21 and the right door can be opened. The door 22 is forced to open automatically.
如图56所示,包含一个接近传感器607的开门操作部651配置于左门21的右下位置,包含另一个接近传感器608的开门操作部652配置于右门22的左下位置。包含接近传感器607的开门操作部651配置于左门21的玻璃制前面板21A的内部,包含接近传感器608的开门操作部652配置于右门22的玻璃制前面板22A的内部。As shown in FIG. 56 , a door opening operation part 651 including a proximity sensor 607 is arranged at the lower right position of the left door 21 , and a door opening operation part 652 including another proximity sensor 608 is arranged at the lower left position of the right door 22 . Door opening operation unit 651 including proximity sensor 607 is arranged inside glass front panel 21A of left door 21 , and door opening operation unit 652 including proximity sensor 608 is arranged inside glass front panel 22A of right door 22 .
图57是表示图56所示的左门21的包含接近传感器607的开门操作部651附近(或者右门22的包含接近传感器608的开门操作部652附近)的构造例的V1-V1线处的截面图。图56所示的开门操作部652附近的构造例与图56所示的开门操作部651附近的构造例一样。Fig. 57 shows the V1-V1 line of the left door 21 shown in Fig. 56 near the door opening operation part 651 including the proximity sensor 607 (or near the door opening operation part 652 including the proximity sensor 608 of the right door 22). Sectional view. The structural example of the vicinity of the door opening operation part 652 shown in FIG. 56 is the same as the structural example of the vicinity of the door opening operation part 651 shown in FIG.
如图57所示,在玻璃制前面板21A、22A的内表面侧,通过印刷等配置有遮蔽用片材621。该片材621是为了防止通过前面板21A、22A看到内部而配置的。As shown in FIG. 57 , a masking sheet 621 is arranged by printing or the like on the inner surface side of the glass front panels 21A, 22A. This sheet 621 is arranged to prevent the inside from being seen through the front panels 21A and 22A.
如图57所示,在前面板21A、22A的内表面侧,第1基板631和第2基板632隔着间隔与前面板21A、22A平行地配置。As shown in FIG. 57 , on the inner surface side of the front panels 21A and 22A, the first substrate 631 and the second substrate 632 are arranged in parallel with the front panels 21A and 22A with a gap therebetween.
在配置于前侧的第1基板631的背面,配置有接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)和连接器629,在第1基板631的表面,配置有静电电容式的多个触控按键(电极)633。在第1基板631上形成有多个贯通孔634,各孔634配置于与触控按键633对应的背后位置。接近传感器607、608是具有接近传感器功能的微机。On the back of the first substrate 631 disposed on the front side, a proximity sensor 607 (or a proximity sensor 608) and a connector 629 are disposed, and on the surface of the first substrate 631, a plurality of capacitive touch keys (electrodes) are disposed. )633. A plurality of through-holes 634 are formed on the first substrate 631 , and each hole 634 is disposed at a rear position corresponding to the touch key 633 . The proximity sensors 607 and 608 are microcomputers having a proximity sensor function.
如图57所示,在配置于第1基板631的后侧的第2基板632的表面,配置有多个LED635和连接器636。第2基板632的连接器636通过中继线束628连接于第1基板631的连接器629。As shown in FIG. 57 , a plurality of LEDs 635 and connectors 636 are arranged on the surface of the second substrate 632 arranged behind the first substrate 631 . The connector 636 of the second board 632 is connected to the connector 629 of the first board 631 through the relay harness 628 .
各LED635配置于第1基板631的与各孔634相对的位置。由此,各LED635产生的照明用光LLT能够通过各孔634对触控按键633从背后向前面板21A(22A)侧进行照明。由此,用户能够通过前面板21A(或者前面板22A)和片材621目视确认接近传感器607(608)的位置和各触控按键633的位置。Each LED635 is arrange|positioned at the position which opposes each hole 634 of the 1st board|substrate 631. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the illumination light LLT generated by each LED 635 can pass through each hole 634 to illuminate the touch key 633 from behind to the front panel 21A ( 22A) side. Thus, the user can visually confirm the position of the proximity sensor 607 ( 608 ) and the positions of the touch keys 633 through the front panel 21A (or the front panel 22A) and the sheet 621 .
图58是图56所示的控制操作部650的V2-V2线处的截面图。FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view along line V2-V2 of the control operation unit 650 shown in FIG. 56 .
如图58所示,在玻璃制前面板21A的内表面侧,通过印刷等配置有遮蔽用片材621。该片材621是为了防止通过前面板21A看到内部而配置的。在前面板21A的内侧配置有操作标牌板661、漫射薄膜662、透明电极663、基板664。从前面板21A朝向基板664,操作标牌板661、漫射薄膜662、透明电极663按照此顺序隔着间隔平行配置。漫射薄膜662使搭载于基板664的多个LED665产生的照明用光LLS向前面板21A侧漫射。As shown in FIG. 58 , a masking sheet 621 is arranged by printing or the like on the inner surface side of the glass front panel 21A. This sheet 621 is arranged to prevent the inside from being seen through the front panel 21A. Inside the front panel 21A, an operation sign plate 661 , a diffusion film 662 , a transparent electrode 663 , and a substrate 664 are arranged. From the front panel 21A toward the substrate 664 , the operation sign plate 661 , the diffusion film 662 , and the transparent electrode 663 are arranged in parallel at intervals in this order. The diffusion film 662 diffuses the illumination light LLS generated by the plurality of LEDs 665 mounted on the substrate 664 toward the front panel 21A.
在基板664的表面搭载有多个LED665、导光用遮蔽板666、挠性印刷基板的连接器667。该连接器667通过挠性印刷基板668连接于透明电极663。各LED665配置于两个相邻的遮蔽板666之间,各LED665的照明用光LLS在遮蔽板666的作用下向透明电极663侧照射,在通过透明电极663后,在漫射薄膜662的作用下向前面板21A漫射。由此,用户能够通过前面板21A和片材621目视确认透明电极663的电极位置。On the surface of the board|substrate 664, several LED665, the shielding board 666 for light guides, and the connector 667 of a flexible printed circuit board are mounted. The connector 667 is connected to the transparent electrode 663 via the flexible printed circuit board 668 . Each LED 665 is arranged between two adjacent shielding plates 666, and the illumination light LLS of each LED 665 is irradiated to the transparent electrode 663 side under the action of the shielding plate 666, and after passing through the transparent electrode 663, it is illuminated by the diffusion film 662. Diffuse the lower front panel 21A. Thereby, the user can visually confirm the electrode position of the transparent electrode 663 through the front panel 21A and the sheet 621 .
图59是表示控制部656、控制操作部650、开门操作部651、652、作为开门装置的开门驱动部54、55的电连接的框图。Fig. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical connection of the control unit 656, the control operation unit 650, the door opening operation units 651, 652, and the door opening drive units 54, 55 as door opening devices.
如图59所示,控制部656电连接于控制操作部650、第1基板631和第2基板632、开门驱动部54、55。As shown in FIG. 59 , the control unit 656 is electrically connected to the control operation unit 650 , the first board 631 and the second board 632 , and the door opening drive units 54 and 55 .
在图56所示的冰箱1中,在用户打开冰箱1的左门21(或者右门22)的情况下,如果是昏暗的环境,则难以识别开门操作部651、652的接近传感器607(608)的位置和触控按键633的位置。这样,为了改善难以进行开门操作部651、652的操作,如图57所示,在开门操作部651、652的触控按键633的背面和接近传感器607(608)的背面,搭载有用于提供照明光的作为照明机构的LED635。In the refrigerator 1 shown in FIG. 56, when the user opens the left door 21 (or right door 22) of the refrigerator 1, if it is a dark environment, it is difficult to recognize the proximity sensor 607 (608) of the door opening operation parts 651, 652. ) and the position of the touch button 633. In this way, in order to improve the operation of the door opening operation parts 651, 652 that are difficult to perform, as shown in Figure 57, on the back side of the touch button 633 of the door opening operation parts 651, 652 and the back side of the proximity sensor 607 (608), a device for providing lighting is mounted. Light's LED635 as lighting mechanism.
因此,在用户要用手指对开门操作部651、652的触控按键633进行触摸操作的情况下,静电电容式接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)检测出人的接近。控制部656从接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)接收通知人接近的信号,照明用LED635根据控制部656的指令亮灯。Therefore, when the user tries to touch the touch buttons 633 of the door opening operation parts 651 and 652 with a finger, the capacitive proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608 ) detects the approach of a person. The control unit 656 receives a signal notifying that a person is approaching from the proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608 ), and the lighting LED 635 lights up according to an instruction from the control unit 656 .
由此,用户即使在昏暗的环境下,也能够识别开门操作部651、652的接近传感器607(608)的位置和触控按键633的位置,能够容易操作开门操作部651、652的触控按键633,能够打开左门21(或者右门22)。Thus, even in a dark environment, the user can recognize the position of the proximity sensor 607 (608) of the door opening operation parts 651, 652 and the position of the touch button 633, and can easily operate the touch buttons of the door opening operation parts 651, 652. 633, the left door 21 (or the right door 22) can be opened.
此外,当接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)检测到人的接近时,控制部656从接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)接收通知人接近的信号,因此,图58所示的控制操作部650的照明用LED665根据控制部656的指令而亮灯。In addition, when the proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608) detects the approach of a person, the control unit 656 receives a signal notifying the approach of the person from the proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608). Therefore, the control operation unit 650 shown in FIG. 58 The LED 665 for illumination is turned on according to the instruction|command of the control part 656.
由此,即使用户在昏暗的环境下,也能够识别控制操作部650的位置,能够容易地操作控制操作部650。Accordingly, even in a dark environment, the user can recognize the position of the control operation unit 650 and easily operate the control operation unit 650 .
在用户想用手指从玻璃制前面板21A、22A之上以非接触方式对开门操作部651、652的触控按键633进行触摸操作的情况下,优选,图59的控制部656能够将LED635亮灯时的亮度分成多个级别。When the user wants to touch the touch buttons 633 of the door opening operation parts 651 and 652 in a non-contact manner with fingers from the glass front panels 21A and 22A, it is preferable that the control part 656 of FIG. 59 can turn on the LED 635. The brightness of the lamp hours is divided into several levels.
即、当接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)检测到人的接近时,图59的控制部656使LED635微微亮灯。然后,在用户用手指以非接触方式对开门操作部651、652的触控按键633进行触摸操作,左门21(或者右门22)的开门操作成立的情况下,图59的控制部656使LED635完全亮灯来提高光量。That is, when the proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608 ) detects the approach of a person, the control unit 656 in FIG. 59 lightens the LED 635 slightly. Then, when the user touches the touch buttons 633 of the door opening operation parts 651 and 652 in a non-contact manner with fingers, and the door opening operation of the left door 21 (or right door 22) is established, the control part 656 of FIG. The LED635 is fully lit to increase the amount of light.
之后,用户使手指脱离触控按键633,控制部656使得开门驱动部54(或者开门驱动部55)动作而打开左门21(右门22)。After that, the user releases the finger from the touch button 633, and the control unit 656 operates the door opening driving unit 54 (or the door opening driving unit 55) to open the left door 21 (the right door 22).
由此,在用户用手指对开门操作部651、652的触控按键633进行触摸操作而左门21(或者右门22)的开门操作成立的情况下,LED635从微亮灯变成完全亮灯来提高光量,因此用户能够通过该光量的变更,即,优选,增加光量,来目视确认开门操作的成立。Thus, when the user touches the touch buttons 633 of the door opening operation parts 651 and 652 with fingers and the door opening operation of the left door 21 (or the right door 22) is established, the LED 635 changes from dimly lit to fully lit. To increase the amount of light, the user can visually confirm the establishment of the door opening operation by changing the amount of light, that is, preferably increasing the amount of light.
为了例如用户对冷却控制内容进行变更操作而操作图59所示的控制操作部650。控制部656能够设定成使得图58所示的控制操作部650的LED665亮灯的动作开始时刻(亮灯时机)比使图57所示的开门操作部651、652的LED635亮灯的动作开始时刻(亮灯时机)延迟预定的延迟时间,即两者不同。即、能够变更控制操作部650的LED665的发光方式的时机和开门操作部651、652的LED635的发光方式的时机。For example, the user operates the control operation unit 650 shown in FIG. 59 in order to change the content of the cooling control. The control part 656 can be set so that the operation start time (lighting timing) of turning on the LED665 of the control operation part 650 shown in FIG. The timing (lighting timing) is delayed by a predetermined delay time, that is, the two are different. That is, the timing of the light emission form of LED665 of the control operation part 650 and the timing of the light emission form of LED635 of the door opening operation part 651,652 can be changed.
例如、可以使开门操作部651、652的LED635的亮灯时机早于控制操作部650的LED665的亮灯时机。但是,也可以反过来,使控制操作部650的LED665的亮灯时机早于开门操作部651、652的LED635的亮灯时机。For example, the lighting timing of the LED635 of the door opening operation part 651,652 can be made earlier than the lighting timing of the LED665 of the control operation part 650. However, it is conversely possible to make the lighting timing of the LED665 of the control operation part 650 earlier than the lighting timing of the LED635 of the door opening operation part 651,652.
由此,当接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)检测到人的接近时,不仅可以使开门操作部651、652的LED635亮灯,还可以使控制操作部650的LED665亮灯。Accordingly, when the proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608 ) detects the approach of a person, not only the LEDs 635 of the opening operation parts 651 and 652 but also the LED 665 of the control operation part 650 can be turned on.
如图56所示,在左门21和右门22上,接近传感器607、608的位置配置得比控制操作部650的位置靠下,并且,接近传感器607、608分别配置于开门操作部651、652的触控按键633附近。As shown in Figure 56, on the left door 21 and the right door 22, the positions of the proximity sensors 607, 608 are disposed lower than the position of the control operation part 650, and the proximity sensors 607, 608 are respectively disposed on the door opening operation part 651, 652 near the touch button 633.
由此,通过在用户使手指接近接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)并接触接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)后,直接使手指稍稍下移的移动,能够接触开门操作部651、652的触控按键633,因此对于用户来讲容易操作。Thereby, after the user brings the finger close to the proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608) and touches the proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608), the finger is directly moved down slightly, and the touch of the door opening operation parts 651, 652 can be contacted. Control button 633, so it is easy for the user to operate.
接着,图60示出了在图56所示的左门21的接近传感器607检测到用户手指的接近后,在手指接触了开门操作部651的触控按键633的情况下,左门21的控制操作部650和开门操作部651亮灯的情形的例子。Next, FIG. 60 shows that after the proximity sensor 607 of the left door 21 shown in FIG. 56 detects the approach of the user's finger, when the finger touches the touch button 633 of the door opening operation part 651, the control of the left door 21 An example of a situation where the operation unit 650 and the door opening operation unit 651 are turned on.
在图60(a)中,用户的手指处于还未与接近传感器607完全接近的状态。在该状态下,控制部656为了使作为静电开关的接近传感器607作为“接近传感器”起作用,控制部656将接近传感器607的灵敏度设定为“高”来提高灵敏度,由此,作为“接近传感器”的功能“有效”。In FIG. 60( a ), the user's finger is not completely close to the proximity sensor 607 . In this state, in order to make the proximity sensor 607, which is an electrostatic switch, function as a "proximity sensor", the control unit 656 sets the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 607 to "high" to increase the sensitivity. sensor" function "active".
在该情况下,控制部656使开门操作部651的作为触控按键633的功能的左门21的打开(开门操作)“无效”。并且,控制部656使控制操作部650的亮灯显示和开门操作部651的亮灯显示如虚线所示的那样,为“关闭状态”。并且,控制操作部650的控制开关(控制按键)650CS和HOME开关(HOME按键)650HS的操作(开门操作)功能“无效”。In this case, the control unit 656 “invalidates” the opening (door opening operation) of the left door 21 which is the function of the touch key 633 of the door opening operation unit 651 . And the control part 656 makes the lighting display of the control operation part 650 and the lighting display of the door opening operation part 651 into "OFF state" as shown by a dotted line. And the operation (door opening operation) function of the control switch (control key) 650CS and the HOME switch (HOME key) 650HS of the control operation part 650 is "invalid".
接下来,图60(b)示出了手指HT接近接近传感器607的状态。在该状态下,接近传感器607检测到手指HT的接近,因此,控制部656将接近传感器607的作为“接近传感器”的灵敏度从“高”切换为“低”而降低灵敏度来减弱接近传感器的功能。Next, FIG. 60( b ) shows a state where the finger HT approaches the proximity sensor 607 . In this state, the proximity sensor 607 detects the approach of the finger HT, so the control unit 656 switches the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 607 as a "proximity sensor" from "high" to "low" to reduce the sensitivity and weaken the function of the proximity sensor. .
因此,控制部656使开门操作部651的触控按键633起作用,因此,手指HT从前面板的表面接触触控按键633而进行的左门21的打开操作(开门操作)功能从“无效”变成“有效”。Therefore, the control unit 656 activates the touch button 633 of the door opening operation unit 651, and therefore, the function of the opening operation (door opening operation) of the left door 21 performed by touching the touch button 633 from the surface of the front panel with the finger HT changes from "invalid". into "effective".
并且,控制部656使得控制操作部650的亮灯显示和接近传感器607的开门操作部651的亮灯显示如实线所示的那样,变成“开启状态”,图57所示的LED635和图58所示的LED665例如进行微微亮灯。即、通过图58所示的LED665进行微微亮灯,从背后发光来对控制操作部650进行照明,并且通过图57所示的LED635亮灯,从背后发光来对开门操作部651进行照明。And the control part 656 makes the lighting display of the control operation part 650 and the lighting display of the door opening operation part 651 of the proximity sensor 607 become "on state" as shown by the solid line, LED635 shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. The shown LED665 lights up slightly, for example. That is, LED 665 shown in FIG. 58 is lighted slightly to illuminate the control operation portion 650 from behind, and LED 635 shown in FIG. 57 is lit to illuminate the door opening operation portion 651 from behind.
优选,该亮灯显示时间为亮灯规定的时间例如10秒钟,在该10秒钟期间手指HT不接触开门操作部651的触控按键633的情况下,也可以使LED635、665再次熄灯。Preferably, the lighting display time is a predetermined lighting time, for example, 10 seconds. If the finger HT does not touch the touch button 633 of the door opening operation part 651 during the 10 seconds, the LEDs 635 and 665 can be turned off again.
其中,控制部656可以设定成使得使图58所示的控制操作部650的LED665亮灯的动作开始时刻(亮灯时机)比使图57所示的开门操作部651的LED635亮灯的动作开始时刻(亮灯时机)延迟预定的延迟时间,即两者不同。即、控制部656可以变更控制操作部650的LED665的发光方式的时机和开门操作部651的LED635的发光方式的时机。Among them, the control unit 656 can be set so that the operation start time (lighting timing) of turning on the LED 665 of the control operation unit 650 shown in FIG. The start time (lighting timing) is delayed by a predetermined delay time, that is, the two are different. That is, the control part 656 can change the timing of the light emission form of the LED665 of the control operation part 650, and the timing of the light emission form of the LED635 of the door opening operation part 651.
例如、可以使开门操作部651的LED635的亮灯时机早于控制操作部650的LED665的亮灯时机。但是,也可以反过来,使控制操作部650的LED665的亮灯时机早于开门操作部651的LED635的亮灯时机。通过像这样使亮灯时机不同,能够针对用户以区分开控制操作部650的位置和开门操作部651的位置的方式来进行显示。For example, the lighting timing of the LED635 of the door opening operation part 651 can be made earlier than the lighting timing of the LED665 of the control operation part 650. However, it is conversely possible to make the lighting timing of the LED665 of the control operation part 650 earlier than the lighting timing of the LED635 of the door opening operation part 651. By making the lighting timing different in this way, it is possible to display the position of the control operation part 650 and the position of the door opening operation part 651 so as to be distinguished for the user.
接下来,控制操作部650的控制开关650CS和HOME开关650HS的操作功能开启,从“无效”变成“有效”。Next, the operation functions of the control switch 650CS and the HOME switch 650HS of the control operation unit 650 are turned on and changed from "disabled" to "validated".
接着,在图60(c)中,示出了手指HT接触了开门操作部651的触控按键633的状态。在该状态下,控制部656维持接近传感器607的作为“接触传感器”的灵敏度亦即“低”的状态。控制部656使开门操作部651的作为触控按键633的功能的左门21的打开操作(开门操作)功能维持“有效”不变。Next, in FIG.60(c), the state which touched the touch key 633 of the door opening operation part 651 with the finger HT is shown. In this state, the control unit 656 maintains the "low" state which is the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 607 as a "touch sensor". The control unit 656 maintains the function of the opening operation (door opening operation) of the left door 21 as the function of the touch button 633 of the door opening operation unit 651 to be “valid”.
接下来,控制操作部650的控制按键(控制开关)650CS和HOME按键(HOME开关)650HS的操作功能开启,变成“有效”,因此能够操作。Next, the operation functions of the control button (control switch) 650CS and the HOME button (HOME switch) 650HS of the control operation unit 650 are turned on and become "valid", so that they can be operated.
并且,控制部656使得控制操作部650的亮灯显示和接近传感器607的开门操作部651的亮灯显示如实线所示的那样,维持“开启状态”。Then, the control unit 656 keeps the lighting display of the control operation unit 650 and the lighting display of the door opening operation unit 651 of the proximity sensor 607 in the “on state” as indicated by the solid line.
在该情况下,优选,图60(b)的控制操作部650的亮灯显示的光量和接近传感器607的开门操作部651的亮灯显示的光量比较小,进行微微亮灯。但是,在图60(c)的手指HT接触时,控制操作部650的亮灯显示的光量和开门操作部651的亮灯显示的光量从微微亮灯起提高,以由更大的光量所进行的完全亮灯来发光。In this case, it is preferable to slightly light up the light quantity of the lighting display of the control operation part 650 of FIG. However, when the finger HT in FIG. 60(c) touches, the light quantity of the lighting display of the control operation part 650 and the light quantity of the lighting display of the door opening operation part 651 are increased from the slight lighting, so as to be performed by a larger light quantity. The full light to shine.
由此,在用户用手指对开门操作部651的触控按键633进行触摸操作而左门21的开门操作成立的情况下,LED635从微微亮灯变成完全亮灯来提高光量,因此,用户能够通过亮灯量的增加来目视确认开门操作已成立。并且,用户能够更可靠地识别控制操作部650的显示和开门操作部651的显示,并且能够提高耗电的节能效果。Thus, when the user touches the touch button 633 of the door opening operation unit 651 with a finger and the door opening operation of the left door 21 is established, the LED 635 is turned from slightly lit to fully lit to increase the amount of light. Therefore, the user can Visually confirm that the door opening operation has been established by increasing the amount of lighting. In addition, the user can more reliably recognize the display of the control operation unit 650 and the display of the door opening operation unit 651, and the energy-saving effect of power consumption can be improved.
如上所述,在如图60(b)所示的那样使手指HT接近接近传感器607的情况下,以及图60(c)所示的使手指HT接触触控按键633的情况下,控制部656为了进行控制操作部650的照明和开门操作部651的照明,可以像上述那样变更亮灯时的光量来提高光量。As described above, when the finger HT is brought close to the proximity sensor 607 as shown in FIG. 60( b ), and when the finger HT is brought into contact with the touch key 633 as shown in FIG. In order to perform the lighting of the control operation part 650 and the lighting of the door opening operation part 651, the light quantity at the time of lighting can be changed and increased as mentioned above.
之后,在图60(d)中,示出了用户的手指HT脱离了开门操作部52的触控按键633的状态。在该状态下,控制部656使来自开门操作部651的触控按键633的操作信号的输入有效,使开门驱动部54动作,由此,进行相应的左门21的开门控制。由此,左门21能够自动打开。Thereafter, in FIG. 60( d ), a state in which the user's finger HT is separated from the touch button 633 of the door opening operation unit 52 is shown. In this state, the control unit 656 enables the input of the operation signal from the touch button 633 of the door opening operation unit 651 to operate the door opening driving unit 54 , thereby performing the corresponding door opening control of the left door 21 . Thereby, the left door 21 can be opened automatically.
并且,控制部656使得控制操作部650的亮灯显示和接近传感器607的开门操作部651的亮灯显示如实线所示的那样,维持“开启状态”。然后,控制操作部650的控制开关650CS和HOME开关650HS的操作功能关闭,从“有效”变成“无效”。Then, the control unit 656 keeps the lighting display of the control operation unit 650 and the lighting display of the door opening operation unit 651 of the proximity sensor 607 in the “on state” as indicated by the solid line. Then, the operation functions of the control switch 650CS and the HOME switch 650HS of the control operation unit 650 are turned off and changed from "valid" to "disabled".
如上所述,与参照图60说明的左门21的打开动作一样,可以针对使用图56所示的右门22的开门操作部652的右门22的打开动作来进行。As described above, the opening operation of the right door 22 using the door opening operation unit 652 of the right door 22 shown in FIG. 56 can be performed similarly to the opening operation of the left door 21 described with reference to FIG. 60 .
此外,通过左门21的开门操作部651的触控按键633来打开左门21时,能够切换右门22的开门操作部652的触控按键633的功能,使开门操作部652的开关功能无效而不会打开右门22。在相反的情况下也一样。In addition, when the left door 21 is opened by the touch button 633 of the door opening operation part 651 of the left door 21, the function of the touch button 633 of the door opening operation part 652 of the right door 22 can be switched, and the switch function of the door opening operation part 652 is invalid. And can not open right door 22. The same is true in the opposite case.
在用户要用手指以非接触方式对开门操作部651、652的触控按键633进行触摸操作的情况下,优选,图59的控制部656能够改变LED635亮灯时的亮灯色。即、在接近传感器607(或者接近传感器608)检测到人的接近时,图59的控制部656使LED635以作为第1发光色的例如蓝色亮灯。然后,在用户用手指对开门操作部651、652的触控按键633进行触摸操作而左门21(或者右门22)的开门操作成立的情况下,图59的控制部656使LED635以作为第2发光色的例如红色亮灯。When the user wants to touch and operate the touch buttons 633 of the door opening operation parts 651 and 652 with fingers in a non-contact manner, it is preferable that the control part 656 in FIG. 59 can change the lighting color when the LED 635 is turned on. That is, when the proximity sensor 607 (or the proximity sensor 608 ) detects the approach of a person, the control unit 656 in FIG. 59 lights up the LED 635 in blue, for example, which is the first light emission color. Then, when the user touches the touch buttons 633 of the door opening operation parts 651 and 652 with fingers and the door opening operation of the left door 21 (or right door 22) is established, the control part 656 of FIG. 2 Luminous colors such as red lights.
之后,当用户使手指脱离触控按键633时,控制部656使得开门驱动部54(或者开门驱动部55)动作,而打开左门21(右门22)。Afterwards, when the user releases the finger from the touch button 633, the control unit 656 operates the door opening drive unit 54 (or the door opening drive unit 55) to open the left door 21 (the right door 22).
由此,在用户以手指对开门操作部651、652的触控按键633进行触摸操作而左门21(或者右门22)的开门操作成立的情况下,LED635以从蓝色变更为红色的方式来变更亮灯色,因此,用户通过亮灯色的变更能够目视确认开门操作已成立。另外,第1发光色和第2发光色的种类可以任意选择。Thus, when the user touches the touch buttons 633 of the door opening operation parts 651 and 652 with fingers and the door opening operation of the left door 21 (or right door 22) is established, the LED 635 changes from blue to red. Therefore, the user can visually confirm that the door opening operation has been established by changing the lighting color. In addition, the types of the first luminescent color and the second luminescent color can be arbitrarily selected.
另外,在如图60(b)所示的那样使手指HT接近接近传感器607的情况下,也可以使LED635、665闪烁,在使手指HT接触图60(c)所示的触控按键633的情况下,也可以使LED635、665常时亮灯。用户能够目视确认开门操作已成立。In addition, when the finger HT is brought close to the proximity sensor 607 as shown in FIG. Under certain circumstances, LED635, 665 can also be made to always light up. The user can visually confirm that the door opening operation has been established.
此外,图56所示的左门21和右门22是以对开式设置的,左门21处于开门中时,控制部656也可以使右门22的开门操作部652的触控按键633的LED635常时亮灯。同样,在右门22处于开门中时,控制部656也可以使左门21的开门操作部651的触控按键633的LED635常时亮灯。由此,用户即使在昏暗的环境下,也能够目视确认未打开的一侧的右门22(或者未打开的一侧的左门21)的开门操作部的位置,能够容易操作开门操作部。In addition, the left door 21 and the right door 22 shown in FIG. 56 are set in a split type. When the left door 21 is opening, the control part 656 can also make the touch button 633 of the door opening operation part 652 of the right door 22 LED635 is always on. Similarly, when the right door 22 is being opened, the control unit 656 may always light up the LED 635 of the touch button 633 of the door opening operation unit 651 of the left door 21 . Thereby, even in a dark environment, the user can visually confirm the position of the door opening operation part of the right door 22 on the unopened side (or the left door 21 on the unopened side), and can easily operate the door opening operation part. .
上述各实施方式说明的内容可以用于冰箱以外的家电器具,例如洗衣器具、烹调器具等,作为操作部的发明也是有效的。The contents described in each of the above-mentioned embodiments can be applied to home appliances other than refrigerators, such as laundry appliances, cooking appliances, etc., and are also effective as inventions of operation parts.
第32实施方式32nd embodiment
图61是表示第32实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。图62是表示图61所示的冰箱1的俯视图,图63是图61所示的冰箱1的侧视图。Fig. 61 is a front view showing refrigerator 1 according to the thirty-second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a plan view showing refrigerator 1 shown in FIG. 61 , and FIG. 63 is a side view showing refrigerator 1 shown in FIG. 61 .
如图61~图63所示,一对左门21和右门22覆盖冰箱1的冷藏室12的前表面开口部。因此,左门21、右门22分别在作为冰箱主体的箱体11的左端部、右端部的上下利用铰链部安装成以对开式进行开闭。As shown in FIGS. 61 to 63 , a pair of left door 21 and right door 22 cover the front opening of refrigerator compartment 12 of refrigerator 1 . Therefore, the left door 21 and the right door 22 are attached to the upper and lower sides of the left end portion and the right end portion of the cabinet 11 which is the main body of the refrigerator, respectively, by hinge portions so as to open and close in a split style.
左门21、右门22都是以下隔热构造部件:在前表面开口的扁平内板的开口部安装有着色透明的玻璃制前面板21A、22A,并且在内部空洞部配置有真空隔热材料,在未被真空隔热材料填埋的空洞部配置泡沫聚氨酯隔热材料(以下也简称为聚氨酯隔热材料)或者预成型的固体隔热材料(例如EPC)。Both the left door 21 and the right door 22 are heat insulating structural members: colored and transparent glass front panels 21A, 22A are attached to the opening of the flat inner panel with the front surface open, and a vacuum heat insulating material is arranged in the internal cavity. , Arrange foamed polyurethane insulation material (hereinafter referred to simply as polyurethane insulation material) or preformed solid insulation material (such as EPC) in the cavity that is not filled by the vacuum insulation material.
如图61~图63所示,开门操作部551、552分别设置于左门21的前面板21A、右门22的前面板22A的下边附近。开门驱动部54、55分别配置于箱体11的顶板上表面的前端附近的左右部位,且是配置于与左门21、右门22的上边的开放侧端部附近对应的位置。As shown in FIGS. 61 to 63 , the door opening operation parts 551 and 552 are respectively provided in the vicinity of the bottom of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 and the front panel 22A of the right door 22 . The door-opening drive parts 54 and 55 are respectively arranged at the left and right parts near the front end of the upper surface of the top plate of the box body 11 , and are arranged at positions corresponding to the upper open side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22 .
这些开门驱动部54、55是使左门21和右门22分别强制性进行开门动作的开门装置。开门驱动部54、55通过利用电磁铁将动铁芯54A、55A向前方推出,将左门21、右门22各自的开放侧端部附近的上边向前方推出,从而使左门21、右门22强制性地自动开放。These door opening driving units 54 and 55 are door opening devices for forcibly opening the left door 21 and the right door 22 respectively. The door-opening driving parts 54, 55 push out the moving iron core 54A, 55A forward by using the electromagnet, and the upper edge near the open side end of the left door 21 and the right door 22 is pushed forward, so that the left door 21 and the right door can be opened. 22 Mandatory automatic opening.
如图61所示,一个开门操作部551配置于左门21的右下位置,另一个开门操作部552配置于右门22的左下位置。开门操作部551配置于左门21的玻璃制前面板21A的内部,开门操作部552配置于右门22的玻璃制前面板22A的内部。As shown in FIG. 61 , one door opening operation part 551 is arranged at the lower right position of the left door 21 , and the other door opening operation part 552 is arranged at the lower left position of the right door 22 . The door opening operation part 551 is arranged inside the glass front panel 21A of the left door 21 , and the door opening operation part 552 is arranged inside the glass front panel 22A of the right door 22 .
此外,在左门21的前面板21A的内部设置有静电电容式控制操作部650,静电电容式控制操作部650用于通过利用用户的手指从前面板21A的表面进行触摸操作来操作冰箱。该控制操作部650在左门21上,配置于开门操作部551的上部位置。Also, inside the front panel 21A of the left door 21 is provided a capacitive control operation unit 650 for operating the refrigerator by touch operation with a user's finger from the surface of the front panel 21A. The control operation unit 650 is disposed above the door opening operation unit 551 on the left door 21 .
在该控制操作部650上设置有:用于检测例如冰箱周围的环境状态的红外线受光部、控制按键(控制开关)650CS和HOME按键(HOME开关)650HS、检测出对该HOME按键650HS的触摸并对操作按键名、冷却功能名、冷却强度等进行透过显示的LED显示灯、对温度值等变化的数值进行透过显示的7段LED显示装置等。The control operation unit 650 is provided with an infrared light receiving unit for detecting, for example, the environmental state around the refrigerator, a control button (control switch) 650CS, and a HOME button (HOME switch) 650HS, which detects a touch of the HOME button 650HS and LED display lamps for transparent display of operation key names, cooling function names, cooling strength, etc., 7-segment LED display devices for transparent display of changing numerical values such as temperature values, etc.
图64示出了图61所示的开门操作部551的基板553的构造例。图65是表示配置于图64所示的开门操作部551的基板553的接近传感器560和保护电极570的图。图66是表示开门操作部551的构造例的分解立体图。FIG. 64 shows a configuration example of a substrate 553 of the door opening operation unit 551 shown in FIG. 61 . FIG. 65 is a diagram showing proximity sensor 560 and guard electrode 570 disposed on substrate 553 of door opening operation unit 551 shown in FIG. 64 . FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing a structural example of the door opening operation unit 551 .
图61所示的开门操作部551和开门操作部552具有同样的构造,但是,是左右对称形状。图64示出了开门操作部551的基板553的形状例,但是,开门操作部552和开门操作部551实质上是同样的形状,因此,参照图64~图66,以开门操作部551的基板553为代表进行说明。The door-opening operation part 551 and the door-opening operation part 552 shown in FIG. 61 have the same structure, however, it is a left-right symmetrical shape. Fig. 64 has shown the shape example of the substrate 553 of the door-opening operation part 551, but, the door-opening operation part 552 and the door-opening operation part 551 are substantially the same shape, therefore, with reference to Fig. 64~Fig. 553 for the representative to explain.
首先,参照图66,开门操作部551具有:基板组装体500M、用于收纳基板组装体500M的被称为开口盒体的塑料制收纳空间部件585、以及塑料制盖部件590。在塑料制收纳空间部件585的背面585R,优选粘贴作为金属体的例如铝箔。在塑料制盖部件590的内表面粘贴铝箔等金属体591。由此,冰箱1的主体侧产生的电磁铁不会对基板组装体500M侧产生影响。First, referring to FIG. 66 , door opening operation unit 551 has substrate assembly 500M, plastic storage space member 585 called an open box for accommodating substrate assembly 500M, and plastic cover member 590 . On the back surface 585R of the storage space member 585 made of plastic, it is preferable to stick, for example, aluminum foil as a metal body. A metal body 591 such as aluminum foil is attached to the inner surface of the plastic lid member 590 . Accordingly, the electromagnet generated on the main body side of the refrigerator 1 does not affect the board assembly 500M side.
基板组装体500M具有:塑料制遮蔽板599、基板553、操作标牌板597、搭载有显示用LED557的LED基板598。基板553是静电触摸开关基板,固定于遮蔽板599的前表面侧。在基板553的前表面侧配置有操作标牌板597。在遮蔽板599的背面侧固定有显示用LED基板598。在该LED基板598上搭载有多个LED577。The substrate assembly 500M has a plastic shielding plate 599, a substrate 553, an operation signboard 597, and an LED substrate 598 on which LEDs 557 for display are mounted. The substrate 553 is an electrostatic touch switch substrate, and is fixed to the front side of the shielding plate 599 . An operation sign plate 597 is disposed on the front side of the base plate 553 . A display LED board 598 is fixed to the back side of the shielding plate 599 . A plurality of LEDs 577 are mounted on the LED substrate 598 .
在基板553与操作标牌板597对应的位置,形成有左右狭缝574、575。该基板组装体500M通过作为收纳空间部件585的长方形插入口的开口部分586而收纳于收纳空间部件585内。收纳空间部件585的开口部分586被盖部件590覆盖。Left and right slits 574 and 575 are formed at positions corresponding to the operation plate 597 on the base plate 553 . This substrate assembly 500M is accommodated in the storage space member 585 through the opening portion 586 which is a rectangular insertion opening of the storage space member 585 . The opening portion 586 of the storage space member 585 is covered with a cover member 590 .
如图64(a)和图65所示,开门操作部551的基板553是长方形或者正方形,基板553具有图64(a)所示的表面553A和图64(b)所示的背面553B。在基板553上设置有电子部件的搭载部分571、以及接近传感器560和保护电极570的配置部分572。图1所示的开门操作部551的基板553和开门操作部552的基板553优选采用左右对称形状,可以制作成通用部件。As shown in Figure 64 (a) and Figure 65, the base plate 553 of the door opening operation part 551 is rectangular or square, and the base plate 553 has the surface 553A shown in Figure 64 (a) and the back side 553B shown in Figure 64 (b). A mounting portion 571 of electronic components and a placement portion 572 of the proximity sensor 560 and the protective electrode 570 are provided on the substrate 553 . The base plate 553 of the door opening operation part 551 shown in FIG. 1 and the base plate 553 of the door opening operation part 552 are preferably bilaterally symmetrical, and can be made into common components.
图64(b)所示的背面553B侧的电子部件的搭载部分571在下端部分具有第1台阶部553M和第2台阶部553N。背面553B侧的电子部件的搭载部分571的下端部分形成为台阶状。The mounting part 571 of the electronic component on the back surface 553B side shown in FIG.64(b) has the 1st step part 553M and the 2nd step part 553N in a lower end part. The lower end portion of the electronic component mounting portion 571 on the rear surface 553B side is formed in a stepped shape.
并且,在背面553B侧的电子部件的搭载部分571上,搭载有2个连接器部件CC1、CC2、未图示的微机等电子部件等。连接器部件CC1配置于第1台阶部553M,连接器部件CC2配置于第2台阶部553N。In addition, electronic components such as two connector components CC1 and CC2 , an unshown microcomputer, and the like are mounted on the electronic component mounting portion 571 on the rear surface 553B side. The connector member CC1 is arranged on the first stepped portion 553M, and the connector member CC2 is arranged on the second stepped portion 553N.
即、连接器部件CC1和连接器部件CC2在水平方向上并不是并排排列,连接器部件CC1安装于基板553的背面553B的位置相对于连接器部件CC2安装于基板553的背面553B的位置而言,在Z方向(上下方向)上位于下侧的位置。连接器部件CC1沿着第1台阶部553M配置,连接器部件CC2沿着第2台阶部553N配置。That is, the connector component CC1 and the connector component CC2 are not arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and the position where the connector component CC1 is mounted on the back surface 553B of the substrate 553 is relative to the position where the connector component CC2 is mounted on the rear surface 553B of the substrate 553. , at a lower position in the Z direction (vertical direction). The connector member CC1 is arranged along the first stepped portion 553M, and the connector member CC2 is arranged along the second stepped portion 553N.
由此,由于连接器部件CC1、CC2的位置在上下方向上错开,因此在维修时将连接器部件CC1、CC2取下或者安装时,易于使用工具来拆装。Accordingly, since the positions of the connector components CC1 and CC2 are shifted in the vertical direction, it is easy to attach and detach the connector components CC1 and CC2 using a tool when removing or attaching the connector components CC1 and CC2 at the time of maintenance.
此外,由于连接器部件CC1、CC2的位置在上下方向上错开,因此,结露所导致的水容易从连接器部件CC1、CC2之间流下,因此,能够防止:结露所导致的水存留于连接器部件CC1、CC2的部位。此外,由于连接器部件CC1、CC2与基板的背面具有间隔,因此,即使在水存留于收纳部内的情况下,连接器部件CC1、CC2也不会被水弄湿。In addition, since the positions of the connector parts CC1 and CC2 are shifted in the vertical direction, water caused by dew condensation can easily flow down from between the connector parts CC1 and CC2. Therefore, water caused by dew condensation can be prevented from remaining in the The parts of the connector parts CC1 and CC2. In addition, since the connector members CC1 and CC2 are spaced from the back surface of the board, even if water remains in the storage portion, the connector members CC1 and CC2 are not wetted by water.
另外,在基板553的背面553B侧的电子部件的搭载部分571上搭载有2个连接器部件CC1、CC2、未图示的电子部件等,在基板553的表面553A上未搭载电子部件。作为电子部件为例如噪声去除电容器、信号处理用电容器、晶体管、微机等。由于电子部件像这样配置于基板553的表面553A,还配置于背面553B侧,因此,如图66所示,操作标牌板597的内表面不会对电子部件造成影响,能够配置成与基板553的表面553A紧密接合。In addition, two connector components CC1 , CC2 , electronic components not shown, etc. are mounted on the electronic component mounting portion 571 on the back surface 553B side of the substrate 553 , and no electronic components are mounted on the front surface 553A of the substrate 553 . Examples of electronic components include noise removal capacitors, signal processing capacitors, transistors, microcomputers, and the like. Since the electronic components are thus arranged on the front surface 553A of the substrate 553 and also on the back surface 553B side, as shown in FIG. Surface 553A is tightly bonded.
并且,在基板553的背面553B侧的电子部件的搭载部分571配置有2个连接器部件CC1、CC2,通过使连接器部件CC1、CC2、接近传感器560、保护电极570分离配置,防止了来自连接器部件CC1、CC2的噪声影响接近传感器560和保护电极570。In addition, two connector components CC1, CC2 are disposed on the electronic component mounting portion 571 on the back surface 553B side of the substrate 553, and by separating the connector components CC1, CC2, the proximity sensor 560, and the protective electrode 570, it is prevented from being connected. Noise from the detector components CC1 , CC2 affects the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 .
在图64(a)所示的基板533的表面553A侧的配置部分572上配置有作为第1电极的接近传感器560、作为第3电极的保护电极570、作为第2电极的中间区域部分589。接近传感器560位于配置部分572的正中央,保护电极570位于配置部分572的最外侧。中间区域部分589设置于接近传感器560与保护电极570之间。接近传感器560、保护电极570和中间区域部分589是金属电极,但是,彼此电绝缘。作为第2电极的中间区域部分589辅助接近传感器560,具有作为接近传感器的功能。保护电极570变更接近传感器560检测的有效范围。接近传感器560并不是由多个电极构成,而是由1块长方形状的电极构成。由此,可以采用用户利用手指容易进行触摸操作的形状。Proximity sensor 560 as a first electrode, guard electrode 570 as a third electrode, and intermediate region portion 589 as a second electrode are disposed on disposition portion 572 on the surface 553A side of substrate 533 shown in FIG. 64( a ). The proximity sensor 560 is located at the center of the arrangement portion 572 , and the guard electrode 570 is located at the outermost side of the arrangement portion 572 . The middle area portion 589 is disposed between the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 . Proximity sensor 560, guard electrode 570, and intermediate region portion 589 are metal electrodes, however, electrically insulated from each other. The middle region portion 589 as the second electrode assists the proximity sensor 560 and functions as a proximity sensor. The guard electrode 570 changes the effective detection range of the proximity sensor 560 . Proximity sensor 560 is not composed of a plurality of electrodes, but is composed of one rectangular electrode. Accordingly, it is possible to employ a shape that is easy for the user to perform a touch operation with a finger.
此外,如图64(b)所示,在基板553的与配置部分572对应的背面553B上配置有作为第4电极的网状接地图案573。由此,该接地图案573使得来自冰箱主体的噪声不会对接近传感器560产生的电磁场和保护电极570产生的电磁场带来影响。Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 64( b ), a mesh ground pattern 573 as a fourth electrode is arranged on the back surface 553B of the substrate 553 corresponding to the arrangement portion 572 . Accordingly, the ground pattern 573 prevents noise from the main body of the refrigerator from affecting the electromagnetic field generated by the proximity sensor 560 and the electromagnetic field generated by the guard electrode 570 .
如图64(a)和图65所示,在接近传感器560的中央位置形成有通孔560C。在该通孔560C上,如图64(b)所示,连接有导线图案560H。该导线图案560H通过连结部分560A部分连接于通孔560C。导线图案560H配置成通过作为狭缝574、575以外的部位的连结部分560A的背面侧部分。该连结部分560A在后面说明。As shown in FIGS. 64( a ) and 65 , a through hole 560C is formed at the center of the proximity sensor 560 . Conductive pattern 560H is connected to this via hole 560C as shown in FIG. 64( b ). The conductive pattern 560H is partially connected to the via hole 560C through the connecting portion 560A. Conductive pattern 560H is arranged so as to pass through the back side portion of connection portion 560A which is a portion other than slits 574 and 575 . This connecting portion 560A will be described later.
用户用手指按压接近传感器560(接触)的行为,通常是以接近传感器560的正中为目标进行的,因此,通孔560C形成于接近传感器560的正中位置。When the user presses (touches) the proximity sensor 560 with a finger, the center of the proximity sensor 560 is usually targeted. Therefore, the through hole 560C is formed at the center of the proximity sensor 560 .
使通孔560C像这样形成于接近传感器560的正中位置的理由如下。即、对于接近传感器560而言,形成该通孔560C的中央区域与其它区域相比,开关灵敏度最高。因此,通过用户的手指按压具有通孔560C的接近开关560的正中,能够使手指接触灵敏度最高之处。The reason why the through hole 560C is formed at the central position of the proximity sensor 560 is as follows. That is, for the proximity sensor 560 , the central region where the through hole 560C is formed has the highest switching sensitivity compared to other regions. Therefore, by pressing the center of the proximity switch 560 having the through hole 560C with the user's finger, the finger can be brought into contact with the most sensitive point.
图64和图65所示的接近传感器560是静电触摸(接触)用电极,是用于在图62和图63所示的左门21和右门22的正面(前表面)方向,在例如约100mm处检测出人体或者物体的接近的静电电容式检测机构。该接近传感器560在用户的人体的一部分具体而言例如手指接近时,检测该手指的接近。接近传感器560是静电电容式触摸传感器,可以使用交互电容方式触摸传感器或自我电容方式触摸传感器。The proximity sensor 560 shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 is an electrode for electrostatic touch (contact), and is used in the front (front surface) direction of the left door 21 and the right door 22 shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. Capacitive detection mechanism that detects the approach of a human body or object at a distance of 100mm. The proximity sensor 560 detects the approach of a finger when a part of the user's body, for example, a finger approaches. The proximity sensor 560 is an electrostatic capacitive touch sensor, and an interactive capacitive touch sensor or a self-capacitive touch sensor can be used.
对于交互电容方式而言,由1个发送电极和1个接收电极构成,当向发送电极提供电流时,生成电磁场,电磁场被接收电极接收。例如人体的手指接近接近传感器560的检测区域时,电磁场的一部分被吸收而被接收电极接收,检测出的能量的量减少,使得接近传感器560能够检测出手指的接近。In the mutual capacitance method, it consists of one transmitting electrode and one receiving electrode, and when an electric current is supplied to the transmitting electrode, an electromagnetic field is generated, and the electromagnetic field is received by the receiving electrode. For example, when a finger of a human body approaches the detection area of the proximity sensor 560 , part of the electromagnetic field is absorbed and received by the receiving electrode, and the amount of detected energy decreases, so that the proximity sensor 560 can detect the approach of the finger.
对于自我电容方式而言,具有杂散电容的电极(接近传感器560)需要1个。电极(接近传感器560)的杂散电容受到位于该电极(接近传感器560)与其周围的导电体(人体的手指)之间的寄生电容影响。人体的手指接近接近传感器560时,受寄生电容的影响而使得杂散电容的值增加,通过测量该增加的杂散电容,接近传感器560能够检测出手指的接近。For the self-capacitance method, one electrode (proximity sensor 560 ) having stray capacitance is required. The stray capacitance of an electrode (proximity sensor 560 ) is affected by the parasitic capacitance between the electrode (proximity sensor 560 ) and its surrounding conductors (fingers of the human body). When a human finger approaches the proximity sensor 560 , the value of the stray capacitance increases due to the influence of the parasitic capacitance. By measuring the increased stray capacitance, the proximity sensor 560 can detect the approach of the finger.
如图64和图65所示,接近传感器560是形成为例如纵向长的长方形状的开关,狭缝574、575以包围电极的方式形成于接近传感器560的周围。即、狭缝574、575以包围接近传感器560的周围的方式沿着Z方向形成。由此,通过设置狭缝574、575,容易知道接近传感器560的位置。如图65所示,在该狭缝574、575上覆盖有例如透明薄膜体576,在透明薄膜体576上隔着间隔形成有多个作为照明装置起作用的发光元件亦即LED577。As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 , proximity sensor 560 is, for example, a vertically long rectangular switch, and slits 574 and 575 are formed around proximity sensor 560 so as to surround the electrodes. That is, the slits 574 and 575 are formed along the Z direction so as to surround the proximity sensor 560 . Thus, by providing the slits 574 and 575, the position of the proximity sensor 560 can be easily known. As shown in FIG. 65 , the slits 574 and 575 are covered with, for example, a transparent film 576 , and a plurality of LEDs 577 which are light-emitting elements functioning as lighting devices are formed at intervals on the transparent film 576 .
其中,如图65所示,多个LED577中的与狭缝574、575的4个角部576R对应的4个LED577配置于从狭缝574、575内偏离开的外侧位置。通过如此设置,与4个角部576R对应的4个LED577产生的照明光以不会对狭缝574、575产生影响的方式进行照射。However, as shown in FIG. 65 , among the plurality of LEDs 577 , four LEDs 577 corresponding to the four corners 576R of the slits 574 and 575 are arranged at positions outside the slits 574 and 575 . By providing in this way, the illumination light by four LED577 corresponding to four corner part 576R is irradiated so that the slits 574 and 575 may not be affected.
如图65所示,接近传感器560的一端部通过连结部分560A连结于配置部分572,接近传感器560的另一端部通过连结部分560B连结于配置部分572。这些连结部分560A、560B以将接近传感器560和其周围部分亦即中间区域部分589连接起来的方式进行连结,也称为“桥”。连结部分560A、560B以避开的方式设置于上述配置有LED577的部位以外的位置。由此,连结部分560A、560B不会妨碍LED577的照明光。As shown in FIG. 65 , one end of the proximity sensor 560 is connected to the placement portion 572 via the connection portion 560A, and the other end of the proximity sensor 560 is connected to the placement portion 572 via the connection portion 560B. These connecting portions 560A and 560B are connected so as to connect the proximity sensor 560 and the intermediate region portion 589 which is the surrounding portion thereof, and are also referred to as “bridges”. Connection parts 560A, 560B are provided in the position other than the said location where LED577 is arrange|positioned so that it may avoid. Thereby, connection part 560A, 560B does not obstruct the illumination light of LED577.
在接近传感器560的中央部形成有电连接用通孔560C。像这样在接近传感器560的中央部分形成通孔560C,如已经说明的那样,设置有通孔560C的接近传感器560的区域部分与其它区域部分相比,检测灵敏度高。用户的手指接近并接触的区域部分是接近传感器560的中央部分,因此,将通孔560C设置于接近传感器560的中央部分。A through hole 560C for electrical connection is formed in the center portion of the proximity sensor 560 . Through-hole 560C is thus formed in the central portion of proximity sensor 560 . As already described, the region of proximity sensor 560 in which through-hole 560C is provided has higher detection sensitivity than other regions. The portion of the area where the user's finger approaches and contacts is the central portion of the proximity sensor 560 , and therefore, the through hole 560C is provided at the central portion of the proximity sensor 560 .
接下来,对图64和图65所示的保护电极570进行说明。Next, the guard electrode 570 shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 will be described.
保护电极570在配置部分572,在接近传感器560和中间区域部分589的周围形成为长方形状的框形。保护电极570是金属体,由一对短边电极部分570A和一对长边电极部分570B构成。保护电极570产生与接近传感器560产生的电磁场相反方向的电磁场。The guard electrode 570 is formed in a rectangular frame shape around the proximity sensor 560 and the middle area portion 589 in the arrangement portion 572 . The guard electrode 570 is a metal body and is composed of a pair of short-side electrode portions 570A and a pair of long-side electrode portions 570B. The guard electrode 570 generates an electromagnetic field in a direction opposite to that generated by the proximity sensor 560 .
由此,如图62和图63所示,接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P的扩展被保护电极570产生的相反方向的电磁场抑制。因此,通过由保护电极570产生的电磁场抑制接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P的扩展,保护电极570起到变更人体检测范围的有效范围的检测范围的有效范围变更机构的作用。Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 , the spread of the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 is suppressed by the electromagnetic field in the opposite direction generated by the guard electrode 570 . Therefore, the guard electrode 570 functions as an effective range change mechanism that changes the detection range of the effective range of the human body detection range by suppressing the spread of the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 by the electromagnetic field generated by the guard electrode 570 .
保护电极570通过以缩窄的方式变更检测人体的例如手指的接近时的接近传感器560的检测范围,来变更接近传感器560的检测范围的有效范围。具体而言,保护电极570变更接近传感器560的检测范围的有效范围的结果,如图62所示,左门21的开门操作部551的接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P仅被引导到接近传感器560的正面前方方向。同样,右门22的开门操作部552的接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P仅被引导到接近传感器560的正面前方方向。The guard electrode 570 changes the effective range of the detection range of the proximity sensor 560 by narrowing the detection range of the proximity sensor 560 when detecting the approach of a human body such as a finger. Specifically, as a result of changing the effective range of the detection range of the proximity sensor 560 by the guard electrode 570, as shown in FIG. frontal direction. Similarly, the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 of the door opening operation portion 552 of the right door 22 is guided only in the front front direction of the proximity sensor 560 .
因此,如图62所示,接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P以不向左右方向亦即X方向扩展的方式缩窄。Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62 , the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 is narrowed so as not to expand in the left and right directions, that is, the X direction.
并且,如图63所示,左门21的开门操作部551的接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P仅被引导到接近传感器560的正面前方方向。同样,右门22的开门操作部552的接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P仅被引导到接近传感器560的正面前方方向。因此,在图63中,接近传感器560产生的电磁场560P以不向上下方向亦即Z方向扩展的方式缩窄。And, as shown in FIG. 63 , the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 of the door opening operation portion 551 of the left door 21 is guided only in the front front direction of the proximity sensor 560 . Similarly, the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 of the door opening operation portion 552 of the right door 22 is guided only in the front front direction of the proximity sensor 560 . Therefore, in FIG. 63 , the electromagnetic field 560P generated by the proximity sensor 560 is narrowed so as not to expand in the vertical direction, that is, the Z direction.
即、图62和图63所示的接近传感器560的电磁场560P示出人体的检测范围的有效范围,该人体的检测范围的有效范围相当于与和接近传感器560的前方不同的方向的范围(在上下、左右扩展的范围)不同的范围。That is, the electromagnetic field 560P of the proximity sensor 560 shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 shows the effective range of the detection range of the human body, and the effective range of the detection range of the human body corresponds to a range in a direction different from the front of the proximity sensor 560 (in front of the proximity sensor 560). Up and down, left and right expansion range) different ranges.
接着,图67是表示控制部556、开门操作部551、552、作为开门装置的开门驱动部54、55等的电连接的框图。Next, FIG. 67 is a block diagram showing the electrical connection of the control unit 556, the door opening operation units 551, 552, the door opening drive units 54, 55 as door opening devices, and the like.
如图67所示,控制部556电连接于开门操作部551、552的接近传感器560和保护电极570、开门驱动部54、55、多个作为照明装置的LED577。As shown in FIG. 67, the control part 556 is electrically connected to the proximity sensor 560 of the door opening operation part 551,552, the guard electrode 570, the door opening drive part 54,55, and several LED577 as an illumination device.
在控制部556的控制下,将接近传感器560保持于“高灵敏度”状态。手指进入到作为接近传感器560的检测区域的图62和图63所示的电磁场560P时,图67的控制部556从接近传感器560接收手指接近了接近传感器560的信号SG。Under the control of the control unit 556, the proximity sensor 560 is kept in the "high sensitivity" state. When the finger enters the electromagnetic field 560P shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 as the detection area of the proximity sensor 560 , the control unit 556 of FIG.
而且,图67的控制部556在接收到来自该接近传感器560的信号SG时,判断为手指接近了接近传感器560,并停止对保护电极570的通电,并且将接近传感器560的灵敏度从“高灵敏度”变更为“低灵敏度”来降低灵敏度。并且,控制部556在接收到来自该接近传感器560的信号SG时,控制部556通过使LED577亮灯来对接近开关560的周围进行照明,利用照明使接近开关560的位置上浮,使得用户能够以视觉确认接近开关560的位置。Moreover, when the control unit 556 of FIG. 67 receives the signal SG from the proximity sensor 560, it determines that the finger has approached the proximity sensor 560, stops the power supply to the guard electrode 570, and changes the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 from "high sensitivity" to "high sensitivity". " to "Low Sensitivity" to reduce the sensitivity. And, when the control unit 556 receives the signal SG from the proximity sensor 560, the control unit 556 illuminates the vicinity of the proximity switch 560 by turning on the LED 577, and the position of the proximity switch 560 is floated by the illumination so that the user can The position of the proximity switch 560 is visually confirmed.
然后,在手指从接近接近传感器560的状态接触接近传感器560时,接近传感器560作为接触开关起作用,接近传感器560对控制部556发送手指接触了接近传感器560的接触信号SH。由此,控制部556使接近传感器560作为接触传感器起作用,使例如左门21的开门操作有效,控制部56能够使开门驱动部54动作而实际进行左门21的开门操作。对于右门22而言,上述操作顺序也一样。Then, when the finger touches the proximity sensor 560 from the state of approaching the proximity sensor 560 , the proximity sensor 560 functions as a touch switch, and the proximity sensor 560 sends a touch signal SH indicating that the finger touched the proximity sensor 560 to the control unit 556 . Thus, the control unit 556 enables the proximity sensor 560 to function as a touch sensor to enable the opening operation of the left door 21 , for example, and the control unit 56 can operate the door opening driving unit 54 to actually perform the opening operation of the left door 21 . For the right door 22, the above operation sequence is also the same.
由此,用户一边借助LED577所致的照明目视确认一边触摸配置于左门21或者右门22的玻璃面内侧的接近开关560的位置,从而能够打开左门21或者右门22。Thereby, the user can open the left door 21 or the right door 22 by touching the position of the proximity switch 560 arranged inside the glass surface of the left door 21 or the right door 22 while visually checking the position by the illumination by the LED 577 .
如上所述,控制部556通过将接近传感器560的灵敏度从手指接近时的“高灵敏度”切换为“低灵敏度”,使接近传感器560作为接触传感器起作用。手指接近接近传感器560时,控制部556为了使静电开关560作为“接近传感器”起作用,控制部556将接近传感器560的灵敏度设定为“高”,由此,作为“接近传感器”的功能“有效”。因此,控制部556不使接近传感器560作为“接触传感器”起作用,因此,接近传感器560使得开门操作部551、552的作为本来功能的左门21、右门22的打开(开门操作)“无效”。As described above, the control unit 556 makes the proximity sensor 560 function as a touch sensor by switching the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 from "high sensitivity" when a finger approaches to "low sensitivity". When the finger approaches the proximity sensor 560, the control unit 556 sets the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 to “high” in order to make the electrostatic switch 560 function as a “proximity sensor”. efficient". Therefore, the control unit 556 does not make the proximity sensor 560 function as a “touch sensor”, and therefore, the proximity sensor 560 makes the opening (door opening operation) of the left door 21 and the right door 22 of the door opening operation parts 551, 552 as the original function “invalid.” ".
如上所述,使用户的手指接近接近传感器560,当手指进入到作为接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P时,接近传感器560将手指的接近通知给控制部556。然后,当从接近传感器560将手指的接近通知给控制部556时,控制部556进行设定,使得接近传感器560的灵敏度从“高”切换为“低”。并且,控制部556使得接近传感器560的亮灯显示从关闭状态变成开启状态,使得接近传感器560的位置能够被LED577明示。因此,用户能够一边目视确认接近传感器560的位置,一边用手指可靠地接触接近传感器560。控制部556使接近传感器560作为本来功能亦即“接触传感器”起作用,因此,通过由手指接触接近传感器560,左门21或者右门22的打开操作(开门操作)变成“有效”。As described above, when the user's finger is brought close to the proximity sensor 560 and the finger enters the electromagnetic field 560P which is the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 , the proximity sensor 560 notifies the control unit 556 of the finger's approach. Then, when the approach of the finger is notified from the proximity sensor 560 to the control unit 556 , the control unit 556 sets so that the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 is switched from “high” to “low”. Furthermore, the control unit 556 turns the lighting display of the proximity sensor 560 from the off state to the on state, so that the position of the proximity sensor 560 can be clearly indicated by the LED 577 . Therefore, the user can reliably touch the proximity sensor 560 with a finger while visually confirming the position of the proximity sensor 560 . The control unit 556 makes the proximity sensor 560 function as a "touch sensor" which is its original function, so that the opening operation (door opening operation) of the left door 21 or the right door 22 becomes "valid" by touching the proximity sensor 560 with a finger.
上述的左门21的打开操作(开门操作)与右门22的打开操作(开门操作)一样,省略其说明。The opening operation (door opening operation) of the left door 21 described above is the same as the opening operation (door opening operation) of the right door 22, and the description thereof will be omitted.
如图64和图65所示,在接近传感器560的周围配置保护电极570,由此,作为接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P在左门21和右门22的正面方向(前方方向),在例如约100mm的范围内检测出人手或手指的接近。此时,作为接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P通过配置保护电极570而被限制,使得在上下方向和左右方向不进行扩展。As shown in Figure 64 and Figure 65, the guard electrode 570 is arranged around the proximity sensor 560, thus, the electromagnetic field 560P as the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 is in the front direction (front direction) of the left door 21 and the right door 22. direction) to detect the approach of a human hand or finger within a range of, for example, about 100 mm. At this time, the electromagnetic field 560P which is the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 is restricted by disposing the guard electrode 570 so as not to expand in the up-down direction and the left-right direction.
通过如图62所示那样在左右方向(X方向)限制接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的扩展,如图62所示,在要沿着箭头21K所示的轨迹来打开左门21而使手指接近左门21的接近传感器560时,能够不让关闭着的右门22的接近传感器560检测手指。同样,在要沿着箭头22K所示的轨迹打开右门22而使手指接近右门22的接近传感器560时,能够不让关闭着的左门21的接近传感器560检测手指。By limiting the expansion of the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 in the left and right direction (X direction) as shown in FIG. 62, as shown in FIG. When a finger is brought close to the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21, the proximity sensor 560 of the closed right door 22 can prevent the finger from being detected. Similarly, when the right door 22 is opened along the trajectory indicated by the arrow 22K and the finger approaches the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22, the proximity sensor 560 of the closed left door 21 can prevent the finger from being detected.
因此,作为右门22的接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P不会进入到打开作为移动机构的左门21时的轨迹内。同样,作为左门21的接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P不会进入到打开作为移动机构的右门22时的轨迹内。Therefore, the electromagnetic field 560P, which is the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22, does not enter the trajectory when the left door 21, which is the moving mechanism, is opened. Likewise, the electromagnetic field 560P, which is the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21, does not enter the trajectory when the right door 22, which is the moving mechanism, is opened.
由此,能够防止在打开左门21或者右门22时,不打开而关闭着的一侧的右门22或者左门21的接近传感器560不慎误检测出用户的手指或左门21或者右门22。Thus, it can be prevented that when the left door 21 or the right door 22 is opened, the proximity sensor 560 of the closed right door 22 or the left door 21 on the closed side does not accidentally detect the user's finger or the left door 21 or the right hand. door 22.
此外,如图63所示,通过在上下方向(Z方向)限制接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的扩展,在沿着箭头方向拉出作为移动机构的推拉式门23时,作为左门21的接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P和作为右门22的接近传感器560的人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P不会进入到打开推拉式门23时的轨迹内。In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, by restricting the expansion of the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 in the up and down direction (Z direction), when the sliding door 23 as a moving mechanism is pulled out along the direction of the arrow, as the left door The electromagnetic field 560P in the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 of 21 and the electromagnetic field 560P in the effective range of the human body detection range of the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22 will not enter the trajectory when the sliding door 23 is opened.
由此,在打开推拉式门23时,能够防止左门21的接近传感器560和右门22的接近传感器560不慎误检测出用户的手指或推拉式门23。Accordingly, when the sliding door 23 is opened, the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21 and the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22 can prevent the user's finger or the sliding door 23 from being inadvertently and erroneously detected.
图64(a)和图65所示的保护电极570如上所述,保护电极570是金属体,由一对短边电极部分570A和一对长边电极部分570B构成。例如、当水分附着于图61所示的左门21的前面板21A,该水分一直附着到保护电极570的位置的前面板21A,从而保护电极570因水分而检测出静电电容的变化时,图67所示的控制部556使接近传感器560所致的开门驱动部(开门装置)54、55的开门动作无效。The guard electrode 570 shown in FIG. 64( a ) and FIG. 65 is a metal body as described above, and is composed of a pair of short-side electrode portions 570A and a pair of long-side electrode portions 570B. For example, when moisture adheres to the front panel 21A of the left door 21 shown in FIG. The control unit 556 indicated by 67 disables the door opening operation of the door opening driving units (door opening devices) 54 and 55 by the proximity sensor 560 .
具体而言,在例如用户使用湿抹布来擦拭左门21的前面板21A的表面或者右门22的前面板22A的表面时,如果保护电极570检测到水分,则接近传感器560感知到了湿抹布而成为开启状态,即使这样,图67所示的控制部556通过使接近传感器560所致的开门驱动部(开门装置)54、55的开门动作“无效”,也能够使得左门21或者右门22不会乱打开。由此,防止了左门21或者右门22不慎打开。Specifically, for example, when the user wipes the surface of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 or the surface of the front panel 22A of the right door 22 with a wet cloth, if the protection electrode 570 detects moisture, the proximity sensor 560 senses the wet cloth and Even so, the control unit 556 shown in FIG. 67 can make the left door 21 or the right door 22 open by making the door opening action of the door opening driving parts (door opening devices) 54, 55 caused by the proximity sensor 560 "invalid". Will not open randomly. As a result, the left door 21 or the right door 22 is prevented from being accidentally opened.
此外,控制部556在用户用手指接触保护电极570后再接触接近传感器560时,使接近传感器560所致的开门驱动部(开门装置)54、55的开门动作“无效”。进而,控制部556在用户用手指接触保护电极570的同时接触接近传感器560时,使接近传感器560所致的开门驱动部(开门装置)54、55的开门动作“无效”。In addition, when the user touches the protection electrode 570 with a finger and then touches the proximity sensor 560 , the control unit 556 disables the door opening operation of the door opening drive units (door opening devices) 54 and 55 by the proximity sensor 560 . Furthermore, when the user touches the proximity sensor 560 while touching the guard electrode 570 with a finger, the control unit 556 disables the door opening operation of the door opening drive units (door openers) 54 and 55 by the proximity sensor 560 .
由此,防止了在保护电极570误检测出人体的情况下,左门21或者右门22不慎打开。Thus, it is prevented that the left door 21 or the right door 22 is accidentally opened when the protective electrode 570 detects a human body by mistake.
如图61所示,在左门21的前面板21A的内侧设置有控制操作部650,在控制操作部650的下部设置有开门操作部551。因此,在控制操作部650与开门操作部551的接近传感器560之间的位置,配置有开门操作部551的保护电极570的短边电极部分570A。在图64和图65也示出了该短边电极部分570A。As shown in FIG. 61 , a control operation unit 650 is provided inside the front panel 21A of the left door 21 , and a door opening operation unit 551 is provided below the control operation unit 650 . Therefore, short side electrode portion 570A of guard electrode 570 of door opening operation unit 551 is arranged at a position between control operation unit 650 and proximity sensor 560 of door opening operation unit 551 . This short-side electrode portion 570A is also shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 .
由此,在例如用户用湿抹布擦拭左门21的前面板21A的表面的控制操作部650时,该水沿着前面板21A而滴落,并到达保护电极570。在该情况下,保护电极570的短边电极部分570A检测到水分时,接近传感器560感知到了湿抹布而变成开启状态,即使这样,图67所示的控制部556也能够通过使接近传感器560所致的开门驱动部(开门装置)54的开门动作“无效”,而使得左门21不会乱打开。由此,防止了左门21不慎打开。Thus, for example, when the user wipes the control operation portion 650 on the surface of the front panel 21A of the left door 21 with a wet cloth, the water drips along the front panel 21A and reaches the protective electrode 570 . In this case, when the short-side electrode portion 570A of the guard electrode 570 detects moisture, the proximity sensor 560 senses a wet cloth and turns on. Even so, the control unit 556 shown in FIG. The resulting door-opening action of the door-opening drive unit (door-opening device) 54 is "ineffective", so that the left door 21 will not be opened indiscriminately. Thereby, the left door 21 is prevented from being accidentally opened.
另外,图65所示的保护电极570的横向的电极间隙的间隔HF和纵向的电极间隙的间隔RF比人体的手指HT的宽度MF大。保护电极570的横向的电极间隙的间隔HF和纵向的电极间隙的间隔RF优选可以在15mm~75mm的范围内选择。由此,在用户使手指HT接近接近传感器560并接触时,能够防止手指HT不慎接触保护电极570。In addition, the interval HF of the horizontal electrode gap and the interval RF of the vertical electrode gap of the guard electrode 570 shown in FIG. 65 are larger than the width MF of the finger HT of the human body. The interval HF of the horizontal electrode gap and the interval RF of the longitudinal electrode gap of the guard electrode 570 can preferably be selected within the range of 15 mm to 75 mm. Thereby, when the user brings the finger HT close to the proximity sensor 560 and touches it, it is possible to prevent the finger HT from inadvertently touching the protection electrode 570 .
此外,保护电极570的横向的电极间隙的间隔HF和纵向的电极间隙的间隔RF是即使人体的弯曲的肘部碰到也不会接触到保护电极570的大小。这些保护电极570的横向的电极间隙的间隔HF和纵向的电极间隙的间隔RF可以在例如30mm~75mm的范围内选择。通过这样设定保护电极570的大小,即使在用户用双手拿着锅或盘子等,要以弯曲的肘部而不是手指接触接近传感器560来打开左门21或者右门22的情况下,也能够防止肘部同时接触接近传感器560和保护电极570双方。由此,用户能够以手指也能够以肘部打开左门21或者右门22。In addition, the interval HF between the horizontal electrode gaps and the interval RF between the vertical electrode gaps of the guard electrode 570 are of such a size that the guard electrode 570 will not come into contact with the bent elbow of the human body. The distance HF between the horizontal electrode gaps and the distance RF between the vertical electrode gaps of these guard electrodes 570 can be selected within the range of 30 mm to 75 mm, for example. By setting the size of the protective electrode 570 in this way, even if the user holds a pot or a plate with both hands and wants to open the left door 21 or the right door 22 by touching the proximity sensor 560 with a bent elbow instead of a finger, The elbow is prevented from touching both the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 at the same time. Thus, the user can open the left door 21 or the right door 22 with fingers or elbows.
接着,参照图68来说明左门21和右门22的基板553的收纳构造例。图68是表示左门21和右门22的基板553的收纳构造例的图。图68(a)是左门21和右门22的主视图,图68(b)是表示基板553的收纳构造的左门21的内侧端面部21T(右门22的内侧端面部22T)的构造的立体图。图68(c)是表示盖部件590的例子的图。Next, a storage structure example of the base plate 553 of the left door 21 and the right door 22 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 . FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a storage structure of the base plate 553 of the left door 21 and the right door 22 . 68( a ) is a front view of the left door 21 and the right door 22 , and FIG. 68( b ) shows the structure of the inner end surface 21T of the left door 21 (the inner end surface 22T of the right door 22 ) showing the storage structure of the base plate 553. stereogram. FIG. 68( c ) is a diagram showing an example of the cover member 590 .
如图68(a)所示,在关闭左门21和右门22的状态下,左门21的内侧端面部21T和右门22的内侧端面部22T彼此相向。收纳空间部件585的长方形的开口部分586位于各内侧端面部21T,基板组装体500M的收纳空间部件585位于左门21和右门22的内部。基板组装体500M以从开口部分586插入到收纳空间部件585内的方式被收纳。As shown in FIG. 68( a ), when the left door 21 and the right door 22 are closed, the inner end surface 21T of the left door 21 and the inner end surface 22T of the right door 22 face each other. The rectangular opening portion 586 of the storage space member 585 is located in each inner end surface portion 21T, and the storage space member 585 of the board assembly 500M is located inside the left door 21 and the right door 22 . The substrate assembly 500M is housed so as to be inserted into the storage space member 585 from the opening 586 .
其中,在像这样将基板组装体500M插入到收纳空间部件585内来收纳的情况下,如图66所示,基板553的配置部分572侧处于盖部件590侧,电子部件的搭载部分571侧从电子部件的搭载部分571侧插入到开口部分586并到达收纳空间部件585的里侧。However, when the substrate assembly 500M is inserted into the storage space member 585 and stored in this way, as shown in FIG. The mounting portion 571 side of the electronic component is inserted into the opening portion 586 and reaches the back side of the storage space member 585 .
这样,接近传感器560和保护电极570配置于基板553的表面,在基板553的背面设置有电子部件的搭载部分571,在基板553保持于左门21内的状态下,电子部件的搭载部分571位于与位于作为插入口的开口部分586侧的基板553的配置部分572相反一侧。In this way, the proximity sensor 560 and the protective electrode 570 are disposed on the surface of the substrate 553, and the electronic component mounting portion 571 is provided on the back surface of the substrate 553. When the substrate 553 is held in the left door 21, the electronic component mounting portion 571 is located The side opposite to the disposition portion 572 of the substrate 553 located on the side of the opening portion 586 serving as the insertion port.
由此,在将基板组装体500M插入到收纳空间部件585内并收纳的情况下,作业者能够一边目视确认电子部件的搭载部分571的第1台阶部553M和第2台阶部553N的位置,一边将基板组装体500M插入到收纳空间部件585内,因此,能够防止将基板组装体500M误插入到插入方向。Thus, when the substrate assembly 500M is inserted into the storage space member 585 and stored, the operator can visually confirm the positions of the first step portion 553M and the second step portion 553N of the electronic component mounting portion 571 , Since the substrate assembly 500M is inserted into the storage space member 585 while being inserted, it is possible to prevent the substrate assembly 500M from being erroneously inserted in the insertion direction.
开口部分586在收纳了基板组装体500M后,利用盖部件590封闭。在该盖部件590的内表面配置有铝箔带或铁板这样的金属体591。金属体591限制接近传感器560产生的作为人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场,是变更接近传感器560的检测范围的有效范围的变更机构。作为检测范围的有效范围变更机构的金属体591配置于作为相邻的移动机构的左门21和右门22之间。The opening portion 586 is closed by the cover member 590 after the substrate assembly 500M is accommodated. A metal body 591 such as an aluminum foil strip or an iron plate is disposed on the inner surface of the cover member 590 . The metal body 591 restricts the electromagnetic field generated by the proximity sensor 560 as the effective range of the detection range of the human body, and is a changing mechanism for changing the effective range of the detection range of the proximity sensor 560 . The metal body 591 serving as an effective range changing mechanism of the detection range is disposed between the left door 21 and the right door 22 serving as adjacent moving mechanisms.
通过像这样将金属体591配置于盖部件590,金属体591在左门21与右门22之间遮断电磁场。因此,左门21的接近传感器560的电磁场和保护电极570的电磁场不会对右门22的接近传感器560和保护电极570的电磁场侧带来影响。此外,来自右门22的接近传感器560的电磁场和保护电极570的电磁场不会对左门21的接近传感器560和保护电极570的电磁场侧带来影响。By arranging the metal body 591 on the cover member 590 in this way, the metal body 591 blocks the electromagnetic field between the left door 21 and the right door 22 . Therefore, the electromagnetic field of the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21 and the electromagnetic field of the guard electrode 570 do not affect the electromagnetic field side of the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 of the right door 22 . In addition, the electromagnetic field from the proximity sensor 560 of the right door 22 and the electromagnetic field of the guard electrode 570 do not affect the electromagnetic field side of the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 of the left door 21 .
接下来,参照图61~图63和图67对用户打开例如左门21的情况下的动作例进行说明。Next, an operation example when the user opens, for example, the left door 21 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and 67 .
在用户使手指接近图62和图63所示的左门21侧的接近传感器560,并进入到图62和图63所示的作为人体检测范围的有效范围的电磁场560P时,高灵敏度状态的接近传感器560检测出手指接近了接近传感器560。由此,图67的控制部556接收表示手指接近了接近传感器560的信号SG。When the user makes his finger close to the proximity sensor 560 on the left door 21 side shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, and enters the electromagnetic field 560P shown in FIGS. The sensor 560 detects that a finger approaches the proximity sensor 560 . As a result, control unit 556 in FIG. 67 receives signal SG indicating that the finger has approached proximity sensor 560 .
然后,图67的控制部556根据来自该接近传感器560的信号SG,停止对保护电极570的通电,并且控制部556降低接近传感器560的灵敏度,使得从“高灵敏度”变更为“低灵敏度”。而且,控制部556通过使LED577亮灯来对接近开关560进行照明,能够明示接近开关560的位置,用户能够目视确认接近开关560的位置。Then, the control unit 556 in FIG. 67 stops the energization of the guard electrode 570 based on the signal SG from the proximity sensor 560, and the control unit 556 lowers the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 from "high sensitivity" to "low sensitivity". Furthermore, the control unit 556 can illuminate the proximity switch 560 by turning on the LED 577 , so that the position of the proximity switch 560 can be clearly indicated, and the user can visually confirm the position of the proximity switch 560 .
然后,当手指接触接近传感器560时,低灵敏度的接近传感器560作为用于打开左门21的触摸开关(接触开关)起作用,将手指接触了接近传感器560的接触信号SH发送给图67的控制部556。由此,控制部556使左门21的开门操作有效,控制部556使开门驱动部54动作,因此能够使左门21开门。Then, when the finger touches the proximity sensor 560, the low-sensitivity proximity sensor 560 functions as a touch switch (touch switch) for opening the left door 21, and the contact signal SH that the finger touches the proximity sensor 560 is sent to the control system of FIG. Section 556. Accordingly, the control unit 556 enables the door opening operation of the left door 21 , and the control unit 556 operates the door opening driving unit 54 , so that the left door 21 can be opened.
另外,用户打开右门22的情况下的动作例与上述打开左门21的情况下的动作例相同,因此省略说明。In addition, the operation example when the user opens the right door 22 is the same as the operation example in the case of opening the left door 21 described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.
这样,在用户用手指接触作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560时,控制部556能够自动打开左门21或者右门22。In this way, when the user touches the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a contact sensor with a finger, the control unit 556 can automatically open the left door 21 or the right door 22 .
在用户仅接触接近传感器560时,控制部556使接近传感器560作为触摸传感器(接触传感器)起作用,使左门21的开门操作“有效”,由此进行左门21的开门操作。这对于右门22而言也是一样的。When the user only touches the proximity sensor 560 , the control unit 556 makes the proximity sensor 560 function as a touch sensor (contact sensor) to enable the opening operation of the left door 21 to perform the opening operation of the left door 21 . The same applies to the right door 22 .
在用户不慎接触了图64所示的接近传感器560和保护电极570双方的情况下,控制部556不使接近传感器560作为接触传感器起作用,而使左门21的开门操作“无效”,由此,不进行左门21的开门操作。由此,控制部556在用户的例如肘部等不慎接触到接近传感器560和保护电极570双方的情况下,使左门21的开门操作“无效”,能够禁止左门21的开门操作。When the user inadvertently touches both the proximity sensor 560 and the protective electrode 570 shown in FIG. Therefore, the door opening operation of the left door 21 is not performed. Accordingly, when the user's elbow touches both the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 accidentally, the control unit 556 disables the opening operation of the left door 21 and prohibits the opening operation of the left door 21 .
并且,即使在因水滴附着而使得图64所示的接近传感器560和保护电极570双方检测出的情况下,控制部556也不使接近传感器560作为接触传感器起作用,而使左门21的开门操作“无效”,由此,不进行左门21的开门操作。上述的开门操作的禁止对于右门22而言也一样。And, even if both the proximity sensor 560 and the guard electrode 570 shown in FIG. The operation is "invalid", whereby the door opening operation of the left door 21 is not performed. The prohibition of the above-mentioned door opening operation is the same for the right door 22 .
另外,在不是对开式的冰箱而是单开式的冰箱的情况下,人体或者物体来到冰箱的侧面的情况下,能够防止门的接近传感器不慎误检测出该人体或者物体。In addition, in the case of a single-door refrigerator instead of a side-by-side refrigerator, when a human body or an object comes to the side of the refrigerator, it is possible to prevent the door proximity sensor from inadvertently detecting the human body or object.
另外,图64所示的接近传感器560检测用户的手指HT的接近的“接近检测模式”和接近传感器560检测用户的手指HT的接触的作为接触传感器起作用的“静电触摸模式”可以如下这样进行切换。In addition, the "proximity detection mode" in which the proximity sensor 560 detects the approach of the user's finger HT shown in FIG. switch.
如图64所示,作为第1电极的接近传感器560和作为第2电极的中间区域部分589连接于控制部556的微机599C。As shown in FIG. 64 , the proximity sensor 560 as the first electrode and the intermediate region portion 589 as the second electrode are connected to the microcomputer 599C of the control unit 556 .
作为切换模式的情况包括:从上述的“接近检测模式”切换为“静电触摸模式”时、和从“静电触摸模式”切换为“接近检测模式”时。Examples of the switching mode include: when switching from the above-mentioned "proximity detection mode" to the "electrostatic touch mode" and when switching from the "electrostatic touch mode" to the "proximity detection mode".
在从“接近检测模式”切换为“静电触摸模式”时,接近传感器560检测出手指HT的接近后,微机599C切断作为第1电极的接近传感器560与作为第2电极的中间区域部分589的内部连接,仅接近传感器560作为“静电触摸模式”的静电触摸传感器起作用。When switching from the "proximity detection mode" to the "electrostatic touch mode", after the proximity sensor 560 detects the approach of the finger HT, the microcomputer 599C cuts off the proximity sensor 560 as the first electrode and the inside of the middle region 589 as the second electrode. connected, only the proximity sensor 560 functions as an electrostatic touch sensor in "electrostatic touch mode".
相反,从“静电触摸模式”切换为“接近检测模式”时,手指HT脱离接近传感器560,从“静电触摸模式”经过规定时间、例如10秒钟,或者从开门通过关门等进行了复位时,微机599C进行作为第1电极的接近传感器560与作为第2电极的中间区域部分589的内部连接。On the contrary, when switching from the "electrostatic touch mode" to the "proximity detection mode", the finger HT detaches from the proximity sensor 560, and when a predetermined time elapses from the "electrostatic touch mode", for example, 10 seconds, or when the door is reset from opening or closing, The microcomputer 599C performs internal connection between the proximity sensor 560 as the first electrode and the intermediate region portion 589 as the second electrode.
接着,图74(a)、74(b)示出以下情形的例子:针对使手指HT接触第32实施方式的图51和图52所示的作为第1电极的接近传感器560而打开左侧的门21的情况下,进行作为第1电极的接近传感器560与作为第2电极的中间区域部分589的切换,左门21的控制操作部650和接近传感器560亮灯。该情形对于右侧的门22而言也是一样的。Next, Fig. 74(a), 74(b) shows an example of the case where the proximity sensor 560 as the first electrode shown in Figs. In the case of the door 21, switching between the proximity sensor 560 as the first electrode and the middle region portion 589 as the second electrode is performed, and the control operation part 650 and the proximity sensor 560 of the left door 21 are turned on. The same applies to the door 22 on the right side.
图74(a)中,用户的手指是还未完全接近接近传感器560的状态。在该状态中,控制部556为了使作为静电开关的接近传感器560作为“接近传感器”起作用,控制部556使接近传感器560开启而将接近传感器560的灵敏度设定为“高”来提高灵敏度,由此,作为“接近传感器”的功能“有效”。并且,控制部556使中间区域部分589接通而将中间区域部分589的灵敏度设定为“高”来提高灵敏度,由此,作为“接近传感器”的功能“有效”。In FIG. 74( a ), the user's finger is not completely close to the proximity sensor 560 . In this state, in order to make the proximity sensor 560 which is an electrostatic switch function as a “proximity sensor”, the control unit 556 turns on the proximity sensor 560 and sets the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 to “high” to increase the sensitivity. Thus, the function as a "proximity sensor" is "valid". Then, the control unit 556 turns on the middle region 589 to set the sensitivity of the middle region 589 to "high" to increase the sensitivity, whereby the function as a "proximity sensor" is "valid".
在该情况下,控制部556使开门操作部651的作为触控按键633的功能的左门21的打开(开门操作)“无效”。并且,控制部556使控制操作部650的亮灯显示和接近传感器560的亮灯显示为“关闭状态”。然后,控制操作部650的控制开关(控制按键)650CS和HOME开关(HOME按键)650HS的操作(开门操作)功能“无效”。In this case, the control unit 556 “invalidates” the opening (door opening operation) of the left door 21 which is the function of the touch key 633 of the door opening operation unit 651 . Then, the control unit 556 controls the lighting display of the operation unit 650 and the lighting display of the proximity sensor 560 to be “OFF state”. Then, the operation (door opening operation) function of the control switch (control button) 650CS and the HOME switch (HOME button) 650HS of the control operation unit 650 is "invalid".
接着,在图74(b)中示出了手指HT接近接近传感器560的状态。在该状态下,接近传感器560检测出手指HT的接近,因此,控制部556使接近传感器560为开启状态,将接近传感器560的作为“接近传感器”的灵敏度从“高”切换为“低”来降低灵敏度,减弱接近传感器的功能,使中间区域部分589断开。Next, a state where the finger HT approaches the proximity sensor 560 is shown in FIG. 74( b ). In this state, the proximity sensor 560 detects the approach of the finger HT, so the control unit 556 turns the proximity sensor 560 on, and switches the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 as a "proximity sensor" from "high" to "low". Lowering the sensitivity reduces the functionality of the proximity sensor and disconnects the middle region portion 589 .
因此,控制部556使接近传感器560作为接触传感器起作用,因此,手指HT从前面板的表面接触作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560,由此所激发的左门21的打开操作(开门操作)功能从“无效”变成“有效”。Therefore, the control unit 556 causes the proximity sensor 560 to function as a touch sensor. Therefore, the finger HT touches the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a touch sensor from the surface of the front panel, and the opened operation (door opening operation) function of the left door 21 thus activated From "invalid" to "valid".
并且,控制部556使得控制操作部650的LED的亮灯显示和接近传感器560的LED的亮灯显示成为“开启状态”,作为两者的LED亮灯状态,例如进行微微亮灯。即、图58所示的LED665微微亮灯,由此,从背后对控制操作部650进行照明而发光,图52所示的LED577微微亮灯,由此通过狭缝574、575从背后对作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560进行照明而发光。在该情况下,优选,该亮灯显示时间为亮灯规定的时间例如10秒钟,在该10秒钟期间,在手指HT不接触作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560的情况下,也可以再次使得LED635、577熄灯。Then, the control unit 556 turns the LED lighting display of the control operation unit 650 and the LED lighting display of the proximity sensor 560 into an “ON state”, and performs, for example, slight lighting as both LED lighting states. That is, the LED 665 shown in FIG. 58 lights up slightly, thus, the control operation part 650 is illuminated and emits light from behind, and the LED 577 shown in FIG. The sensor function proximity sensor 560 illuminates and emits light. In this case, it is preferable that the lighting display time be a predetermined lighting time, for example, 10 seconds. During the 10 seconds, when the finger HT does not touch the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a touch sensor, it may be Make LED635, 577 light off again.
其中,控制部556可以设定为:使图58所示的控制操作部650的LED665亮灯的动作开始时刻(亮灯时机)比使图52所示的接近传感器560的LED577亮灯的动作开始时刻(亮灯时机)延迟预定的延迟时间,即、使两者不同。即、控制部556能够变更控制操作部650的LED665的发光方式的时机和接近传感器560的LED577的发光方式的时机。例如、接近传感器560的LED577的亮灯时机可以早于控制操作部650的LED665的亮灯时机。但是,相反,也可以使得控制操作部650的LED665的亮灯时机早于接近传感器560的LED577的亮灯时机。通过像这样使亮灯时机不同,能够针对用户,将控制操作部650的位置、接近传感器560和中间区域部分589的位置区分开来显示。Among them, the control unit 556 can be set so that the operation start time (lighting timing) of turning on the LED 665 of the control operation unit 650 shown in FIG. The time (lighting timing) is delayed by a predetermined delay time, that is, the two are made different. That is, the control unit 556 can change the timing of controlling the light emitting mode of the LED 665 of the operation unit 650 and the timing of the light emitting mode of the LED 577 of the proximity sensor 560 . For example, the lighting timing of LED 577 of proximity sensor 560 may be earlier than the lighting timing of LED 665 of control operation unit 650 . However, conversely, the lighting timing of the LED 665 of the control operation unit 650 may be earlier than the lighting timing of the LED 577 of the proximity sensor 560 . By making the lighting timings different in this way, the position of the control operation unit 650 , the positions of the proximity sensor 560 and the intermediate region portion 589 can be displayed separately for the user.
然后,控制操作部650的控制开关650CS和HOME开关650HS的操作功能开启,从“无效”变成“有效”。Then, the operation functions of the control switch 650CS and the HOME switch 650HS of the control operation unit 650 are turned on and changed from "disabled" to "validated".
接着,图74(c)中,示出了手指HT接触作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560的状态。在该状态下,控制部556维持接近传感器560的作为“接触传感器”的灵敏度亦即“低”的状态。控制部556使作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560的功能亦即左门21的打开操作(开门操作)功能维持“有效”不变。并且,作为接近传感器560的LED的亮灯显示的亮灯状态,控制部556变更发光方式,从微微亮灯变成通常的亮灯。Next, FIG. 74(c) shows a state where the finger HT touches the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a touch sensor. In this state, the control unit 556 maintains the "low" state which is the sensitivity of the proximity sensor 560 as a "touch sensor". The control unit 556 keeps the function of the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a touch sensor, that is, the function of opening operation (door opening operation) of the left door 21 "valid". In addition, the control unit 556 changes the light emission mode from dim lighting to normal lighting as the lighting state of the lighting display of the LED of the proximity sensor 560 .
即、图58所示的LED665进行通常的亮灯,由此,从背后对控制操作部650以更加明亮的方式进行照明而发光,并且,图52所示的LED577进行通常的亮灯,由此,通过狭缝574、575从背后对作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560以更加明亮的方式进行照明而发光。即、在图74(c)的手指HT接触时,控制操作部650的亮灯显示的光量和接近传感器560的亮灯显示的光量从微亮灯提高为通常亮灯,以基于更大的光量进行的完全亮灯发光,由此,接近传感器560的亮灯显示变得更加明亮。控制部556使控制操作部650的LED的亮灯状态也从微微亮灯变成通常的亮灯。That is, the LED 665 shown in FIG. 58 performs normal lighting, whereby the control operation portion 650 is illuminated and emitted from behind in a brighter manner, and the LED 577 shown in FIG. 52 is normally lit, whereby , the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a touch sensor is illuminated brighter from behind through the slits 574 and 575 to emit light. That is, when the finger HT in FIG. 74(c) touches, the light quantity of the lighted display of the control operation part 650 and the light quantity of the lighted display of the proximity sensor 560 are increased from the dim light to the normal light, so as to be based on a larger light quantity. The performed complete lighting emits light, thereby making the lighting display of the proximity sensor 560 brighter. The control unit 556 also changes the lighting state of the LED of the control operation unit 650 from dim lighting to normal lighting.
然后,控制操作部650的控制按键(控制开关)650CS和HOME按键(HOME开关)650HS的操作功能开启,是“有效”的,因此能够操作。Then, the operation functions of the control button (control switch) 650CS and the HOME button (HOME switch) 650HS of the control operation unit 650 are turned on and are "valid", so they can be operated.
由此,在用户以手指对接近传感器560进行触摸操作而使得左门21的开门操作成立的情况下,LED577从微微亮灯变成完全亮灯而提高光量,因此,用户能够通过亮灯量的增加而目视确认开门操作已成立。并且,用户能够更可靠地识别控制操作部650的显示和LED577的显示,并且能够提高耗电的节能效果。Thus, when the user touches the proximity sensor 560 with a finger and the opening operation of the left door 21 is established, the LED 577 changes from slightly lit to fully lit to increase the amount of light. Increase while visually confirming that the door open operation has been established. In addition, the user can more reliably recognize the display of the control operation unit 650 and the display of the LED 577 , and the energy-saving effect of power consumption can be improved.
如上所述,在如图74(b)所示,手指HT接近接近传感器560的情况下,在手指HT接触图74(c)所示的触控按键633时,控制部556进行控制操作部650的照明和接近传感器560的照明,因此,能够像上述那样变更提高亮灯时的光量。As described above, when the finger HT approaches the proximity sensor 560 as shown in FIG. 74( b ), when the finger HT touches the touch key 633 shown in FIG. The lighting of the lighting and the lighting of the proximity sensor 560, therefore, it is possible to change and increase the amount of light at the time of turning on the lighting as described above.
之后,在图74(d)中,示出了用户的手指HT脱离作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560状态。在该状态下,控制部556使来自接近传感器560的操作信号的输入有效,来使开门驱动部54动作,由此,进行相应的左门21的开门控制。由此,左门21能够自动打开。接着,控制部556使作为接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560的功能“无效”。After that, in FIG. 74( d ), the state where the user's finger HT is detached from the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a contact sensor is shown. In this state, the control unit 556 enables the input of the operation signal from the proximity sensor 560 to operate the door opening driving unit 54 , thereby performing corresponding door opening control of the left door 21 . Thereby, the left door 21 can be opened automatically. Next, the control unit 556 "disables" the function of the proximity sensor 560 functioning as a touch sensor.
并且,控制部556使控制操作部650的亮灯显示和接近传感器560的狭缝574、575处的LED577的亮灯显示如实线所示的那样,维持“开启状态”。然后,控制操作部650的控制开关650CS和HOME开关650HS的操作功能关闭,从“有效”变成“无效”。Furthermore, the control unit 556 keeps the lighting display of the control operation unit 650 and the lighting display of the LED 577 at the slits 574 and 575 of the proximity sensor 560 in the “on state” as indicated by the solid line. Then, the operation functions of the control switch 650CS and the HOME switch 650HS of the control operation unit 650 are turned off and changed from "valid" to "disabled".
如上所述,与参照图74说明的左门21的打开动作一样,针对使用图56所示的右门22的开门操作部652的右门22的打开动作也可以进行。As described above, similar to the opening operation of the left door 21 described with reference to FIG. 74 , the opening operation of the right door 22 using the door opening operation portion 652 of the right door 22 shown in FIG. 56 can also be performed.
接下来,参照图75来说明接近传感器560检测手指的接触的原理。图75是表示接近传感器560检测手指HT的接触的原理的电路图。Next, the principle of detecting the contact of a finger by the proximity sensor 560 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 . FIG. 75 is a circuit diagram showing the principle of the proximity sensor 560 detecting the contact of the finger HT.
图75所示的接触检测电路888具有:作为接触传感器(Cx)的接近传感器560、调整电容器(Cmod)889、时钟产生源890、IDAC(电流输出数模转换器)891、锁存器892、计时器893、AND(与)电路894、计数器895。IDAC891每次使相同的电流以脉冲方式多次回流到作为接触传感器的接近传感器(Cx)560和调整电容器(Cmod)889,使电荷逐渐积存于作为接触传感器的接近传感器(Cx)560和调整电容器(Cmod)889。到作为接触传感器(Cx)的接近传感器560和调整电容器(Cmod)889成为同电位为止继续积存电荷,计数器895对直到在调整电容器(Cmod)889积存规定电荷为止的脉冲的次数进行计数。The contact detection circuit 888 shown in FIG. 75 has: a proximity sensor 560 as a contact sensor (Cx), an adjustment capacitor (Cmod) 889, a clock generation source 890, an IDAC (current output digital-to-analog converter) 891, a latch 892, Timer 893, AND (and) circuit 894, counter 895. The IDAC891 makes the same current return to the proximity sensor (Cx) 560 as a touch sensor and the adjustment capacitor (Cmod) 889 multiple times in a pulsed manner each time, so that the charge is gradually accumulated in the proximity sensor (Cx) 560 as a touch sensor and the adjustment capacitor (Cmod) 889. The charge continues to be accumulated until the proximity sensor 560 as the touch sensor (Cx) and the adjustment capacitor (Cmod) 889 have the same potential, and the counter 895 counts the number of pulses until a predetermined charge is accumulated in the adjustment capacitor (Cmod) 889 .
手指HT接触作为接触传感器(Cx)的接近传感器560时,作为接触传感器的接近传感器(Cx)560的静电电容增加,因此,流至调整电容器(Cmod)889而积存的电荷变少,到电荷在调整电容器(Cmod)889完成积存为止要花费时间,因此,计数器895所进行计数的脉冲的计数数增多(斜率平缓),因此,其结果是斜率的位移发生变化。以该斜率的位移之差来判定手指的有无。即、在计数器895进行计数的脉冲的计数数从通常的计数数(基础计数)达到超过一定阈值的值时,控制部556判断为手指HT接触了作为接触传感器(Cx)的接近传感器560。When the finger HT touches the proximity sensor 560 as the touch sensor (Cx), the electrostatic capacitance of the proximity sensor (Cx) 560 as the touch sensor increases, and therefore, the electric charge that flows to the adjustment capacitor (Cmod) 889 and accumulates decreases. It takes time for the adjustment capacitor (Cmod) 889 to complete accumulation, and therefore, the count number of pulses counted by the counter 895 increases (the slope becomes gentler), and as a result, the displacement of the slope changes. The presence or absence of a finger is determined based on the difference between the displacements of the slope. That is, when the number of pulses counted by the counter 895 exceeds a predetermined threshold from the normal count (base count), the control unit 556 determines that the finger HT has touched the proximity sensor 560 as the contact sensor (Cx).
接着,对手指HT接触作为接触传感器(Cx)的接近传感器560时的灵敏度的变更方法进行说明。Next, a method of changing the sensitivity when the finger HT touches the proximity sensor 560 as the touch sensor (Cx) will be described.
作为灵敏度的变更方法,在减小IDAC891的电流值时,如果积存于接近传感器(Cx)560的电荷量相同,则充电结束的时间加长,变得平缓。在变平缓时,以相同阈值来进行判断的情况下,灵敏度增高。As a method of changing the sensitivity, when the current value of IDAC891 is decreased, if the amount of electric charge accumulated in the proximity sensor (Cx) 560 is the same, the time to complete charging becomes longer and smoother. When the level becomes flat, the sensitivity increases when the determination is made with the same threshold.
在斜率平缓的状态(电流值小)下,在从手指未接触的状态检测到手指接触了的状态时,斜率的变化增大,容易超过阈值,灵敏度增大。此外,在斜率不平缓的状态(电流值大)下,在从手指未接触的状态检测到手指接触了的状态时,斜率的变化减小,难以超过阈值,灵敏度小。In the state where the slope is gentle (the current value is small), when the finger is detected from the non-finger state to the state where the finger is touched, the change in the slope is large, and the threshold value is easily exceeded, and the sensitivity increases. In addition, when the slope is not gentle (the current value is large), when the finger is detected from the non-contact state to the finger-contact state, the change in the slope is small, it is difficult to exceed the threshold, and the sensitivity is low.
即、与以整个手指接触时首次超过阈值而检测出的状态相比,使电流值减小,由此,即使仅以指尖接触,也能够检测出来,能够提高灵敏度。此外,虽然通过减小阈值也能够提高灵敏度,但是,由于存在噪声也会被检测出来的问题,因此,以上述的灵敏度变更方法变更灵敏度。That is, by reducing the current value compared to the state detected when the entire finger touches the threshold for the first time, even if only the fingertip is touched, it can be detected and the sensitivity can be improved. In addition, although the sensitivity can be improved by reducing the threshold value, since there is a problem that noise is also detected, the sensitivity is changed by the above-mentioned sensitivity changing method.
接着,图76是表示接近传感器的基本构造的图。Next, FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the basic structure of the proximity sensor.
如图76所示,接近传感器560和铜接地569位于被覆层560R与电介质层560D之间,接近传感器560自身的静电电容CP与手指HT的静电电容CF相加后的电容为手指接触时的接近传感器560的静电电容CX。As shown in FIG. 76 , the proximity sensor 560 and the copper ground 569 are located between the coating layer 560R and the dielectric layer 560D, and the capacitance obtained by adding the capacitance CP of the proximity sensor 560 itself and the capacitance CF of the finger HT is the proximity when the finger touches. The electrostatic capacitance CX of the sensor 560 .
在手指HT对接近传感器560进行静电触摸的动作中,检测出手指HT接触时的接近传感器560的静电电容CX的变化。此外,在检测手指HT接近接近传感器560的动作中,检测出手指接近时的接近传感器560自身的静电电容CP的变化。在手指接近时,通过改变接近传感器560自身的静电电容CP,改变接近距离(灵敏度)。在接近时,检测出手指接近所致的微小的静电电容CP的变化。静电电容CP是3维方向的电场,手指处于电场中时,略微发生变化,由此,整个接近传感器的静电电容CX发生变化,通过上述检测能够进行手指的检测。When the finger HT electrostatically touches the proximity sensor 560 , a change in the capacitance CX of the proximity sensor 560 when the finger HT touches is detected. In addition, in the operation of detecting the approach of the finger HT to the proximity sensor 560 , a change in the capacitance CP of the proximity sensor 560 itself when the finger approaches is detected. When the finger approaches, the approach distance (sensitivity) is changed by changing the capacitance CP of the proximity sensor 560 itself. When approaching, a slight change in capacitance CP due to the approach of a finger is detected. Capacitance CP is an electric field in a three-dimensional direction. When a finger is placed in the electric field, it slightly changes, thereby changing capacitance CX of the entire proximity sensor, and the finger can be detected by the above detection.
接下来,图77是针对图74所示的作为第1电极亦即接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560和作为第2电极的中间区域部分589,说明接近模式和静电触摸模式时的切换操作的图。Next, FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating the switching operation between the proximity mode and the electrostatic touch mode for the proximity sensor 560 functioning as the first electrode, that is, the contact sensor shown in FIG. 74 , and the middle region portion 589 as the second electrode. .
如图77所示,作为第1电极亦即接触传感器起作用的接近传感器560和作为第2电极的中间区域部分589连接于多路复用器556R。该多路复用器556R根据控制部556的微机556M的指令,使接近传感器560与中间区域部分589进行内部连接,或者能够解除内部连接。As shown in FIG. 77 , a proximity sensor 560 functioning as a first electrode, that is, a touch sensor, and an intermediate region portion 589 serving as a second electrode are connected to a multiplexer 556R. The multiplexer 556R can internally connect the proximity sensor 560 and the intermediate area portion 589 or disconnect the internal connection according to an instruction from the microcomputer 556M of the control unit 556 .
(1)从接近模式向静电触摸模式切换的切换动作时(1) When switching from proximity mode to electrostatic touch mode
在进行从接近模式向静电触摸模式切换的切换动作的情况下,如图74(a)~图74(b)所示,手指HT接近接近传感器560,接近传感器560检测到手指HT时,从接近模式切换到静电触摸模式。即、根据图77的微机556M的指令,多路复用器556R使接近传感器560与中间区域部分589从内部连接状态变成内部连接的解除状态,切断接近传感器560与中间区域部分589的连接。由此,仅有接近传感器560作为静电接触传感器来使用,由此,中间区域部分589断开,不被使用。In the case of switching from the proximity mode to the electrostatic touch mode, as shown in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(b), the finger HT approaches the proximity sensor 560. The mode switches to electrostatic touch mode. That is, according to the instruction of the microcomputer 556M of FIG. 77 , the multiplexer 556R makes the proximity sensor 560 and the middle area portion 589 change from the internally connected state to the disconnected state of the internal connection, and cuts off the connection between the proximity sensor 560 and the middle area portion 589. Thus, only the proximity sensor 560 is used as an electrostatic contact sensor, and thus the middle region portion 589 is disconnected and not used.
(2)从静电触摸模式向接近模式切换的切换动作时(2) When switching from electrostatic touch mode to proximity mode
相反,进行从静电触摸模式向接近模式切换的切换动作的情况,是从例如静电触摸模式经过10秒钟,或者从门的打开通过门的关闭等被复位的情况。在该情况下,根据微机556M的指令,多路复用器556R从接近传感器560与中间区域部分589的内部连接的解除状态返回到内部连接状态,能够将接近传感器560与中间区域部分589连接起来。Conversely, when switching from the electrostatic touch mode to the proximity mode is performed, for example, 10 seconds have elapsed from the electrostatic touch mode, or when the door is reset by opening the door or closing the door. In this case, according to the instruction of the microcomputer 556M, the multiplexer 556R returns to the internal connection state from the disconnection state of the internal connection of the proximity sensor 560 and the middle area part 589, and the proximity sensor 560 and the middle area part 589 can be connected. .
进而,参照图48~图50。在图48~图50中,示出了作为第1电极的接近传感器560和作为第2电极的中间区域部分589的接近检测有效范围的变更例。Furthermore, refer to FIGS. 48 to 50 . 48 to 50 show modified examples of the proximity detection effective ranges of the proximity sensor 560 as the first electrode and the intermediate region portion 589 as the second electrode.
接近传感器560的接近检测有效范围在仅使用作为第1电极的接近传感器560时,是小圆HC1的范围。然后,通过在接近传感器560的基础上并用作为第2电极的中间区域部分589,接近传感器560的接近检测有效范围能够以从小圆HC1扩展到大圆HC2的方式扩展范围。The proximity detection effective range of the proximity sensor 560 is the range of the small circle HC1 when only the proximity sensor 560 as the first electrode is used. Then, by using the middle region 589 as the second electrode in addition to the proximity sensor 560 , the proximity detection effective range of the proximity sensor 560 can be extended from the small circle HC1 to the large circle HC2 .
但是,在要像这样扩展接近检测有效范围时,在大圆HC2的接近传感器的接近检测有效范围下,作为移动机构的相邻的门21(或者门22)、放置于门的背面侧的门搁架的水瓶等会反应于接近传感器560的接近检测有效范围而发出打开门的指令,有可能使得不想打开一侧的门不慎被打开。However, when the effective range of proximity detection is to be expanded like this, under the effective range of proximity detection of the proximity sensor of the large circle HC2, the adjacent door 21 (or door 22) as a moving mechanism, the door rest placed on the back side of the door The water bottle etc. on the rack will respond to the proximity detection effective range of the proximity sensor 560 and send an instruction to open the door, which may cause the door on the side that does not want to be opened to be accidentally opened.
因此,为了进行接近传感器560的接近检测有效范围的变更,作为接近检测有效范围的变更机构,设置有图78和图51(b)所示的作为第4电极的接地图案573和图51(a)所示的作为第3电极的保护电极570。Therefore, in order to change the proximity detection effective range of the proximity sensor 560, the ground pattern 573 as the fourth electrode shown in FIG. 78 and FIG. 51 (b) and the ground pattern 573 shown in FIG. 51 (a ) shown as the guard electrode 570 as the third electrode.
图78是说明接近传感器560和中间区域部分589的接近范围的变更的图。FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating changes in the proximity ranges of the proximity sensor 560 and the middle region portion 589 .
如图78所示,像图51(b)所示的那样在基板553的与配置部分572对应的背面553B上配置有作为第4电极的网状接地图案573。该接地图案(网状电极)573覆盖接近传感器560和中间区域部分589的背面侧的基板553。通过使接地图案573与接近传感器560为相同电压,不从接近传感器560和中间区域部分589向接地图案573形成电场。由此,能够变更电场范围,将不想由接近传感器560检测的范围除去。来自接地图案573的电场仅向接近传感器560和中间区域部分589方向产生电场,抵消从接近传感器560和中间区域部分589朝向接地图案573的电场,朝向基板553的背面方向的电场消失(消除)。As shown in FIG. 78 , as shown in FIG. 51( b ), a mesh ground pattern 573 as a fourth electrode is arranged on the back surface 553B of the substrate 553 corresponding to the arrangement portion 572 . This ground pattern (mesh electrode) 573 covers the substrate 553 on the rear side of the proximity sensor 560 and the middle region portion 589 . By making the ground pattern 573 and the proximity sensor 560 have the same voltage, an electric field is not formed from the proximity sensor 560 and the intermediate region portion 589 to the ground pattern 573 . Thereby, the range of the electric field can be changed, and the range not to be detected by the proximity sensor 560 can be excluded. The electric field from the ground pattern 573 generates an electric field only in the direction of the proximity sensor 560 and the middle area portion 589, cancels the electric field from the proximity sensor 560 and the middle area portion 589 toward the ground pattern 573, and the electric field toward the back surface of the substrate 553 disappears (eliminates).
由此,如图78(a)所示,在基板553的背面配置作为第4电极的接地图案573时,接近传感器560和中间区域部分589的接近检测范围DL1能够大于图78(b)所示的接近检测范围DL2。接地图案573是网状金属屏蔽电极,与图78(a)和图78(b)相比,通过配置接地图案573,图78(a)中,后方的电场减少与图49所示的范围A对应的量,或者消失。Thus, as shown in FIG. 78(a), when the ground pattern 573 as the fourth electrode is disposed on the back surface of the substrate 553, the proximity detection range DL1 of the proximity sensor 560 and the middle region portion 589 can be larger than that shown in FIG. 78(b). The proximity detection range DL2. The ground pattern 573 is a mesh metal shielding electrode. Compared with FIG. 78(a) and FIG. 78(b), by disposing the ground pattern 573, in FIG. 78(a), the rear electric field is reduced to the range A shown in FIG. 49 The corresponding amount, or disappear.
此外,如图51(a)所示,将框型的保护电极570配置于基板553,保护电极570包围接近传感器560和中间区域部分589,由此,左右方向的电场减少与图49所示的范围U对应的量。由此,如图48~图50所示,接近传感器560的接近检测有效范围能够从大圆HC2变更为小的形状HC3,而且,如图50所示,在上下方向减少与范围V对应的量。In addition, as shown in FIG. 51(a), a frame-shaped guard electrode 570 is disposed on the substrate 553, and the guard electrode 570 surrounds the proximity sensor 560 and the middle region portion 589, thereby reducing the electric field in the left and right directions similar to that shown in FIG. The amount corresponding to range U. Thus, as shown in FIGS. 48 to 50 , the proximity detection effective range of the proximity sensor 560 can be changed from a large circle HC2 to a small shape HC3 , and can be reduced by an amount corresponding to the range V in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 50 .
这样,接近传感器560的接近检测有效范围如图50的小的形状HC3所示,整体上,仅有接近传感器560和中间区域部分589的接近检测范围DL1的前方方向伸出,能够在距离长的范围内进行接近检测。另外,即使设置图53所示的金属体591,也会使电场发生作用,具有使接近传感器的接近检测有效范围不超过金属体591的功能,能够进一步防止接近传感器所致的误检测。In this way, the proximity detection effective range of the proximity sensor 560 is shown in the small shape HC3 of FIG. Proximity detection within range. In addition, even if the metal body 591 shown in FIG. 53 is provided, an electric field will act, and it has the function of keeping the proximity detection effective range of the proximity sensor from exceeding the metal body 591, thereby further preventing false detection by the proximity sensor.
第33实施方式33rd Embodiment
图69是表示第33实施方式的冰箱1的主视图。Fig. 69 is a front view showing refrigerator 1 according to the thirty-third embodiment.
如图69所示,冰箱1具有:冷藏室12、蔬菜室13、切换室14、冷冻室15、制冰室16。一对左门21和右门22覆盖冷藏室12的前表面开口部。为此,左门21、右门22分别在作为冰箱主体的箱体11的左端部、右端部的上下利用铰链部安装成以对开式进行开闭。在该例中,右门22的宽度比左门21的宽度大。As shown in FIG. 69 , refrigerator 1 has refrigerating compartment 12 , vegetable compartment 13 , switching compartment 14 , freezing compartment 15 , and ice making compartment 16 . A pair of left door 21 and right door 22 cover the front opening of refrigerator compartment 12 . Therefore, the left door 21 and the right door 22 are attached to the upper and lower sides of the left end and the right end of the cabinet 11, which is the main body of the refrigerator, by hinges so as to open and close in a split style. In this example, the width of the right door 22 is larger than the width of the left door 21 .
左门21、右门22都是以下隔热构造部件:在前表面开口的扁平内板的开口部安装有着色透明的玻璃制前面板21A、22A,并且在内部空洞部配置有真空隔热材料,在未被真空隔热材料填埋的空洞部配置有泡沫聚氨酯隔热材料(以下也简称为聚氨酯隔热材料)或者预成型的固体隔热材料(例如EPC)。Both the left door 21 and the right door 22 are heat insulating structural members: colored and transparent glass front panels 21A, 22A are attached to the opening of the flat inner panel with the front surface open, and a vacuum heat insulating material is arranged in the internal cavity. , A foamed polyurethane heat insulating material (hereinafter referred to simply as a polyurethane heat insulating material) or a preformed solid heat insulating material (such as EPC) is disposed in the cavity that is not filled with the vacuum heat insulating material.
如图69所示,1个操作检测部701设置于:尺寸比例如左门21大的右门22的前面板22A的下部位置。As shown in FIG. 69 , one operation detection unit 701 is provided at a lower position of front panel 22A of right door 22 , which is larger in size than left door 21 , for example.
开门驱动部54、55分别配置于箱体11的顶板上表面的前端附近的左右部位,且是设置于与左门21、右门22的上边的开放侧端部附近对应的位置。The door-opening drive parts 54 and 55 are respectively arranged at the left and right parts near the front end of the upper surface of the top plate of the box body 11, and are provided at positions corresponding to the upper open side ends of the left door 21 and the right door 22.
这些开门驱动部54、55是使左门21、右门22分别强制性进行开门动作的门开闭装置(开门装置)。开门驱动部54、55通过利用电磁铁将动铁芯54A、55A向前方推出,将左门21、右门22各自的开放侧端部附近的上边向前方推出,使左门21、右门22强制性自动开放。These door opening drive units 54 and 55 are door opening and closing devices (door opening devices) for forcibly opening the left door 21 and the right door 22 , respectively. The door-opening driving parts 54, 55 push out the moving iron core 54A, 55A forward by using the electromagnet, and the upper edge near the open side end of the left door 21 and the right door 22 is pushed forward, so that the left door 21 and the right door 22 Mandatory automatic opening.
图70是表示图69所示的ZR-ZR线处的操作检测部701的构造例的截面图。FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration example of the operation detection unit 701 on the line ZR-ZR shown in FIG. 69 .
图69所示的操作检测部701如图70所示,在玻璃制前面板22A的内表面侧通过印刷等配置有遮蔽用片材721。该片材721是为了防止通过前面板22A看到内部而配置的。In the operation detection unit 701 shown in FIG. 69 , as shown in FIG. 70 , a masking sheet 721 is arranged by printing or the like on the inner surface side of the glass front panel 22A. This sheet 721 is arranged to prevent the inside from being seen through the front panel 22A.
在前面板22A的内表面侧配置有第1基板731和第2基板732。第1基板731和第2基板732被配置成隔着间隔而平行于前面板22A。A first substrate 731 and a second substrate 732 are arranged on the inner surface side of the front panel 22A. The first substrate 731 and the second substrate 732 are arranged parallel to the front panel 22A with a gap therebetween.
在第1基板731的表面配置有作为非接触传感器的例如4个静电电容式的接近传感器711、712、713、714,在背面配置有连接器729。这些接近传感器711、712、713、714在例如右门22内的第1基板731上,二维(平面上)配置。For example, four capacitive proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 as proximity sensors are arranged on the front surface of the first substrate 731 , and a connector 729 is arranged on the back surface thereof. These proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 are arranged two-dimensionally (on a plane) on, for example, the first substrate 731 inside the right door 22 .
如图69所示,接近传感器711、712、713、714分别配置于正方形的各角部的位置,接近传感器711配置于左上的角部,接近传感器712配置于右上的角部,接近传感器713配置于右下的角部,接近传感器714配置于左下的角部。As shown in Figure 69, the proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, and 714 are respectively arranged at the corners of the square, the proximity sensor 711 is arranged at the upper left corner, the proximity sensor 712 is arranged at the upper right corner, and the proximity sensor 713 is arranged At the lower right corner, the proximity sensor 714 is disposed at the lower left corner.
这些接近传感器711、712、713、714能够以非接触方式检测出移动用户(人体)的手指、手掌(掌部、手背)、手的侧部、肘部等的状态。由此,通过对开门驱动部54或者开门驱动部55进行驱动操作,打开左门21或者右门22。These proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, and 714 can detect the state of fingers, palms (palms, backs of hands), sides of hands, elbows, etc. of a mobile user (human body) in a non-contact manner. As a result, the left door 21 or the right door 22 is opened by driving the door opening drive unit 54 or the door opening drive unit 55 .
接近传感器711、712、713、714是静电触摸(接触)用电极,是在右门22的正面(前表面)方向,经由前面板22A以非接触方式检测出用户的手、肘部等的接近的例如静电电容式检测机构。该接近传感器711~714在用户的人体的一部分,具体而言例如手掌(掌部、手背)、手的侧部、肘部等接近时,检测出其接近。接近传感器711~714是静电电容式触摸传感器,可以使用交互电容方式的触摸传感器或自我电容方式的触摸传感器。Proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, and 714 are electrodes for electrostatic touch (contact), and detect the approach of the user's hands, elbows, etc. in a non-contact manner through the front panel 22A in the direction of the front (front surface) of the right door 22. For example, electrostatic capacitive detection mechanism. The proximity sensors 711 to 714 detect the approach of a part of the user's human body, specifically, for example, a palm (palm, back of hand), side of hand, elbow, or the like. The proximity sensors 711 to 714 are capacitive touch sensors, and either interactive capacitance touch sensors or self-capacitance touch sensors can be used.
如图70所示,在第2基板732的表面配置有多个LED735和连接器736。第2基板732的连接器736通过中继线束728连接到第1基板731的连接器729。As shown in FIG. 70 , a plurality of LEDs 735 and connectors 736 are arranged on the surface of the second substrate 732 . The connector 736 of the second board 732 is connected to the connector 729 of the first board 731 through a relay harness 728 .
各LED735配置于第1基板731的与各孔734对应的位置。由此,各LED635产生的光能够通过各孔734而从背后对接近传感器711~714进行照明。由此,即使是昏暗的环境,用户也能够通过前面板22A和片材721来目视确认各接近传感器711~714的位置。Each LED 735 is arranged at a position corresponding to each hole 734 of the first substrate 731 . Accordingly, the light generated by each LED 635 can pass through each hole 734 to illuminate the proximity sensors 711 to 714 from behind. Accordingly, even in a dark environment, the user can visually confirm the positions of the proximity sensors 711 to 714 through the front panel 22A and the sheet 721 .
图71是表示控制部756、操作检测部701、作为开门装置的开门驱动部54、55等的电连接的框图。FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the electrical connection of the control unit 756, the operation detection unit 701, the door opening drive units 54, 55 as the door opening device, and the like.
如图71所示,控制部756电连接于操作检测部701、开门驱动部54、55、多个LED735、距离测定机构777。As shown in FIG. 71 , the control unit 756 is electrically connected to the operation detection unit 701 , the door opening drive units 54 , 55 , a plurality of LEDs 735 , and the distance measurement mechanism 777 .
在图69所示的冰箱1中,在用户打开冰箱1的左门21(或者右门22)的情况下,如果是昏暗的环境,则在用户用手指进行由操作检测部701的非接触所致的操作时,难以看到操作检测部701的各接近传感器711~714的位置。这样,为了改善难以进行各接近传感器711~714的操作,在各接近传感器711~714的背面分别搭载了LED735。In the refrigerator 1 shown in FIG. 69, when the user opens the left door 21 (or the right door 22) of the refrigerator 1, if the environment is dark, the user performs a non-contact operation by the operation detection part 701 with a finger. It is difficult to see the positions of the proximity sensors 711 to 714 of the operation detection unit 701 during precise operations. In this way, in order to improve the difficulty in operating the proximity sensors 711 to 714 , LEDs 735 are respectively mounted on the back surfaces of the proximity sensors 711 to 714 .
接近传感器711~714按照预定的特定顺序检测到手指、手掌(掌部、手背)、手的侧部、肘部的接近时,控制部756从各接近传感器711、712、713、714接收通知人接近的信号,因此,控制部756通过作为开门装置的开门驱动部54或者开门驱动部55使左门21或者右门22进行开门动作。When the proximity sensors 711 to 714 detect the proximity of fingers, palms (palm, back of hand), side of the hand, and elbow in a predetermined order, the control unit 756 receives notifications from the proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, and 714. Therefore, the control unit 756 causes the left door 21 or the right door 22 to open the door through the door opening drive unit 54 or the door opening drive unit 55 as the door opening device.
此时,控制部756从各接近传感器711、712、713、714接收通知人接近的信号,因此,根据控制部756的指令,LED735能够亮灯。At this time, the control unit 756 receives a signal notifying that a person is approaching from each of the proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 , so that the LED 735 can be turned on by an instruction from the control unit 756 .
由此,用户即使在昏暗的环境下,也能够目视确认操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714的位置,能够容易操作各接近传感器711、712、713、714,能够打开左门21(或者右门22)。Thus, even in a dark environment, the user can visually confirm the positions of the proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, 714 of the operation detection unit 701, and can easily operate the proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, 714, and can open the Left door 21 (or right door 22).
如上所述,第33实施方式的操作检测部701并不是通过接触检测来进行人的操作检测,而是通过非接触检测来打开左门21或者右门22。在通过接触检测打开门的情况下,需要手指接触接触检测部分,在用户手中拿着东西的状态下,难以打开门,或者需要用肘部打开门。对此,操作检测部701通过采用不需要接触接触检测部分的非接触操作,能够抑制用户的动作、周围环境的变化所致的用户的非有意的开门动作。As described above, the operation detection unit 701 of the thirty-third embodiment does not detect human operations by contact detection, but opens the left door 21 or the right door 22 by non-contact detection. In the case of opening the door by contact detection, it is necessary to touch the contact detection part with a finger, it is difficult to open the door in a state where the user holds something in his hand, or the door needs to be opened with an elbow. In contrast, the operation detection unit 701 can suppress the user's unintentional door opening action due to the user's motion and changes in the surrounding environment by using a non-contact operation that does not require touching the contact detection portion.
图69和图70所示的操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714通过进行使用户的手指、手掌(掌部、手背)、手的侧部、肘部等移动的动作,即所谓的姿势,能够以非接触方式打开左门21或者右门22,通过不需要接触接触检测部分的非接触操作,能够抑制用户的动作、周围环境的变化所致的用户的非有意的开门动作。The proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, and 714 of the operation detection unit 701 shown in FIG. 69 and FIG. The so-called posture can open the left door 21 or the right door 22 in a non-contact manner, and through the non-contact operation that does not need to touch the contact detection part, the user's unintentional door opening caused by the user's actions and changes in the surrounding environment can be suppressed. action.
如图69所示,操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714以相同的间隔,在上下方向(VT方向)和左右方向(HL方向)二维配置,优选,分别配置于正方形的4个角部。用户的手、肘部等相对于操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714以非接触方式按照特定的顺序(上下方向、左右方向、斜向)移动,由此图71的控制部756识别各接近传感器711、712、713、714检测出的手指、手掌、手的侧部、肘部的移动。由此,控制部756发挥以下作用:驱动例如左门21的开门驱动部54来打开左门21,或者控制部756驱动右门22的开门驱动部55来打开右门22。As shown in FIG. 69, the proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, and 714 of the operation detection unit 701 are arranged two-dimensionally in the up-down direction (VT direction) and in the left-right direction (HL direction) at the same intervals, and are preferably arranged in a square. of the 4 corners. The user's hand, elbow, etc. move in a specific order (up-down direction, left-right direction, oblique direction) with respect to each proximity sensor 711, 712, 713, 714 of the operation detection part 701 in a non-contact manner, thereby the control of FIG. 71 The unit 756 recognizes the movement of the finger, the palm, the side of the hand, and the elbow detected by the proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 . Thus, the control unit 756 functions to open the left door 21 by driving the door opening drive unit 54 of the left door 21 , or to open the right door 22 by driving the door opening drive unit 55 of the right door 22 .
操作检测部701可以安装于右门22的任意一个隔离部。由此,不管有没有玻璃制前面板,也不管门的外观设计、各种的动作显示如何,都可以配置操作检测部701。The operation detection unit 701 may be attached to any partition of the right door 22 . In this way, the operation detection unit 701 can be arranged regardless of the presence or absence of a glass front panel, and regardless of the exterior design of the door or various operation displays.
操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714是设置于1块第1基板731的构造,因此容易制造。而且,操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714也可以不是设置于1块第1基板731,而是设置于多块基板上。由此,操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714的配置上的自由度进一步提高。The proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 of the operation detection unit 701 have a structure provided on one first substrate 731 , and thus are easy to manufacture. Furthermore, the proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 of the operation detection unit 701 may be provided not on one first substrate 731 but on a plurality of substrates. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 of the operation detection unit 701 is further improved.
接下来,说明上述冰箱1的使用例。Next, an example of use of the refrigerator 1 described above will be described.
在以下说明的使用例中,说明在用户使用双手的手指拿着物品、例如盘子、锅等而双手占满的状态下,无法使用手指通过接触来操作图69所示的接近传感器711~714,进行例如左门21(或者右门22)的开门动作的情况。In the usage examples described below, it is described that the proximity sensors 711 to 714 shown in FIG. For example, when the door opening operation of the left door 21 (or the right door 22) is performed.
在该情况下,能够以非接触方式操作接近传感器711~714的用户的人体的部位,是手掌(掌部、手背)、手的侧部或者肘部等。In this case, the part of the user's body that can operate the proximity sensors 711 to 714 in a non-contact manner is the palm (palm, back of hand), side of the hand, or elbow.
如上所述,在用户使用手掌、手的侧部或者肘部等使接近传感器711~714以预定的特定顺序检测到它们时,控制部756能够驱动例如左门21的开门驱动部54来打开左门21,或者控制部756能够驱动右门22的开门驱动部55来打开右门22。As described above, when the user uses the palm, the side of the hand, or the elbow to make the proximity sensors 711 to 714 detect them in a predetermined order, the control unit 756 can drive the door opening driving unit 54 of the left door 21 to open the left door. The door 21 or the control unit 756 can drive the door opening driving unit 55 of the right door 22 to open the right door 22 .
图72示出了用户利用手掌、手的侧部或者肘部等的动作(姿势)对接近传感器711~714以预定的特定顺序进行接近操作的例子。FIG. 72 shows an example in which the user performs proximity operations on the proximity sensors 711 to 714 in a predetermined specific order using motions (postures) such as the palm, the side of the hand, or the elbow.
该特定顺序是指使用户的手掌、手的侧部或者肘部向接近传感器711~714中的至少2个以上的接近传感器接近移动的路径,是预先确定的。The specific order refers to a path along which the user's palm, side of the hand, or elbow moves closer to at least two of the proximity sensors 711 to 714 , and is predetermined.
图72(a)所示特定顺序是通过用户的手掌、手的侧部或者肘部沿着向右的箭头所示的第1方向DD1移动,2个接近传感器711、712依次检测出人体(手掌、手的侧部或者肘部),并且通过沿着以与第1方向DD1不同的向左的箭头所示的第2方向(反对方向)DD2移动,2个接近传感器712、711依次检测出人体(手掌、手的侧部或者肘部)而得到的。The specific sequence shown in Figure 72 (a) is that the user's palm, side of the hand or elbow moves along the first direction DD1 shown by the rightward arrow, and the two proximity sensors 711, 712 detect the human body (palm , the side of the hand or the elbow), and by moving along the second direction (opposite direction) DD2 shown by the leftward arrow different from the first direction DD1, the two proximity sensors 712, 711 sequentially detect the human body (palm, side of hand, or elbow).
在该情况下,第1方向DD1和第2方向DD2构成第1特定方向F1,该第1特定方向F1的特定顺序是:对例如控制部756指示通过开门驱动部54进行左门21的开门动作的功能。In this case, the first direction DD1 and the second direction DD2 constitute the first specific direction F1, and the specific sequence of the first specific direction F1 is to instruct the control unit 756 to open the left door 21 through the door opening drive unit 54, for example. function.
图72(b)所示的另外的特定顺序是:通过用户的手掌、手的侧部或者肘部沿着以向右的箭头所示的第1方向DD1移动,2个接近传感器711、712依次检测出人体(手掌、手的侧部或者肘部),并且通过沿着以与第1方向DD1不同的向下的箭头所示的第3方向DD3移动,2个接近传感器712、713依次检测出人体(手掌、手的侧部或者肘部)而得到的。Another specific sequence shown in Figure 72(b) is: the user's palm, side of the hand or elbow moves along the first direction DD1 shown by the rightward arrow, and the two proximity sensors 711, 712 are sequentially The human body (the palm, the side of the hand or the elbow) is detected, and by moving along the third direction DD3 shown by the downward arrow different from the first direction DD1, the two proximity sensors 712, 713 sequentially detect Human body (palm, side of hand or elbow).
在该情况下,第1方向DD1和第3方向DD3构成第2特定方向F2,该第2特定方向F2的特定顺序对控制部756指示所谓“一气冷冻”功能,即指示:对能够切换例如冰箱1的作为收纳室的例如图69所示的冰箱内设定温度的切换室14内进行急剧冷冻的功能。该“一气冷冻”功能是一气儿地通过食品水分被冷冻的-1℃~-5℃的温度带来抑制冷冻时的细胞损伤,保持好味道的功能。In this case, the first direction DD1 and the third direction DD3 constitute the second specific direction F2, and the specific order of the second specific direction F2 instructs the control unit 756 the so-called "one-air freezing" function, that is, instructs: 1 as a storage room such as shown in FIG. 69 in the switching room 14 of the temperature setting in the refrigerator for rapid freezing function. The "all-in-one freezing" function is a function that suppresses cell damage during freezing and maintains good taste through the temperature of -1°C to -5°C in which food moisture is frozen at once.
如上所述,通过用户用手掌、手的侧部或者肘部等的动作(姿势)对接近传感器711~714中的至少2个接近传感器以预定的特定顺序进行接近操作,作为预定的功能,能够打开例如左门21,或者打开右门22。As described above, when the user performs a proximity operation on at least two of the proximity sensors 711 to 714 in a predetermined specific order with a motion (posture) such as the palm, the side of the hand, or the elbow, as a predetermined function, it is possible to For example, the left door 21 is opened, or the right door 22 is opened.
由此,即使将接近传感器711~714配置于左门21或者右门22,也能够防止在用户只是在冰箱1之前通过时,左门21或者右门22打开。Accordingly, even if the proximity sensors 711 to 714 are arranged on the left door 21 or the right door 22 , it is possible to prevent the left door 21 or the right door 22 from being opened when the user just passes in front of the refrigerator 1 .
此外,图73是表示对接近传感器以其它预定的特定顺序进行接近操作的例子的图。In addition, FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example in which a proximity operation is performed on a proximity sensor in another predetermined specific order.
如图73所示,在用户利用双手手指拿着盘子、锅等而双手占满的状态下,不能使用双手的手指对接近传感器711~714进行接近操作时,通过利用手掌(掌部、手背)、手的侧部、肘部等使接近传感器711~714以非接触方式按照预定的特定顺序进行检测,也能够对控制部756指示预定的任意功能。As shown in FIG. 73 , when the user uses both hands to hold a plate, pot, etc., and the hands are full, and the fingers of both hands cannot be used to perform proximity operations on the proximity sensors 711 to 714, the user can use the palm (palm, back of hand) , the side of the hand, the elbow, etc., can be detected by the proximity sensors 711 to 714 in a predetermined specific order in a non-contact manner, and a predetermined arbitrary function can be instructed to the control unit 756 .
使手掌(掌部、手背)、手的侧部、肘部动作而进行移动的方向可以任意组合上下方向、左右方向、斜向中的2个或者3个以上的方向来使用。The direction of movement by moving the palm (palm, back of hand), side of the hand, and elbow can be used in any combination of up-down direction, left-right direction, and oblique direction.
例如,在图73(a)中,示出了第1方向(右方)DD1和第4方向(斜下方)DD4的组合,图73(b)中,示出了第5方向(下方)DD5和第6方向(上方)DD6的组合。For example, in FIG. 73(a), the combination of the first direction (right) DD1 and the fourth direction (obliquely downward) DD4 is shown, and in FIG. 73(b), the fifth direction (downward) DD5 is shown. Combination with 6th direction (upper) DD6.
在图73(c)中,示出了第3方向(下方)DD3和第7方向(上方)DD7的组合,在图73(d)中,示出了第8方向(右方)DD8和第9方向(左方)DD9的组合。In Fig. 73(c), the combination of the 3rd direction (below) DD3 and the 7th direction (upper) DD7 is shown, and in Fig. 73(d), the combination of the 8th direction (right) DD8 and the 7th direction Combination of DD9 in 9 directions (left).
通过这些多个方向的姿势的组合,控制部756能够发挥打开例如左门21、或者右门22等的各种功能。The control unit 756 can perform various functions such as opening the left door 21 or the right door 22 through a combination of postures in these plural directions.
在图示的例子中,操作检测部701由4个接近传感器711、712、713、714构成。但是,并不限于此,操作检测部701也可以由2个接近传感器、3个接近传感器、5个以上的接近传感器构成。这些接近传感器在门上可以二维(平面上)配置。In the illustrated example, the operation detection unit 701 is composed of four proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 . However, it is not limited thereto, and the operation detection unit 701 may be composed of two proximity sensors, three proximity sensors, or five or more proximity sensors. These proximity sensors can be arranged two-dimensionally (on a plane) on the door.
在上述的冰箱1中,具有对开式的左门21和右门22,在左门21和右门22的前表面侧配置有作为玻璃板的前面板21A、22A。但是,并不限于此,左门21和右门22的前表面侧也可以不是玻璃板而是钢板等金属板。此外,作为冰箱,也可以具有单开式的1扇门。The refrigerator 1 described above has a side-opening left door 21 and a right door 22 , and front panels 21A and 22A that are glass plates are arranged on the front sides of the left door 21 and the right door 22 . However, it is not limited thereto, and the front surfaces of the left door 21 and the right door 22 may be metal plates such as steel plates instead of glass plates. Moreover, as a refrigerator, you may have one door of a single opening type.
操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714是静电电容式,但是,并不限于此,也可以采用利用红外线来以非接触方式检测用户的手指的方式。The proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 of the operation detection unit 701 are capacitive, but not limited thereto, and may employ infrared rays to detect a user's finger in a non-contact manner.
此外,在冰箱中,可以将例如图69和图71所示的距离测定机构777配置于左门21的玻璃制前面板21A的背面侧或者右门22的玻璃制前面板22A的背面侧、冰箱的框架或者区分各储藏室的隔离部分等。In addition, in the refrigerator, for example, the distance measuring mechanism 777 shown in FIGS. The frame or the isolation part that distinguishes each storage room, etc.
该距离测定机构777测定从冰箱1到用户的人体的距离。例如、根据设置冰箱的房间的大小,改变由距离测定机构777测定的人体的距离。如果冰箱设置于大房间,则冰箱1与人体的距离大,如果冰箱设置于狭小的房间,则冰箱1与人体的距离小。The distance measuring means 777 measures the distance from the refrigerator 1 to the user's body. For example, the distance of the human body measured by the distance measuring means 777 is changed according to the size of the room where the refrigerator is installed. If the refrigerator is installed in a large room, the distance between the refrigerator 1 and the human body will be large, and if the refrigerator is installed in a small room, the distance between the refrigerator 1 and the human body will be small.
因此,基于距离测定机构777测定的到人体的距离是变化的,控制部756可以构成为能够改变:作为非接触传感器的接近传感器711、712、713、714能够检测出人体的动作为有效的范围。即、能够在高灵敏度与中灵敏度程度之间调整接近传感器711、712、713、714检测时的灵敏度。Therefore, the distance to the human body measured by the distance measuring mechanism 777 is variable, and the control unit 756 can be configured to be able to change: the range in which the proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, and 714 as non-contact sensors can detect the movement of the human body is effective. . That is, the sensitivity at the time of detection by the proximity sensors 711, 712, 713, and 714 can be adjusted between high sensitivity and medium sensitivity.
操作检测部701的各接近传感器711、712、713、714可以以嵌入式安装于不具有玻璃制前面板的通常构造的钢板制的例如右门22。通过采用这样的构造,操作检测部701能够配置于门的任意位置。The proximity sensors 711 , 712 , 713 , and 714 of the operation detection unit 701 may be embedded in, for example, the right door 22 made of a steel plate having a normal structure without a glass front panel. By adopting such a structure, the operation detection part 701 can be arrange|positioned at the arbitrary position of a door.
操作检测部701可以设置于图70所示的前面板22A的内侧的聚氨酯隔热材料内。由此,操作检测部701可以配置于门的任意位置。The operation detection part 701 may be provided in the polyurethane heat insulating material inside the front panel 22A shown in FIG. 70 . Thereby, the operation detection part 701 can be arrange|positioned at the arbitrary position of a door.
操作检测部701可以安装于在右门22的边缘部分配置的塑料制门罩上或者门罩下。由此,不管有无玻璃制前面板,也不管门的外观设计如何、是否配置有各种动作显示部分,都可以配置操作检测部701。The operation detection unit 701 may be attached to or under a plastic door cover disposed on the edge portion of the right door 22 . Accordingly, the operation detection unit 701 can be arranged regardless of whether there is a glass front panel, the design of the door, or whether various operation display parts are arranged.
虽然说明了本发明的几个实施方式,但是,这些实施方式是作为例子给出的,并不意图限定发明的范围。这些新实施方式也可以以其它各种方式来实施,并且能够与各种实施方式相组合,在不脱离发明的主旨的范围内,能够进行各种省略、置换、变更。这些实施方式及其变形包含于发明的范围、主旨内,并且包含于权利要求书记载的发明及其等同范围内。While several embodiments of the present invention have been described, these embodiments are given as examples and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. These new embodiments can also be implemented in other various forms, and can be combined with various embodiments, and various omissions, substitutions, and changes can be made without departing from the gist of the invention. These embodiments and modifications thereof are included in the scope and gist of the invention, and are included in the invention described in the claims and their equivalents.
另外,也可以根据LED的显示来实施表示操作位置的印刷等。该印刷优选LED光透过的半透明印刷等。In addition, printing or the like indicating the operation position may be performed based on the display of the LED. The printing is preferably translucent printing through which LED light passes, or the like.
Claims (1)
Applications Claiming Priority (17)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2013132645 | 2013-06-25 | ||
| JP2013-132645 | 2013-06-25 | ||
| JP2013197435 | 2013-09-24 | ||
| JP2013-197435 | 2013-09-24 | ||
| JP2013-272191 | 2013-12-27 | ||
| JP2013272191 | 2013-12-27 | ||
| JP2014014535 | 2014-01-29 | ||
| JP2014-014535 | 2014-01-29 | ||
| JP2014106232 | 2014-05-22 | ||
| JP2014-106232 | 2014-05-22 | ||
| JP2014-112829 | 2014-05-30 | ||
| JP2014112829 | 2014-05-30 | ||
| JP2014-119511 | 2014-06-10 | ||
| JP2014119511 | 2014-06-10 | ||
| JP2014126223A JP6373653B2 (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-19 | refrigerator |
| JP2014-126223 | 2014-06-19 | ||
| CN201480030279.6A CN105308403B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
Related Parent Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201480030279.6A Division CN105308403B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CN107036371A true CN107036371A (en) | 2017-08-11 |
Family
ID=52141917
Family Applications (26)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201710341458.7A Pending CN107024070A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710416425.4A Active CN107192207B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710330493.9A Pending CN106940120A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710341473.1A Pending CN107024060A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710341560.7A Active CN107144080B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710445097.0A Pending CN107367109A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710416424.XA Active CN107166857B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710367605.8A Pending CN107036371A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710367960.5A Active CN107062758B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710438589.7A Active CN107131713B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201710346933.XA Pending CN106949700A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710368179.XA Active CN107062797B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201710426220.4A Pending CN107421199A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710411405.8A Pending CN106969578A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710416437.7A Active CN107014138B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710367971.3A Active CN107084586B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710411451.8A Active CN107152834B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201480030279.6A Active CN105308403B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710439471.6A Pending CN107166858A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710412696.2A Pending CN107166856A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710416447.0A Active CN107062760B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201710367841.XA Pending CN107152833A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710377586.7A Active CN107388705B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710411404.3A Active CN107166855B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710438239.0A Active CN107178957B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201710403097.4A Active CN107388706B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
Family Applications Before (7)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201710341458.7A Pending CN107024070A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710416425.4A Active CN107192207B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710330493.9A Pending CN106940120A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710341473.1A Pending CN107024060A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710341560.7A Active CN107144080B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710445097.0A Pending CN107367109A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710416424.XA Active CN107166857B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
Family Applications After (18)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201710367960.5A Active CN107062758B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710438589.7A Active CN107131713B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201710346933.XA Pending CN106949700A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710368179.XA Active CN107062797B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201710426220.4A Pending CN107421199A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710411405.8A Pending CN106969578A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710416437.7A Active CN107014138B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710367971.3A Active CN107084586B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710411451.8A Active CN107152834B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201480030279.6A Active CN105308403B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710439471.6A Pending CN107166858A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710412696.2A Pending CN107166856A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710416447.0A Active CN107062760B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201710367841.XA Pending CN107152833A (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710377586.7A Active CN107388705B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | refrigerator |
| CN201710411404.3A Active CN107166855B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator |
| CN201710438239.0A Active CN107178957B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
| CN201710403097.4A Active CN107388706B (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2014-06-25 | Refrigerator with a door |
Country Status (6)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| JP (1) | JP6373653B2 (en) |
| KR (4) | KR20200135566A (en) |
| CN (26) | CN107024070A (en) |
| MY (1) | MY183145A (en) |
| TW (1) | TWI572837B (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2014208585A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (116)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP6326221B2 (en) * | 2013-11-29 | 2018-05-16 | 日立アプライアンス株式会社 | refrigerator |
| KR101677334B1 (en) | 2014-10-24 | 2016-11-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator door |
| CN105588400B (en) * | 2014-11-07 | 2018-04-13 | Lg电子株式会社 | Refrigerator and controlling method for refrigerator |
| KR102023152B1 (en) | 2014-11-07 | 2019-09-20 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| KR101659181B1 (en) | 2014-12-22 | 2016-09-30 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Tuch sensor assembly and refrigerator door with Tuch sensor assembly |
| KR101659180B1 (en) | 2014-12-22 | 2016-09-22 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Tuch sensor assembly and refrigerator door with Tuch sensor assembly |
| KR101668921B1 (en) | 2014-12-24 | 2016-10-24 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Tuch sensor assembly and refrigerator door with Tuch sensor assembly |
| KR101659184B1 (en) | 2014-12-24 | 2016-09-22 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Tuch sensor assembly and manufacture method of tuch sensor assembly |
| KR101668922B1 (en) | 2014-12-24 | 2016-10-24 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Home appliance display assembly and manufacture method thereof |
| JP6552830B2 (en) * | 2015-02-03 | 2019-07-31 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| CN104675263A (en) * | 2015-02-10 | 2015-06-03 | 青岛海尔股份有限公司 | Door opening device, refrigerator and non-contact door opening method |
| CN104675264A (en) * | 2015-02-10 | 2015-06-03 | 青岛海尔股份有限公司 | Door opening device, refrigerator and non-contact door opening method |
| CN104654736A (en) * | 2015-02-10 | 2015-05-27 | 青岛海尔股份有限公司 | refrigerator |
| JP6445353B2 (en) * | 2015-03-02 | 2018-12-26 | シャープ株式会社 | Refrigerator |
| JP2016166694A (en) * | 2015-03-09 | 2016-09-15 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Refrigerator |
| JP6449073B2 (en) * | 2015-03-25 | 2019-01-09 | シャープ株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP6598481B2 (en) * | 2015-03-26 | 2019-10-30 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP6560006B2 (en) * | 2015-04-08 | 2019-08-14 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP6626268B2 (en) * | 2015-04-15 | 2019-12-25 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| CN106152697B (en) * | 2015-04-21 | 2020-10-02 | 青岛海尔智能技术研发有限公司 | Method for controlling door opening and closing of refrigerator and refrigerator |
| KR101639522B1 (en) | 2015-05-07 | 2016-07-22 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator door with Tuch sensor assembly |
| WO2016200050A1 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2016-12-15 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Refrigerator and control method for refrigerator |
| JP6584164B2 (en) * | 2015-06-22 | 2019-10-02 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| KR102562149B1 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2023-08-01 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | A Door for Refrigerator and Refrigerator |
| DE102015009157A1 (en) * | 2015-07-14 | 2017-01-19 | Liebherr-Hausgeräte Ochsenhausen GmbH | Fridge and / or freezer |
| JP6782064B2 (en) * | 2015-07-17 | 2020-11-11 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP6502390B2 (en) * | 2015-07-30 | 2019-04-17 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド | refrigerator |
| WO2017039219A1 (en) | 2015-09-03 | 2017-03-09 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| KR102223627B1 (en) * | 2015-09-03 | 2021-03-05 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| JP2017083099A (en) * | 2015-10-30 | 2017-05-18 | 日立アプライアンス株式会社 | refrigerator |
| KR101736608B1 (en) | 2015-11-27 | 2017-05-16 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| WO2017108548A1 (en) * | 2015-12-23 | 2017-06-29 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Device, system and method for determining a vital sign of a person |
| JP6730068B2 (en) * | 2016-01-26 | 2020-07-29 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP6732171B2 (en) * | 2016-01-29 | 2020-07-29 | 青島海爾股▲フン▼有限公司 | refrigerator |
| JP2017146058A (en) * | 2016-02-19 | 2017-08-24 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP6779016B2 (en) * | 2016-02-19 | 2020-11-04 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| WO2017145387A1 (en) * | 2016-02-26 | 2017-08-31 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Refrigerator |
| JP6749105B2 (en) * | 2016-02-29 | 2020-09-02 | シャープ株式会社 | Door structure |
| CN105806037A (en) * | 2016-04-26 | 2016-07-27 | 合肥海尔电冰箱有限公司 | Refrigerator door body opening method and refrigerator |
| CN105953521B (en) * | 2016-05-10 | 2019-01-18 | 青岛海尔股份有限公司 | The open method of refrigerator and refrigerator door |
| JP6484669B2 (en) * | 2016-07-01 | 2019-03-13 | 株式会社タカギセイコー | Medical table |
| JP2018021731A (en) * | 2016-08-05 | 2018-02-08 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| KR101897356B1 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2018-09-11 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator and a control method of the same |
| KR102001870B1 (en) * | 2016-11-03 | 2019-07-19 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator and a control method of the same |
| CN108120205A (en) * | 2016-11-29 | 2018-06-05 | 东芝生活电器株式会社 | Refrigerator |
| JP7016000B2 (en) * | 2016-12-21 | 2022-02-04 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | refrigerator |
| EP3764293B1 (en) | 2017-01-03 | 2023-05-10 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Food storage apparatus and control method thereof |
| JP6872916B2 (en) * | 2017-01-31 | 2021-05-19 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP6890880B2 (en) * | 2017-02-03 | 2021-06-18 | アール・ビー・コントロールズ株式会社 | Operating device |
| DE102017205184A1 (en) * | 2017-03-28 | 2018-10-04 | BSH Hausgeräte GmbH | Domestic refrigerating appliance with a device component with a trough which can be grasped from above in an oblique strip surface |
| CN107255391A (en) * | 2017-06-26 | 2017-10-17 | 青岛海尔股份有限公司 | A kind of refrigerator and its method for opening door of refrigerator |
| JP2019005323A (en) * | 2017-06-27 | 2019-01-17 | ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 | Height measuring device, healthcare equipment and rotating gate |
| KR102106847B1 (en) * | 2017-06-28 | 2020-05-28 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Control Method for Automatically Opening a Cooker Door |
| US20190017735A1 (en) * | 2017-07-11 | 2019-01-17 | Bsh Hausgeraete Gmbh | Household cooling appliance comprising a speech control for a dispenser unit, which is configured for dispensing liquid and/or ice, as well as method for operating a household cooling appliance |
| TWI683081B (en) * | 2017-08-02 | 2020-01-21 | 日商日立環球生活方案股份有限公司 | refrigerator |
| CN109387010B (en) * | 2017-08-02 | 2021-04-27 | 日立环球生活方案株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP6967904B2 (en) * | 2017-08-03 | 2021-11-17 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| CN107401880B (en) * | 2017-08-04 | 2020-10-09 | 海尔智家股份有限公司 | A door body adjustment device of a refrigerator |
| KR102418952B1 (en) | 2017-08-31 | 2022-07-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Home appliance having voice recognizing function |
| CN107680264A (en) * | 2017-09-29 | 2018-02-09 | 创斯达科技集团(中国)有限责任公司 | A kind of fuselage release mechanism |
| JP6879880B2 (en) * | 2017-10-11 | 2021-06-02 | 三菱電機株式会社 | How to control the front door of the dishwasher and home appliances |
| CN108253713B (en) * | 2017-12-27 | 2020-08-28 | 青岛海尔股份有限公司 | Refrigerator door body and refrigerator with microphone installed |
| JP6917933B2 (en) * | 2018-03-22 | 2021-08-11 | 三菱電機株式会社 | dishwasher |
| JP2019184167A (en) * | 2018-04-11 | 2019-10-24 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | Household electrical appliance, refrigerator |
| CN112041625B (en) * | 2018-04-27 | 2022-04-12 | 夏普株式会社 | Refrigerator with a door |
| JP2020008177A (en) * | 2018-07-03 | 2020-01-16 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | refrigerator |
| CN110873497A (en) | 2018-08-30 | 2020-03-10 | Lg电子株式会社 | Refrigerator with a door |
| TWI656311B (en) * | 2018-09-11 | 2019-04-11 | 捷騰光電股份有限公司 | Power supply structure of Refrigerator panel |
| KR102211191B1 (en) | 2018-12-07 | 2021-02-03 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator and control method thereof |
| CN109855354A (en) * | 2018-12-29 | 2019-06-07 | 青岛海尔股份有限公司 | Refrigerator and method for controlling door opening thereof |
| CN113227685B (en) * | 2019-01-11 | 2022-08-19 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Refrigerator with a door |
| KR102633905B1 (en) * | 2019-01-31 | 2024-02-05 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator Capable of Sound Input |
| JP7237651B2 (en) * | 2019-02-28 | 2023-03-13 | ホシザキ株式会社 | storage |
| JP2020143829A (en) * | 2019-03-06 | 2020-09-10 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| KR20200125305A (en) * | 2019-04-26 | 2020-11-04 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| CN111854302A (en) * | 2019-04-30 | 2020-10-30 | 青岛海高设计制造有限公司 | Opening structure, refrigerator and method for controlling refrigerator |
| US11686032B2 (en) | 2019-04-30 | 2023-06-27 | Whirlpool Corporation | User-interface system for a laundry appliance |
| US11182123B2 (en) | 2019-04-30 | 2021-11-23 | Whirlpool Corporation | User-interface system for a laundry appliance |
| DE102019112433A1 (en) * | 2019-05-13 | 2020-11-19 | Vorwerk & Co. Interholding Gmbh | System comprising a soil cultivation device, an object located in the vicinity of the soil cultivation device, a detection device and a control device |
| CN110173948A (en) * | 2019-05-22 | 2019-08-27 | 海信(山东)冰箱有限公司 | A kind of method and device controlling facility switching door |
| US11761134B2 (en) | 2019-05-23 | 2023-09-19 | Whirlpool Corporation | Laundry appliance |
| ES2969919T3 (en) * | 2019-05-23 | 2024-05-23 | Liebherr Hausgeraete Ochsenhausen Gmbh | Refrigerator and/or freezer |
| US11377772B2 (en) | 2019-05-23 | 2022-07-05 | Whirlpool Corporation | Laundry appliance |
| CN210374267U (en) | 2019-06-11 | 2020-04-21 | 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 | refrigerator |
| JP2019200042A (en) * | 2019-07-18 | 2019-11-21 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP7424793B2 (en) * | 2019-10-29 | 2024-01-30 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| AU2020393453B2 (en) * | 2019-11-28 | 2024-03-14 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Refrigerator |
| CN112880259A (en) * | 2019-11-29 | 2021-06-01 | 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 | Refrigerator with a door |
| WO2021112409A1 (en) | 2019-12-05 | 2021-06-10 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| WO2021153059A1 (en) * | 2020-01-29 | 2021-08-05 | アルプスアルパイン株式会社 | Electrostatic input device |
| KR20210103608A (en) * | 2020-02-13 | 2021-08-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Refrigerator, server and method for controlling the refrigerator |
| KR102128698B1 (en) * | 2020-04-17 | 2020-06-30 | 장석운 | Air Freshener with Gas Removal Function |
| CN111425064B (en) * | 2020-05-06 | 2021-09-03 | 合肥华凌股份有限公司 | Door assembly and storage cabinet |
| KR102510802B1 (en) * | 2020-11-27 | 2023-03-17 | 곽정규 | Smart set storage box for custom cosmetics |
| US12167906B2 (en) | 2021-01-07 | 2024-12-17 | Toyota Motor Engineering & Manufacturing North America, Inc. | Emotion-aware smart refrigerator |
| KR20220102426A (en) * | 2021-01-13 | 2022-07-20 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Dishwasher |
| EP4050289B1 (en) * | 2021-02-25 | 2025-10-01 | Liebherr-Hausgeräte Ochsenhausen GmbH | Operating unit for a fridge and/or freezer |
| DE102021205018A1 (en) | 2021-05-18 | 2022-11-24 | BSH Hausgeräte GmbH | Household appliance with a specific automatic door opening and procedure |
| CN115406148A (en) * | 2021-05-28 | 2022-11-29 | 重庆海尔制冷电器有限公司 | Refrigerator and control method thereof |
| JP7581166B2 (en) * | 2021-09-14 | 2024-11-12 | 日立グローバルライフソリューションズ株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP7600058B2 (en) * | 2021-09-08 | 2024-12-16 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| KR102577283B1 (en) * | 2021-10-26 | 2023-09-12 | 주식회사 콜러노비타 | Non-contact operating device of bidet |
| KR20230071576A (en) | 2021-11-16 | 2023-05-23 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Home appliance |
| TWI778871B (en) * | 2021-11-23 | 2022-09-21 | 台灣松下電器股份有限公司 | Refrigerator and method of making the same |
| IT202100032807A1 (en) * | 2021-12-28 | 2023-06-28 | Gewiss Spa | COVERING STRUCTURE FOR ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT |
| JP2023117086A (en) * | 2022-02-10 | 2023-08-23 | 東芝ライフスタイル株式会社 | refrigerator |
| CN116734538A (en) * | 2022-03-04 | 2023-09-12 | 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 | Refrigerator with a refrigerator body |
| KR20230151126A (en) * | 2022-04-22 | 2023-11-01 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Door assembly and refrigerator |
| CN114739106B (en) * | 2022-04-25 | 2024-07-30 | 海信冰箱有限公司 | Refrigerator and refrigerator control method |
| KR20230157184A (en) * | 2022-05-09 | 2023-11-16 | 삼성전자주식회사 | capacitance type door sensor and electric appliances using the same |
| WO2024039033A1 (en) * | 2022-08-18 | 2024-02-22 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator capable of reducing touch input noise and control method thereof |
| JP2024039193A (en) * | 2022-09-09 | 2024-03-22 | ソニーセミコンダクタソリューションズ株式会社 | Information processing device, program, and information processing method |
| US20240230213A9 (en) * | 2022-10-19 | 2024-07-11 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Refrigerator |
| EP4556826A4 (en) * | 2023-02-02 | 2025-12-10 | Samsung Electronics Co Ltd | REFRIGERATOR WITH CONTACT INTERFACES |
| JP7588891B2 (en) * | 2023-04-20 | 2024-11-25 | 山東科技大学 | Food storage and removal system, method and smart refrigerator |
| KR20250150421A (en) * | 2024-04-11 | 2025-10-20 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator |
Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2005344977A (en) * | 2004-06-01 | 2005-12-15 | Toshiba Corp | refrigerator |
| JP2011074617A (en) * | 2009-09-29 | 2011-04-14 | Sun Wave Corp | Apparatus for automatically opening/closing door |
| JP2011096369A (en) * | 2009-10-27 | 2011-05-12 | Fujikura Ltd | Capacitance switch device |
Family Cites Families (115)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| DE7705429U1 (en) * | 1977-02-23 | 1977-06-02 | Bosch-Siemens Hausgeraete Gmbh, 7000 Stuttgart | Switching and display device for an electrically operated household appliance, in particular a control panel for a freezer or the like |
| JPS6091171A (en) * | 1983-10-25 | 1985-05-22 | 松下冷機株式会社 | Rapid optical refrigerator for refrigerator |
| JPH0173689U (en) * | 1987-10-30 | 1989-05-18 | ||
| JPH079340B2 (en) * | 1988-01-04 | 1995-02-01 | 株式会社東芝 | refrigerator |
| CN2037457U (en) * | 1988-07-27 | 1989-05-10 | 顾文照 | Multifunction electronic controller of frigidarium |
| US5100213A (en) * | 1990-06-07 | 1992-03-31 | Amana Refrigeration Inc. | Vertical sliding chiller compartment door |
| JPH04347234A (en) | 1991-05-24 | 1992-12-02 | Taisei Corp | How to join precast concrete members |
| JPH0587443A (en) * | 1991-09-26 | 1993-04-06 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | refrigerator |
| JPH08339750A (en) * | 1995-06-13 | 1996-12-24 | Seikosha Co Ltd | Static capacity type proximity switch |
| DE19835462C2 (en) * | 1998-08-06 | 2003-10-30 | Heinrich Klostermann | transport container |
| ATE318359T1 (en) * | 1998-08-19 | 2006-03-15 | Fisher & Paykel Appliances Ltd | DOOR OPENING AND CLOSING SYSTEM |
| JP2000111238A (en) * | 1998-10-02 | 2000-04-18 | Nec Gumma Ltd | Automated door closing refrigerator |
| DE60032982T2 (en) * | 1999-09-13 | 2007-11-15 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma | Speech recognition for controlling a device |
| CN2429801Y (en) * | 2000-06-13 | 2001-05-09 | 广东科龙电器股份有限公司 | Intelleclural refrigerator with speech control |
| CN100465559C (en) * | 2001-05-09 | 2009-03-04 | 海尔集团公司 | voice door refrigerator |
| CN1393672A (en) * | 2001-06-24 | 2003-01-29 | 海尔集团公司 | Refrigerator with sound controlled gate |
| CN2486933Y (en) * | 2001-06-24 | 2002-04-17 | 海尔集团公司 | Sound control door-open refrigerator |
| JP3923755B2 (en) * | 2001-07-12 | 2007-06-06 | 株式会社東芝 | refrigerator |
| KR20030021810A (en) * | 2001-09-07 | 2003-03-15 | 주식회사 엘지이아이 | Lamp apparatus of refrigerator |
| CN1252437C (en) * | 2001-11-27 | 2006-04-19 | 广东科龙电器股份有限公司 | Refrigerator door open-close control method and refrigerator using said method |
| JP2004044980A (en) * | 2002-07-15 | 2004-02-12 | Toshiba Corp | Refrigerator door |
| JP2004108604A (en) * | 2002-09-13 | 2004-04-08 | Hitachi Ltd | Door control device, automatic door, door control method, and refrigerator using automatic door |
| JP2004340499A (en) * | 2003-05-16 | 2004-12-02 | Toshiba Corp | Refrigerator and control method thereof |
| US20040251746A1 (en) * | 2003-06-12 | 2004-12-16 | Nifco Inc. | Moving device |
| JP2005011773A (en) * | 2003-06-20 | 2005-01-13 | Toshiba Corp | Touch switch device and refrigerator provided with touch switch device |
| JP2005241215A (en) * | 2004-02-27 | 2005-09-08 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | Electrical device, refrigerator, refrigerator operation method |
| KR20050097788A (en) * | 2004-04-02 | 2005-10-10 | 위니아만도 주식회사 | Open and close apparatus of door using electro-magnet |
| JP4168969B2 (en) * | 2004-04-27 | 2008-10-22 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Cooker using touch keys |
| JP4531469B2 (en) * | 2004-07-15 | 2010-08-25 | 株式会社フジクラ | Capacitive proximity sensor |
| US20100231506A1 (en) * | 2004-09-07 | 2010-09-16 | Timothy Pryor | Control of appliances, kitchen and home |
| SE0402261D0 (en) * | 2004-09-17 | 2004-09-17 | Electrolux Home Prod Corp | Capacitive Sensor System |
| KR100619757B1 (en) * | 2004-11-09 | 2006-09-07 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator with basket lift device and control method of basket lift device of the refrigerator |
| JP4347234B2 (en) * | 2005-02-14 | 2009-10-21 | パナソニック株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP4301216B2 (en) * | 2005-07-05 | 2009-07-22 | パナソニック株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP4254755B2 (en) * | 2005-07-05 | 2009-04-15 | パナソニック株式会社 | refrigerator |
| KR20070047896A (en) * | 2005-11-03 | 2007-05-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| JP4587317B2 (en) * | 2006-01-24 | 2010-11-24 | 国立大学法人岐阜大学 | Proximity sensor and proximity / contact sensor |
| JP4687478B2 (en) * | 2006-01-31 | 2011-05-25 | ぺんてる株式会社 | Capacitive touch switch device |
| KR100678067B1 (en) * | 2006-02-28 | 2007-02-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Touch sensor device |
| EP2089969B1 (en) * | 2006-03-13 | 2013-07-10 | IDENT Technology AG | Capacitive sensor device |
| RU2452083C2 (en) * | 2006-03-17 | 2012-05-27 | Электролюкс Хоум Продактс Корпорейшн Н.В. | Door position detection system |
| JP4667288B2 (en) * | 2006-03-31 | 2011-04-06 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Storage |
| CN2909123Y (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2007-06-06 | 广东富信电子科技有限公司 | Controller for refrigerator |
| KR20080004822A (en) * | 2006-07-06 | 2008-01-10 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator Automatic Display |
| KR100764281B1 (en) * | 2006-07-20 | 2007-10-05 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Information management device of the refrigerator |
| JP5045023B2 (en) * | 2006-08-09 | 2012-10-10 | パナソニック株式会社 | Input device |
| CN101126591B (en) * | 2006-08-17 | 2010-10-13 | 泰州乐金电子冷机有限公司 | Refrigerator controller package assembly |
| CN101131276A (en) * | 2006-08-22 | 2008-02-27 | 泰州乐金电子冷机有限公司 | Refrigerated air supply apparatus for refrigerator storeroom |
| JP4991236B2 (en) * | 2006-10-05 | 2012-08-01 | 株式会社東芝 | refrigerator |
| KR20080037269A (en) * | 2006-10-25 | 2008-04-30 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator Lighting |
| KR20080057474A (en) * | 2006-12-20 | 2008-06-25 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| US7686127B2 (en) * | 2007-01-04 | 2010-03-30 | Whirlpool Corporation | Acoustic chamber as part of adapter or appliance |
| ES2467466T3 (en) * | 2007-01-22 | 2014-06-12 | Panasonic Corporation | Cooking appliance |
| JP4384191B2 (en) * | 2007-02-09 | 2009-12-16 | 日立アプライアンス株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP4384187B2 (en) * | 2007-02-09 | 2009-12-16 | 日立アプライアンス株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP2009024921A (en) * | 2007-07-19 | 2009-02-05 | Hitachi Appliances Inc | refrigerator |
| JP2009032570A (en) * | 2007-07-27 | 2009-02-12 | Fujikura Ltd | Human body approach detection device |
| KR100885584B1 (en) * | 2007-08-23 | 2009-02-24 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator and its control method |
| JP2009063064A (en) * | 2007-09-06 | 2009-03-26 | Hitachi Appliances Inc | Vacuum heat insulating material and refrigerator using the same |
| US8421757B2 (en) * | 2007-10-12 | 2013-04-16 | Sony Corporation | Touch sensor with a plurality of touch sensor sections |
| JP5315910B2 (en) * | 2007-10-12 | 2013-10-16 | ソニー株式会社 | Contact sensor |
| CN201116818Y (en) * | 2007-10-12 | 2008-09-17 | 东莞凤岗雁田精博塑胶电子制品厂 | Soft shell small refrigerator |
| KR20090043993A (en) * | 2007-10-30 | 2009-05-07 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Door opening and closing control device of the refrigerator and its control method |
| CN101469504B (en) * | 2007-12-29 | 2012-09-19 | 海尔集团公司 | Method and system for detecting and reminding a washing machine |
| KR101245140B1 (en) * | 2008-02-12 | 2013-03-25 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Refrigerator and control method thereof |
| KR101576672B1 (en) * | 2008-02-21 | 2015-12-10 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Refrigerator and refrigerator door |
| AU2009200531B2 (en) * | 2008-03-10 | 2014-07-24 | Aktiebolaget Electrolux | An Appliance Door Sensor |
| JP5238329B2 (en) | 2008-04-14 | 2013-07-17 | 株式会社東芝 | refrigerator |
| CN101738051B (en) * | 2008-11-27 | 2012-10-31 | 无锡松下冷机有限公司 | refrigerator |
| TWI548846B (en) * | 2008-12-24 | 2016-09-11 | Panasonic Corp | Refrigerator |
| DE102009026659B4 (en) * | 2009-06-03 | 2024-08-01 | BSH Hausgeräte GmbH | Household appliance |
| EP2267386A3 (en) * | 2009-06-22 | 2014-01-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Refrigerator |
| KR20120111910A (en) * | 2009-06-29 | 2012-10-11 | 소니 주식회사 | Electrostatic capacitive type touch panel and display device equipped with a touch detection function |
| WO2011002025A1 (en) * | 2009-06-30 | 2011-01-06 | 信越ポリマー株式会社 | Capacitance sensor and manufacturing method thereof |
| US8434837B2 (en) * | 2009-07-08 | 2013-05-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Refrigerator |
| JP4948578B2 (en) * | 2009-08-12 | 2012-06-06 | 日立アプライアンス株式会社 | refrigerator |
| KR101100146B1 (en) * | 2009-08-12 | 2011-12-29 | 히타치 어플라이언스 가부시키가이샤 | Refrigerator |
| KR20110024883A (en) * | 2009-09-03 | 2011-03-09 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Automatic door opening and closing device and refrigerator having same |
| JP5563275B2 (en) * | 2009-10-27 | 2014-07-30 | パナソニック株式会社 | Outlet |
| CN202050396U (en) * | 2011-05-03 | 2011-11-23 | 旭丽电子(广州)有限公司 | Touch control device |
| JP5671705B2 (en) * | 2009-12-16 | 2015-02-18 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | refrigerator |
| CN201575653U (en) * | 2010-01-08 | 2010-09-08 | 泰州乐金电子冷机有限公司 | Automatic door-openable refrigerator |
| JP2011144993A (en) * | 2010-01-14 | 2011-07-28 | Panasonic Corp | Refrigerator |
| KR101831614B1 (en) * | 2010-01-28 | 2018-02-26 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Refrigerator |
| CN101846434A (en) * | 2010-03-26 | 2010-09-29 | 海信容声(广东)冰箱有限公司 | Control device and method of refrigerator display panel background light |
| US9595960B2 (en) * | 2010-05-04 | 2017-03-14 | Whirlpool Corporation | Dead-front user interface |
| JP5590974B2 (en) * | 2010-06-08 | 2014-09-17 | キヤノン株式会社 | Operating device and image reading device |
| JP2012013422A (en) * | 2010-06-29 | 2012-01-19 | Yazaki Corp | Moving direction determining device |
| JP2012017866A (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2012-01-26 | Panasonic Corp | Refrigerator |
| JP2012017865A (en) | 2010-07-06 | 2012-01-26 | Panasonic Corp | Refrigerator |
| CN201724505U (en) * | 2010-07-13 | 2011-01-26 | 江苏德莱仕电器有限公司 | Bidirectional sliding door for refrigerator |
| CN201724516U (en) * | 2010-07-13 | 2011-01-26 | 江苏德莱仕电器有限公司 | Refrigerator with intelligent opening and closing door |
| JP5667805B2 (en) * | 2010-07-14 | 2015-02-12 | 日立アプライアンス株式会社 | refrigerator |
| CN201726574U (en) * | 2010-07-23 | 2011-01-26 | 海信容声(广东)冰箱有限公司 | Automatic control device of interior light of box body |
| KR101114873B1 (en) * | 2010-08-31 | 2012-02-28 | 주식회사 이음플러스 | Movement sensing device and movement sensing method using proximity sensor |
| KR101768699B1 (en) * | 2010-12-07 | 2017-08-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Device of opening and shutting double door for refrigerator |
| JP5637898B2 (en) * | 2011-02-25 | 2014-12-10 | 住友理工株式会社 | Touch switch |
| CN202049720U (en) * | 2011-03-16 | 2011-11-23 | 安徽康佳同创电器有限公司 | Display device and refrigerator employing same |
| KR20120134586A (en) * | 2011-06-03 | 2012-12-12 | 강태훈 | Added display function and equipped network refrigerator |
| JP5784427B2 (en) * | 2011-09-07 | 2015-09-24 | 株式会社東芝 | refrigerator |
| KR101373088B1 (en) * | 2011-09-08 | 2014-03-11 | 히타치 어플라이언스 가부시키가이샤 | Refrigerator |
| JP5779485B2 (en) * | 2011-09-08 | 2015-09-16 | 日立アプライアンス株式会社 | refrigerator |
| JP2013077556A (en) * | 2011-09-12 | 2013-04-25 | Futaba Corp | Touch switch |
| CN202928279U (en) * | 2011-09-13 | 2013-05-08 | 江苏白雪电器股份有限公司 | Refrigerator |
| CN202413589U (en) * | 2011-10-20 | 2012-09-05 | 范小骐 | Automobile door and door frame edge prompting signal system |
| CN103126600B (en) * | 2011-11-21 | 2016-04-06 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Seat device |
| CN102494511A (en) * | 2011-11-24 | 2012-06-13 | 李守勇 | Opening method of refrigerator door and refrigerator using same |
| DE202012005255U1 (en) * | 2012-05-29 | 2012-06-26 | Youse Gmbh | Operating device with a gesture monitoring unit |
| CN102889751A (en) * | 2012-10-31 | 2013-01-23 | 昆山黄昆纺织机械有限公司 | Speech recognition refrigerator |
| CN102945671A (en) * | 2012-10-31 | 2013-02-27 | 四川长虹电器股份有限公司 | Voice recognition method |
| CN203012693U (en) * | 2012-12-03 | 2013-06-19 | 合肥美菱股份有限公司 | Capacitive touch screen applied to refrigerator |
| CN103051321A (en) * | 2012-12-10 | 2013-04-17 | 天津天地伟业数码科技有限公司 | Touch key applied to monitoring equipment |
| CN103277974B (en) * | 2013-06-19 | 2016-01-27 | 青海汉拉信息科技股份有限公司 | Chinese speech controls the device of intelligent refrigerator |
| CN103438658A (en) * | 2013-08-15 | 2013-12-11 | 四川长虹电器股份有限公司 | Intelligent refrigerator gesture control system |
| CN103838496B (en) * | 2014-02-20 | 2020-01-31 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | method for controlling electronic equipment and electronic equipment |
-
2014
- 2014-06-19 JP JP2014126223A patent/JP6373653B2/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710341458.7A patent/CN107024070A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710416425.4A patent/CN107192207B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710330493.9A patent/CN106940120A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710341473.1A patent/CN107024060A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710341560.7A patent/CN107144080B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710445097.0A patent/CN107367109A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 TW TW103121915A patent/TWI572837B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710416424.XA patent/CN107166857B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710367605.8A patent/CN107036371A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710367960.5A patent/CN107062758B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 KR KR1020207033647A patent/KR20200135566A/en not_active Ceased
- 2014-06-25 KR KR1020157034101A patent/KR101836592B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2014-06-25 KR KR1020217013588A patent/KR20210054062A/en not_active Ceased
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710438589.7A patent/CN107131713B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710346933.XA patent/CN106949700A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710368179.XA patent/CN107062797B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710426220.4A patent/CN107421199A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710411405.8A patent/CN106969578A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710416437.7A patent/CN107014138B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710367971.3A patent/CN107084586B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710411451.8A patent/CN107152834B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201480030279.6A patent/CN105308403B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 MY MYPI2015704482A patent/MY183145A/en unknown
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710439471.6A patent/CN107166858A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710412696.2A patent/CN107166856A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 KR KR1020187005444A patent/KR102184333B1/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710416447.0A patent/CN107062760B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 WO PCT/JP2014/066808 patent/WO2014208585A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710367841.XA patent/CN107152833A/en active Pending
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710377586.7A patent/CN107388705B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710411404.3A patent/CN107166855B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710438239.0A patent/CN107178957B/en active Active
- 2014-06-25 CN CN201710403097.4A patent/CN107388706B/en active Active
Patent Citations (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2005344977A (en) * | 2004-06-01 | 2005-12-15 | Toshiba Corp | refrigerator |
| JP2011074617A (en) * | 2009-09-29 | 2011-04-14 | Sun Wave Corp | Apparatus for automatically opening/closing door |
| JP2011096369A (en) * | 2009-10-27 | 2011-05-12 | Fujikura Ltd | Capacitance switch device |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN105308403B (en) | refrigerator | |
| JP7569905B2 (en) | refrigerator |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination |